OWNER’S MANUAL - SEAT · 2016. 9. 7. · MANUAL Altea 5P0012720BC Inglés 5P0012720BC (11.14) (GT9) Altea Inglés (11.14) SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development

OWNER’S MANUAL

Altea

5P0012720BC

Ingl

és 5

P001

2720

BC

(11

.14)

(G

T9)

Alt

ea

Ingl

és (

11.1

4)

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.14

About this manual

This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the vehicle at the time this manual was published. Some of the units described herein will not be available until a later date or are only available in cer-tain markets.

Because this is a general manual for the ALTEA range, some of the equipment and functions that are described in this manual are not included in all types or variants of the model; they may vary or be modified depend-ing on the technical requirements and on the market; this is in no way deceptive advertis-ing.

The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.

The steering indications (left, right, forward, reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the normal driving movements of the vehicle ex-cept when otherwise indicated.

* The equipment marked with an aster-isk* is fitted as standard only in certain versions, and is only supplied as op-tional extras for some versions, or are only offered in certain countries.

® All registered marks are indicated with ®. Although the copyright symbol does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.

>> The section is continued on the follow-ing page.

WARNING

Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor-mation on safety. They warn you about possi-ble dangers of accident or injury.

CAUTION

Texts with this symbol draw your attention to potential sources of damage to your vehicle.

For the sake of the environment

Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele-vant information concerning environmental protection.

Note

Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio-nal information.

This manual is divided into five large parts, which are:

1. Safety

2. Operation

3. Tips

4. Technical data

5. Alphabetical index

At the end of this manual, there is a detailed alphabetical index that will help you quickly find the information you require.

ForewordThis Instruction Manual and its correspond-ing supplements should be read carefully tofamiliarise yourself with your vehicle.

Besides the regular care and maintenance ofthe vehicle, its correct handling will help pre-serve its value.

For safety reasons, always note the informa-tion concerning accessories, modificationsand part replacements.

If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-boarddocumentation to the new owner, as itshould be kept with the vehicle.

You can access the information in this man-ual using:

● Thematic table of contents that follows themanual’s general chapter structure

● Alphabetical index with many terms andsynonyms to help you find information.

WARNING

Read and always observe safety informa-tion concerning the passenger's front air-bag ››› page 25, Important informationregarding the front passenger's airbag.

Table of Contents

Table of ContentsSafety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Safety first! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Proper sitting position for occupants . . . . . . . . 6Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11The reason why we should wear seat belts . . . 11How to properly adjust your seatbelt . . . . . . . . 14Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Airbag overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Deactivating airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Transporting children safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Digital instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Instrument panel menus* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Steering wheel controls* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Radio navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Radio frequency remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Boot hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Sliding/tilting sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Windscreen wiper and rear window wipersystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Rear vision mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Seats and head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Adjusting the seat and head restraints . . . . . . 88Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . . . . 93Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Multi-purpose mobile storage compartment* . 96Ashtray*, cigarette lighter* and power sockets 98First-aid kit, warning triangle, fire extinguisher 100Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Roof carrier/rack system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Climatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Power steering (servotronic*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117All-wheel drive* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Driving with LPG* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Journeys abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gearbox* . 127Run-in and economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Braking and stability systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Start-Stop System* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Parking aid acoustic system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Cruise speed* (cruise control system - CCS) . . . 142Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Accessories and technical modifications . . . . . 147Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Care of the vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Caring for the vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160LPG system (Liquefied petroleum gas)* . . . . . . 160Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . 163Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Winter service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Vehicle tools, spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Emergency locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . 193Changing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Changing the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

3

Table of Contents

Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Technical features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Information on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . 208Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Dimensions and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

4

Safe driving

Safety

Safe driving

Safety first!

WARNING

● This manual contains important informa-tion about the operation of the vehicle, bothfor the driver and the passengers. The othersections of the on-board documentation alsocontain further information that you shouldbe aware of for your own safety and for thesafety of your passengers.

● Ensure that the onboard documentation iskept in the vehicle at all times. This is espe-cially important when lending or selling thevehicle to another person.

Advice about driving

Before setting off

For your own safety and the safety of yourpassengers, always note the following pointsbefore every trip:

– Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turnsignals are working properly.

– Check tyre pressure.

– Ensure that all windows provide a clear andgood view of the surroundings.

– Make sure all luggage is secured››› page 101.

– Make sure that no objects can interferewith the pedals.

– Adjust front seat, head restraint and rear vi-sion mirrors properly according to yoursize.

– Ensure that the passengers in the rearseats always have the head restraints inthe in-use position ››› page 10.

– Instruct passengers to adjust the head re-straints according to their height.

– Protect children with appropriate childseats and properly applied seat belts››› page 24.

– Assume the correct sitting position. Instructyour passengers also to assume a propersitting position. ››› page 6.

– Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct yourpassengers also to fasten their seat beltsproperly. ››› page 11.

What affects driving safety?

As a driver, you are responsible for yourselfand your passengers. When your concentra-tion or driving safety is affected by any cir-

cumstance, you endanger yourself as well asothers on the road ››› , for this reason:

– Always pay attention to traffic and do notget distracted by passengers or telephonecalls.

– Never drive when your driving ability is im-paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).

– Observe traffic laws and speed limits.

– Always reduce your speed as appropriatefor road, traffic and weather conditions.

– When travelling long distances, takebreaks regularly - at least every two hours.

– If possible, avoid driving when you are tiredor stressed.

WARNING

When driving safety is impaired during a trip,the risk of injury and accidents increases.

Safety equipment

Never put your safety or the safety of yourpassengers in danger. In the event of an acci-dent, the safety equipment may reduce therisk of injury. The following list includes mostof the safety equipment in your SEAT:

● Three-point seat belts

● belt tension limiters for the front and rearside seats, »

5

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Safety

● Belt tensioners for the front seats

● Belt height adjustment for the front seats

● Front airbags

● Side airbags in the front seat backrests

● Head-protection airbags

● Active front head restraints*

● “ISOFIX” anchorage points for child seatsin the rear side seats with the “ISOFIX” sys-tem,

● height-adjustable front head restraints,

● rear head restraints with in-use positionand non-use position,

● adjustable steering column.

The safety equipment mentioned aboveworks together to provide you and your pas-sengers with the best possible protection inthe event of an accident. However, thesesafety systems can only be effective if youand your passengers are sitting in a correctposition and use this equipment properly.

Safety is everyone's business!

Proper sitting position foroccupants

Correct sitting position for driver

Fig. 1 The proper distance between driverand steering wheel

Fig. 2 Correct head restraint position for thedriver.

For your own safety and to reduce the risk ofinjury in the event of an accident, we recom-

mend the following adjustments for the driv-er:

– Adjust the steering wheel so that there is adistance of at least 25 cm between thesteering wheel and the centre of your chest››› Fig. 1.

– Move the driver seat forwards or backwardsso that you are able to press the accelera-tor, brake and clutch pedals to the floorwith your knees still slightly angled ››› .

– Ensure that you can reach the highest pointof the steering wheel.

– Adjust the head restraint so that its upperedge is at the same level as the top of yourhead, or as close as possible to the samelevel as the top of your head ››› Fig. 2.

– Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-tion so that your back rests completelyagainst it.

– Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 11.

– Keep both feet in the footwell so that youhave the vehicle under control at all times.

Adjustment of the driver seat ››› page 88.

WARNING

● An incorrect sitting position of the drivercan lead to severe injuries.

● Adjust the driver seat so that there is atleast 25 cm distance between the centre of

6

Safe driving

the chest and the centre of the steeringwheel ››› Fig. 1. If you are sitting closer than25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect youproperly.

● If your physical constitution prevents youfrom maintaining the minimum distance of 25cm, contact a specialised workshop. Theworkshop will help you decide if special spe-cific modifications are necessary.

● When driving, always hold the steeringwheel with both hands on the outside of thering at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions.This reduces the risk of injury when the driverairbag is triggered.

● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g.in the centre of the steering wheel). In suchcases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sus-tain injuries to the arms, hands and head.

● To reduce the risk of injury to the driverduring sudden braking manoeuvres or an ac-cident, never drive with the backrest tilted farback! The airbag system and seat belts canonly provide optimal protection when thebackrest is in an upright position and thedriver is wearing his or her seat belt correct-ly.

● Adjust the head restraint properly to ach-ieve optimal protection.

Adjusting the steering wheel position

Fig. 3 Adjusting the steering wheel position.

The height and reach of the steering wheelcan be freely adjusted to suit the driver.

– Adjust the driver seat to the correct posi-tion.

– Push the lever under the steering column››› Fig. 3 down ››› .

– Adjust the steering wheel until the correctposition is set ››› Fig. 1.

– Then push the lever up again firmly ››› .

WARNING

● Incorrect use of the steering column adjust-ment function and an incorrect seating posi-tion can result in serious injury.

● To avoid accidents, the steering columnshould be adjusted only when the vehicle isstationary.

● Adjust the driver seat or steering wheel sothat there is a distance of at least 25 cm be-tween the steering wheel and your chest››› Fig. 1. If you fail to observe the minimumdistance, the airbag will not protect you. Riskof fatal injury.

● If your physical constitution does not allowyou to maintain the minimum distance of25 cm, contact a Technical Service. The Tech-nical Service will help you to decide if certainspecific modifications are necessary.

● If you adjust the steering wheel so that itpoints towards your face, the driver airbagwill not protect you properly in the event ofan accident. Make sure that the steeringwheel points towards your chest.

● When driving, always hold the steeringwheel with both hands on the outside of thering at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions.Never hold the steering wheel at the 12o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g.in the centre of the steering wheel, or on theinside of the rim). In such cases, if the airbagis triggered, you may sustain injuries to yourarms, hands and head.

7

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Safety

Correct sitting position for frontpassenger

For your own safety and to reduce the risk ofinjury in the event of an accident, we recom-mend the following adjustments for the frontpassenger:

– Move the front passenger seat back as faras possible ››› .

– Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-tion so that your back rests completelyagainst it.

– Adjust the head restraint so that its upperedge is at the same level as the top of yourhead, or as close as possible to the samelevel as the top of your head ››› page 9.

– Always keep both feet in the footwell infront of the front passenger seat.


It is possible to deactivate the front passen-ger airbag in exceptional circumstances.

Adjusting the front passenger seat››› page 89.

WARNING

● An incorrect sitting position of the frontpassenger can lead to severe injuries.

● Adjust the front passenger seat so thatthere is at least 25 cm between your chestand the dash panel. If you are sitting closer

than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protectyou properly.

● If your physical constitution prevents youfrom maintaining the minimum distance of 25cm, contact a specialised workshop. Theworkshop will help you decide if special spe-cific modifications are necessary.

● Always keep your feet in the footwell whenthe vehicle is moving; never rest them on thedash panel, out the window or on the seat. Anincorrect sitting position exposes you to anincreased risk of injury in case of a suddenbraking or an accident. If the airbag is trig-gered, you could sustain severe injuries dueto an incorrect sitting position.

● To reduce the risk of injury to the front pas-senger in events such as sudden braking ma-noeuvres or an accident, never travel with thebackrest tilted far back! The airbag systemand seat belts can only provide optimal pro-tection when the backrest is in an upright po-sition and the front passenger is wearing hisor her seat belt properly. The further the seatbackrests are tilted to the rear, the greaterthe risk of injury due to incorrect positioningof the belt web or to the incorrect sitting po-sition!

● Adjust the head restraint correctly in orderto achieve maximum protection.

Correct sitting position for passengersin the rear seats

To reduce the risk of injury in the event of asudden braking manoeuvre or an accident,passengers on the rear seat bench must con-sider the following:

– Sit up straight.

– Adjust the head restraint to the correct po-sition ››› page 10.

– Always keep both feet in the footwell infront of the rear seat.


– Use an appropriate child restraint systemwhen you take children in the vehicle››› page 24.

WARNING

● If the passengers in the rear seats are notsitting properly, they could sustain severe in-juries.

● Adjust the head restraint correctly in orderto achieve maximum protection.

● Seat belts can only provide optimal protec-tion when seat backrests are in an uprightposition and the vehicle occupants are wear-ing their seat belts correctly. If passengers Inthe rear seats are not sitting in an upright po-sition, the risk of injury due to incorrect posi-tioning of the seat belt increases.

8

Safe driving

Correct adjustment of front seat headrestraints

Fig. 4 Correctly adjusted head restraint asviewed from the front and the side.

Properly adjusted head restraints are an im-portant part of passenger protection and canreduce the risk of injuries in most accidentsituations.

– Adjust the head restraint so that its upperedge is, as far as possible, at the same lev-el as the top of your head, or at the veryleast, at eye level ››› Fig. 4.

Adjusting the head restraints ››› page 88

Active head restraints*

Vehicle occupants are pressed into theirseats during a rear-end collision. The result-ing body pressure on the seat backrest acti-vates the active head restraint* on the frontseat, which moves rapidly forward and up-

ward at the same time. This movement re-duces the distance between the occupant'shead and the head restraint, thus reducingthe risk of injuries such as whiplash.

WARNING

● Travelling with the head restraints removedor improperly adjusted increases the risk ofsevere injuries. Improper adjustment of thehead restraints may cause death in an acci-dent and increase the risk of suffering inju-ries during abrupt breaking actions or unex-pected manoeuvres.

● The head restraints must always be adjus-ted according to the height of the passenger.

Note

The active head restraints* could also be trig-gered if a vehicle occupant applies a high lev-el of pressure to the seat backrest (e.g. by“falling” back into the seat when entering thevehicle) or if pressure is applied to a frontseat head restraint from the rear. This acci-dental activation is, however, not dangerous,as the active head restraints will return to theoriginal position immediately and are thusonce again ready.

Examples of incorrect sittingpositions

Seat belts can provide optimal protection on-ly when the belt webs are properly posi-

tioned. Incorrect sitting positions substan-tially reduce the protective function of seatbelts and increase the risk of injury due to in-correct seat belt position. As the driver, youare responsible for all passengers, especiallychildren.

– Never allow anyone to assume an incorrectsitting position in the vehicle while travel-ling ››› .

The following list contains examples of sit-ting positions that could be dangerous for ve-hicle occupants. The list is not complete, butwe would like to make you aware of this is-sue.

Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion:

● Never stand in the vehicle.

● Never stand on the seats.

● Never kneel on the seats.

● Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear.

● Never lean against the dash panel.

● Never lie on the rear bench.

● Never sit on the front edge of a seat.

● Never sit sideways.

● Never lean out of a window.

● Never put your feet out of a window.

● Never put your feet on the dash panel.

● Never put your feet on the surface of a seat. »

9

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Safety

● Do not allow anyone to travel in the foot-well.

● Never travel without wearing the seat belt.

● Do not allow anyone to travel in the lug-gage compartment.

WARNING

● Any incorrect sitting position increases therisk of severe injuries.

● Sitting in an incorrect position exposes thevehicle occupants to severe injuries if airbagsare triggered, by striking a vehicle occupantwho has assumed an incorrect sitting posi-tion.

● Before the vehicle moves, assume the prop-er sitting position and maintain it throughoutthe trip. Before every trip, instruct your pas-sengers to sit properly and to stay in this po-sition during the trip ››› page 6, Proper sittingposition for occupants.

Correct adjustment of rear seat headrestraints

Fig. 5 Head restraints in the correct position.

Fig. 6 Head restraint position warning label.


Rear outer seat head restraints

– The rear outer seat head restraints have 3positions.

– Two positions for use ››› Fig. 5. In these po-sitions, the head restraints are used nor-mally, and along with the rear seat belts,protect passengers in the rear seats.

– And one position for non-use.

– To fit the head restraints in position for use,pull on the edges with both hands in thedirection of the arrow.

Centre rear head restraint

– The centre head restraint only has two posi-tions, in-use (head restraint up) and non-use (head restraint down).

WARNING

● Under no circumstances should the rearpassengers travel while the head restraintsare in the non-use position. See the warninglabel located on the rear side fixed window››› Fig. 6.

● Do not swap the centre rear head restraintwith either of the outer seat rear head re-straints. Risk of injury in case of an accident!

CAUTION

Note the instructions on the adjustment ofthe head restraints ››› page 90.

10

Seat belts

Pedal area

Pedals

– Ensure that you can always press the accel-erator, brake and clutch pedals unimpairedto the floor.

– Ensure that the pedals can return unim-paired to their initial positions.

– Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-tened during the trip and do not obstructthe pedals ››› .

Only use floor mats which leave the pedalsclear and which are secured to prevent themfrom slipping. You can obtain suitable floormats from a specialised dealership. Fasten-ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.

If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal mustbe pressed down thoroughly in order to stopthe vehicle.

Wearing suitable shoes

Always wear shoes which support your feetproperly and give you a good feeling for thepedals.

WARNING

● If the pedals are obstructed, an accidentmay occur. Risk of serious injuries.

● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor cov-erings over the original floor mats. Thiswould reduce the pedal area and could ob-struct the pedals, leading to a risk of acci-dent.

● Never place objects in the driver footwell.An object could move into the pedal area andimpair pedal operation. In the event of a sud-den driving or braking manoeuvre, you willnot be able to operate the brake, clutch or ac-celerator pedal. Risk of accident!

Seat belts

The reason why we shouldwear seat belts

Number of seats

Your vehicle has five seats, two in the frontand three in the rear. Each seat is equippedwith a three-point seat belt.

In some versions, your vehicle is approvedonly for four seats. Two front seats and tworear seats.

WARNING

● Never transport more than the permittedamount of people in your vehicle.

● Every vehicle occupant must properly fas-ten and wear the seat belt belonging to his orher seat. Children must be protected with anappropriate child restraint system.

Seat belt warning lamp*

The control lamp illuminates to remind thedriver to fasten his or her seat belt.

Before starting the vehicle:

– Fasten your seat belt securely. »

11

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Safety

– Instruct your passengers to fasten theirseat belts properly before driving off.

– Protect children by using a child seat ac-cording to the child's height and weight.

The control lamp on the instrument panellights up1) if the driver's seat belt is not fas-tened when the ignition is switched on.

If, when starting to drive, the speed surpass-es 25 km/h (15 mph) approx. and no seatbelt is worn or it is unfastened during thedrive, a warning sound will be heard for a fewseconds. The warning light will also flash .The lamp goes out when the seat belt isfastened with the ignition switched on.

Seat belt protection

Fig. 7 Drivers with properly worn seat beltswill not be thrown forward in the event of sud-den braking

Properly worn seat belts hold the occupantsin the proper position. They also help preventuncontrolled movements that may result inserious injury and reduce the risk of beingthrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci-dent.

Vehicle occupants wearing their seat beltscorrectly benefit greatly from the ability of thebelts to absorb kinetic energy. The front partof your vehicle and other passive safety fea-tures (such as the airbag system) are also de-signed to absorb the kinetic energy releasedin a collision. Taken together, all these fea-tures reduce the releasing kinetic energy andconsequently, the risk of injury. This is why it

is so important to fasten seat belts before ev-ery trip, even when "just driving around thecorner".

Ensure that your passengers wear their seatbelts as well. Accident statistics have shownthat wearing seat belts is an effective meansof substantially reducing the risk of seriousinjury and improving the chances of survivalwhen involved in an accident. Furthermore,properly worn seat belts improve the protec-tion provided by airbags in the event of anaccident. For this reason, wearing a seat beltis required by law in most countries.

Although your vehicle is equipped with air-bags, the seat belts must be fastened andworn. The front airbags, for example, are onlytriggered in some cases of head-on collision.The front airbags will not be triggered duringminor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli-sions, rollovers or accidents in which the air-bag trigger threshold value in the control unitis not exceeded.

Therefore, you should always wear your seatbelt and ensure that all vehicle occupantshave fastened their seat belts properly beforeyou drive off!

1) Depending on the model version12

Seat belts

Safety instructions on using seatbelts

– Always wear the seat belt as described inthis section.

– Ensure that the seat belts can be fastenedat all times and are not damaged.

WARNING

● If the seat belts are worn incorrectly or notat all, the risk of severe or fatal injuries in-creases. The optimal protection from seatbelts can be achieved only if you use themproperly.

● Fasten your seat belt before every trip -even when driving in town. The other vehicleoccupants must also wear the seat belts at alltimes, otherwise they run the risk of being in-jured.

● The seat belt cannot offer its full protectionif the seat belt is not positioned correctly.

● Never allow two passengers (even children)to share the same seat belt.

● Always keep both feet in the footwell infront of your seat as long as the vehicle is inmotion.

● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi-cle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.

● The seat belt must never be twisted while itis being worn.

● The seat belt should never lie on hard orfragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.)

because this could cause injuries in the caseof an accident.

● Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged orjammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.

● Never wear the seat belt under the arm orin any other incorrect position.

● Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoatover a jacket) impairs the proper fit and func-tion of the seat belts, reducing their capacityto protect.

● The slot in the seat belt buckle must not beblocked with paper or other objects, as thiscan prevent the latch plate from engaging se-curely.

● Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings orsimilar items to alter the position of the beltwebbing.

● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to theconnections, belt retractors or parts of thebuckle could cause severe injuries in theevent of an accident. Therefore, you mustcheck the condition of all seat belts at regularintervals.

● Seat belts which have been worn in an acci-dent and stretched must be replaced by aspecialised workshop. Renewal may be nec-essary even if there is no apparent damage.The belt anchorage should also be checked.

● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seatbelt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-moved or modified in any way.

● The belts must be kept clean, otherwise theretractors may not work properly››› page 157.

Head-on collisions and the laws ofphysics

Fig. 8 A driver not wearing a seat belt isthrown forward violently

Fig. 9 The unbelted passenger in the rearseat is thrown forward violently, hitting thedriver wearing a seat belt.

It is easy to explain how the laws of physicswork in the case of a head-on collision: Whena vehicle starts moving, a type of energy »

13

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Safety

called “kinetic energy” is created both in thepassengers and inside the vehicle.

The amount of “kinetic energy” depends onthe speed of the vehicle and the weight ofthe vehicle and its passengers. The higherthe speed and the greater the weight, themore energy there is to be “absorbed” in anaccident.

The most significant factor, however, is thespeed of the vehicle. If the speed doublesfrom 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h(30 mph), for example, the corresponding ki-netic energy is multiplied by four.

Because the vehicle occupants in our exam-ple are not restrained by seat belts, in theevent of crashing against a wall, all of the oc-cupants' kinetic energy will be absorbedsolely by said impact.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on thebody in a collision can easily exceed onetonne (1000 kg). At greater speed theseforces are even higher.

Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts arenot “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-oncollision, they will move forward at the samespeed their vehicle was travelling just beforethe impact. This example applies not only tohead-on collisions, but to all accidents andcollisions.

Even at low speeds the forces acting on thebody in a collision are so great that it is notpossible to brace oneself with one's hands.In a frontal collision, unbelted passengersare thrown forward and will make violent con-tact with the steering wheel, dash panel,windscreen or whatever else is in the way››› Fig. 8.

It is also important for the rear passengers towear seat belts properly, as they could other-wise be thrown forward violently through thevehicle interior in an accident. Passengers inthe rear seats who do not use seat belts en-danger not only themselves but also the frontoccupants ››› Fig. 9.

How to properly adjust yourseatbelt

Fastening and unfastening your seatbelt

Fig. 10 Positioning and removing the seatbelt buckle.

14

Seat belts

Fig. 11 Placing the seat belt in the shoulderand pelvis area for pregnant women.

Fastening the seat belt

The seat belt cannot offer its full protection ifthe seat belt is not positioned correctly.

● Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.

● To fasten the belt, take hold of the latchplate and pull it slowly across your chest andlap.

● Insert the latch plate into the buckle for theappropriate seat and push it down until it is

securely locked with an audible click››› Fig. 10 A.

● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate issecurely engaged in the buckle.

The seat belts are equipped with an automat-ic retractor on the shoulder strap. Full free-dom of movement is permitted when theshoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, dur-ing sudden braking, during travel in steepareas or bends and during acceleration, theautomatic retractor on the shoulder belt islocked.

The automatic belt retractors on the frontseats are fitted with seat belt tensioners››› page 16.

Seat belt release

● Press the red button on the belt buckle››› Fig. 10 B. The latch plate is released andsprings out ››› .

● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rollsup easily and the trim is not damaged.

Seat belt position

Seat belts offer their maximum protection on-ly when they are properly positioned.

The following features are available to adjustthe seat belt in the shoulder region:

● belt height adjustment for the front seats.

● front seat height adjustment*.

WARNING

● The seat belts offer best protection onlywhen the backrests are in an upright positionand the seat belts have been fastened prop-erly.

● Never put the latch plate in the buckle ofanother seat. If you do this, the seat belt willnot protect you properly and the risk of injuryis increased.

● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi-cle is in motion. If you do, you increase therisk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.

● An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause se-vere injuries in the event of an accident.

● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lieon the centre of the shoulder, never acrossthe neck. The seat belt must lie flat and snug-ly on the torso ››› Fig. 11.

● The lap part of the seat belt must lie acrossthe pelvis, never across the stomach. Theseat belt must lie flat and snugly on the pel-vis ››› Fig. 11. Pull the belt tight if necessaryto take up any slack.

● For pregnant women, the lap part of theseat belt must lie as low as possible over thepelvis, never across the stomach, and alwayslie flat so that no pressure is exerted on theabdomen.

● Always engage the retractor lock when youare securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1››› page 24.

● Read and observe the warnings ››› page 13.

15

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Safety

Adjusting the seat belt height

Fig. 12 Location of the belt height adjuster.

Seat belt height adjusters can be used to ad-just the position of the seat belt in the frontseats at the shoulder depending on a per-son's height.

– Press the upper part of the shoulder beltguide and hold it in this position ››› Fig. 12.

– Move the shoulder belt guide up or downuntil you have adjusted the seat belt››› page 14.

– After adjusting, pull the shoulder beltsharply to check that the catch on theshoulder belt guide is engaged securely.

Seat belt tensioners

How the seat belt tensioner works

During a frontal collision, the seat belts onthe front seats are retracted automatically.

The seat belts for the occupants in the frontseats are equipped with belt tensioners. Sen-sors will trigger the belt tensioners only dur-ing severe head-on, lateral and rear-end colli-sions and only if the seat belt is worn. Thetensioners retract and tighten the seat belts,reducing the forward motion of the occu-pants.

The seat belt tensioner can be triggered onlyonce.

The seat belt tensioners will not be triggeredin the event of a light frontal, side or rear col-lision, if the vehicle overturns or in situationswhere no large forces act on the front, side orrear of the vehicle.

Note

● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, afine dust is produced. This is normal and it isnot an indication of fire in the vehicle.

● The relevant safety requirements must beobserved when the vehicle or components ofthe system are scrapped. Specialised work-shops are familiar with these regulations,which are also available to you.

Service and disposal of belttensioners

The belt tensioners are components of theseat belts that are installed in the seats ofyour vehicle. If you work on the belt tension-ers or remove and install parts of the systemwhen performing other repair work, the seatbelt may be damaged. The consequence maybe that, in the event of an accident, the belttensioners function incorrectly or not at all.

So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten-sioner is not reduced and that removed partsdo not cause any injuries or environmentalpollution, regulations, which are known tothe specialised workshops, must be ob-served.

WARNING

● Improper use or repairs not carried out byqualified mechanics increase the risk of se-vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners mayfail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong cir-cumstances.

● Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove orinstall parts of the belt tensioners or seatbelts.

● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and auto-matic retractor cannot be repaired.

● Any work on the belt tensioners and seatbelts, including the removal and refitting ofsystem parts in conjunction with other repair

16

Airbag system

work, must be performed by a specialisedworkshop only.

● The belt tensioners will only provide pro-tection for one accident and must be changedif they have been activated.

Airbag system

Brief introduction

Why wear a seat belt and assume thecorrect sitting position?

For the inflating airbags to achieve the bestprotection, the seat belt must always be wornproperly and the correct sitting position mustbe assumed.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seatbelts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle'soverall passive safety system. Please bear inmind that the airbag system can only work ef-fectively when the vehicle occupants arewearing their seat belts correctly and haveadjusted the head restraints properly. There-fore, it is most important to wear the seatbelts at all times, not only because this is re-quired by law in most countries, but also foryour safety ››› page 11, The reason why weshould wear seat belts.

The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, soif you are not properly seated when the air-bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju-ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicleoccupants assume a correct sitting positionwhile travelling.

Sharp braking before an accident may causea passenger not wearing a seat belt to be

thrown forward into the area of the deployingairbag. In this case, the inflating airbag mayinflict critical or fatal injuries on the occu-pant. This also applies to children.

Always maintain the greatest possible dis-tance between yourself and the front airbag.This way, the front airbags can completelydeploy when triggered, providing their maxi-mum protection.

The most important factors that will triggeran airbag are: the type of accident, the angleof collision and the speed of the vehicle.

Whether or not the airbags are triggered de-pends primarily on the vehicle decelerationrate resulting from the collision and detectedby the control unit. If the vehicle decelerationoccurring during the collision and measuredby the control unit remains below the speci-fied reference values, the front, side and/orcurtain airbags will not be triggered. Take in-to account that the visible damage in a vehi-cle involved in an accident, no matter howserious, is not a determining factor for theairbags to have been triggered.

WARNING

● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assum-ing an incorrect sitting position can lead tocritical or fatal injuries.

● All vehicle occupants, including children,who are not properly belted can sustain criti-cal or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered. »

17

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Safety

Children up to 12 years old should alwaystravel on the rear seat. Never transport chil-dren in the vehicle if they are not restrainedor the restraint system is not appropriate fortheir age, size or weight.

● If you are not wearing a seat belt, or if youlean forward or to the side while travelling orassume an incorrect sitting position, there isa substantially increased risk of injury. Thisincreased risk of injury will be further in-creased if you are struck by an inflating air-bag.

● To reduce the risk of injury from an inflatingairbag, always wear the seat belt properly››› page 11.

● Always adjust the front seats properly.

Description of airbag system

The airbag system mainly comprises (as pervehicle equipment):

● an electronic control and monitoring sys-tem (control unit)

● frontal airbags for driver and passenger,

● side airbags,

● curtain (head) airbags,

● a control lamp on the dash panel››› page 19.

● a key-operated switch for front passengerairbag,

● a control lamp for disabling/enabling thefront passenger airbag.

The airbag system operation is monitoredelectronically. The airbag control lamp will il-luminate for a few seconds every time the ig-nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system if the controllamp :

● does not light up when the ignition isswitched on ››› page 19,

● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignitionis switched on

● turns off and then lights up again after theignition is switched on

● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle ismoving.

The airbag system is not triggered if:

● the ignition is switched off

● there is a minor frontal collision

● there is a minor side collision

● there is a rear-end collision

● the vehicle turns over.

WARNING

● The seat belts and airbags can only providemaximum protection if the occupants areseated correctly ››› page 6, Proper sitting po-sition for occupants.

● If a fault has occurred in the airbag system,have the system checked immediately by aspecialised workshop. Otherwise, during afrontal collision the system might not triggercorrectly or may fail to trigger at all.

Airbag activation

The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, withinthousandths of a second, to provide addi-tional protection in the event of an accident.A fine dust may develop when the airbag de-ploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-tion of fire in the vehicle.

The airbag system is only ready to functionwhen the ignition is on.

In special cases of an accident, several air-bags may activate at the same time.

In the event of minor head-on and side colli-sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll-over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.

Activation factors

The conditions that lead to the airbag systemactivating in each situation cannot be gener-alised. There are some factors that play animportant role, such as the properties of theobject the vehicle hits (hard/soft), angle ofimpact, vehicle speed, etc.

The deceleration trajectory is key for airbagactivation.

18

Airbag system

The control unit analyses the collision trajec-tory and activates the respective restraintsystem.

If the deceleration rate is below the prede-fined reference value in the control unit theairbags will not be triggered, even thoughthe accident may cause extensive damage tothe car.

The following airbags are triggered inserious head-on collisions

● Driver airbag.

● Front passenger front airbag.

The following airbags are triggered inserious side-on collisions

● Front side airbag on the side of the acci-dent.

● Rear side airbag on the side of the acci-dent.

● Curtain airbag on the side of the accident.

In an accident with airbag activation:

● the interior lights switch on (if the interiorlight switch is in the courtesy light position);

● the hazard warning lights switch on;

● all doors are unlocked;

● the fuel supply to the engine is cut.

Control lamp for airbag and seat belttensioner

The control lamp monitors all airbags andseat belt tensioners in the vehicle, includingcontrol units and wiring connections.

Monitoring of airbag and belt tensionersystem

Both the airbag and belt tensioner systemsoperation is constantly monitored electroni-cally. Each time the ignition is switched on,the control lamp illuminates for severalseconds (self-diagnosis) and the instrumentpanel display* shows AIRBAG/TENSIONER.

The system must be checked when thecontrol lamp :

● does not light up when the ignition isswitched on,

● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignitionis switched on

● turns off and then lights up again after theignition is switched on

● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle ismoving.

In the event of a malfunction, the warninglamp remains on continuously. In addition,depending on the malfunction, a fault mes-sage appears on the instrument panel dis-play for approximately 10 seconds and ashort audible warning is given. In this event,

you should have a specialised workshopcheck the system immediately.

If any of the airbags are disabled by a Techni-cal Service, the warning lamp flashes for sev-eral more seconds after verification and willturn off if there is no fault.

WARNING

● If there is a malfunction, the airbag andbelt tensioner system cannot properly per-form its protective function.

● If a malfunction occurs, have the systemchecked immediately by a specialised work-shop. Otherwise, in the event of an accident,the airbag system and belt tensioners maynot be triggered, or may not be triggered cor-rectly.

19

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Safety

Airbag overview

Front airbags

Fig. 13 Driver airbag in the steering wheel.

Fig. 14 Front passenger airbag in the dashpanel.

The front airbag for the driver is located inthe steering wheel ››› Fig. 13 and the airbagfor the front passenger is located in the dashpanel ››› Fig. 13. Airbags are identified by theword “AIRBAG”.

The airbag covers fold out of the steeringwheel and dash panel respectively when thedriver and front passenger airbags are trig-gered ››› Fig. 14. The airbag covers remainconnected to the steering wheel or the dashpanel.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the frontairbag system gives the driver and the frontpassenger additional protection for the headand chest in the event of a severe frontal col-lision.

The special design of the airbag allows thecontrolled escape of the propellant gas whenan occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus,the head and chest are surrounded and pro-tected by the airbag. After the collision, theairbag deflates sufficiently to allow visibility.

WARNING

● The seat belts and airbags can only providemaximum protection if the occupants areseated correctly ››› page 6, Proper sitting po-sition for occupants.

● The deployment space between the frontpassengers and the airbags must not in anycase be occupied by other passenger, petsand objects.

● The airbags provide protection for just oneaccident; replace them once they have de-ployed.

● It is also important not to attach any ob-jects such as cup holders or telephonemountings to the surfaces covering the air-bag units.

● Do not attempt to modify components ofthe airbag system in any way.

20

Airbag system

Side airbags*

Fig. 15 Side airbag in driver seat.

Fig. 16 Inflated side airbag on left side of ve-hicle.

The side airbags are located in the backrestcushions of the driver seat ››› Fig. 15 and thefront passenger seat and the rear side air-bags are mounted in the rear wheel housing.The locations are identified by the text “AIR-BAG” in the upper region of the backrestsand in the rear wheel housing lining.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the sideairbag system gives the front seat occupantsadditional protection for the upper body inthe event of a severe side collision.

In a side collision, the side airbags reducethe risk of injury to passengers on the frontseats to the areas of the body facing the im-pact. In addition to their normal function ofprotecting the occupants in a collision, theseat belts also hold the passengers in thefront seats and the outer rear seats in a posi-tion where these airbags can provide maxi-mum protection.

WARNING

● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you leanforward, or are not seated correctly while thevehicle is in motion, you are at a greater riskof injury if the side airbag system is triggeredin an accident.

● In order for the side airbags to provide theirmaximum protection, the prescribed sittingposition must always be maintained withseat belts fastened while travelling.

● Occupants of the outer seats must nevercarry any objects or pets in the deploymentspace between them and the airbags, or al-low children or other passengers to travel inthis position. It is also important not to at-tach any accessories (such as cup holders) tothe doors. This would impair the protectionoffered by the side airbags.

● The built-in coat hooks should be used onlyfor lightweight clothing. Do not leave anyheavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.

● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks,must not be exerted upon the backrest bol-ster because the system may be damaged. Inthis case, the side airbags would not be trig-gered.

● Under no circumstances should protectivecovers be fitted over seats with side airbagsunless the covers have been approved for usein your vehicle. Because the airbag is trig-gered from the side of the backrest, the useof non-approved seat covers would obstructthe side airbag, seriously reducing the air-bag's effectiveness ››› page 147.

● Any damage to the original seat upholsteryor around the seams of the side airbag unitsmust be repaired immediately by a special-ised workshop.


● Any work on the side airbag system or re-moval and installation of the airbag compo-nents for other repairs (such as removal ofthe front seat) should only be performed by aspecialised workshop. Otherwise, faults mayoccur during the airbag system operation.


● The side and head airbags are managedthrough sensors located in the interior of thefront doors. To ensure the correct operation ofthe side and curtain (head) airbags neither »

21

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Safety

the doors nor the door panels should bemodified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeak-ers). If the front door is damaged, the airbagsystem may not work correctly. All work car-ried out on the front door must be done in aspecialised workshop.

● In a side collision, the side airbags will notwork, if the sensors do not correctly measurethe pressure increase on the interior of thedoors, due to air escaping through the areaswith holes or openings in the door panel.

● Never drive the vehicle if the interior panelshave been removed.

● Never drive if the interior door panels havebeen removed or if the panels have not beencorrectly fitted.

● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakersin the door panels have been removed, un-less the holes left by the loudspeakers havebeen closed properly.

● Always check that the openings are closedor covered if additional loudspeakers or otherequipment are fitted inside the door panels.

● Any work carried out to the doors should bemade in an authorised specialised workshop.

Head-protection airbags*

Fig. 17 Location of head-protection airbagson the left side of the vehicle

Fig. 18 Deployed head-protection airbags.

The head-protection airbags are located onboth sides in the interior above the doors››› Fig. 17 and are identified with the text“AIRBAG”.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the head-protection airbag system gives the occupants

additional protection for the head and upperbody in the event of a severe side collision.

WARNING

● In order for the head-protection airbags toprovide their maximum protection, the pre-scribed sitting position must always be main-tained with seat belts fastened while travel-ling.

● For safety reasons, the curtain airbag mustbe disabled in those vehicles fitted with ascreen dividing the interior of the vehicle.See a Technical Service to make this adjust-ment.

● There must be no other persons, animals orobjects between the occupants of the outerseats and the deployment space of the head-protection airbags so that the head-protec-tion airbag can deploy completely without re-striction and provide the greatest possibleprotection. Therefore, sun blinds which havenot been expressly approved for use in yourvehicle may not be attached to the side win-dows ››› page 147.

● The built-in coat hooks should be used onlyfor lightweight clothing. Do not leave anyheavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hang-ers.


22

Airbag system

● Any work on the head-protection airbagsystem or removal and installation of the air-bag components for other repairs (such as re-moval of the roof lining) should only be per-formed by a specialised workshop. Other-wise, faults may occur during the airbag sys-tem operation.


● The side and head airbags are managedthrough sensors located in the interior of thefront doors. To ensure the correct operation ofthe side and curtain airbags, neither thedoors nor the door panels should be modifiedin any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If thefront door is damaged, the airbag systemmay not work correctly. All work carried outon the front door must be done in a special-ised workshop.

Deactivating airbags

Front passenger front airbagdeactivation

Fig. 19 In the glove compartment: Switch foractivating and deactivating the front passen-ger airbag

Fig. 20 Control lamp for deactivated frontpassenger airbag.

If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the frontpassenger seat, the front passenger front air-bag must be de-activated.

When the front passenger airbag is deactiva-ted, only the front airbag is deactivated. Allthe other airbags in the vehicle remain acti-vated.

Disabling the front passenger front airbag

– Switch the ignition off.

– Open the glove compartment on the frontpassenger side.

– Insert the key into the slot of the switch fordeactivating the front passenger airbag››› Fig. 19. About 3/4 of the key should en-ter, as far as it will go.

– Then turn the key gently to the OFF posi-tion. Do not force it if you feel resistance,and make sure you have inserted the keyfully.

– Check that the control lamp, “OFF”, on theinstrument panel ››› Fig. 20 remains litwhen the ignition is switched on ››› .

Activating the front passenger front airbag


– Open the glove compartment on the frontpassenger side.

– Insert the key into the slot of the switch fordeactivating the front passenger airbag »

23

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Safety

››› Fig. 19. About 3/4 of the key should en-ter, as far as it will go.

– Then turn the key gently to the ON position.Do not force it if you feel resistance, andmake sure you have inserted the key fully.

– Check that the control lamp on the instru-ment panel ››› Fig. 20 does not light upwhen the ignition is switched on ››› .

WARNING

● It is the driver's responsibility to ensurethat the key-operated switch is set to the cor-rect position.

● You should deactivate the front passengerfront airbag only if you have to use a rear-fac-ing child seat in exceptional cases››› page 24, Transporting children safety.

● Never install a child seat facing backwardson the front passenger seat unless the frontpassenger front airbag has been disabled.Otherwise, there is a risk of death.

● As soon as the child seat is no longer nee-ded on the front passenger seat, enable thefront passenger front airbag again.

● Only deactivate the front passenger frontairbag when the ignition is off, otherwise afault may occur in the airbag system, whichcould cause the airbag to not deploy properlyor not deploy at all in case of an accident.

● Never leave the key in the airbag deactiva-tion switch as it could get damaged or acti-vate or deactivate the airbag during driving.

● When the front passenger front airbag isdeactivated, if the control lamp AIRBAG OFFis not continuously lit up, there may be afault in the airbag system:

– Have the airbag system inspected imme-diately by a specialised workshop.

– Do not use a child seat on the front pas-senger seat! The front passenger frontairbag could be triggered in the event ofan accident, even if there is a fault in thesystem and, as a result, a child could sus-tain serious or fatal injuries.

– It is unpredictable whether the front pas-senger airbag will deploy in the event ofan accident. Warn all your passengers ofthis.

● When using the ignition key to activate/de-activate the front passenger front airbag, on-ly the front passenger airbag will be activa-ted/deactivated. The side airbag and headairbag on the passenger side will remain ac-tive.

Transporting children safety

Safety for children

Introduction

For safety reasons, as we have learned fromaccident statistics, we recommend that chil-dren under 12 years of age travel in the rearseats. Depending on their age, height andweight, children travelling in the rear seatmust use a child seat or a seat belt. For safetyreasons, the child seat should be installed inthe rear seat, behind the front passengerseat or in the centre back seat.

The physical laws involved and the forcesacting in a collision apply also to children››› page 13. But unlike adults, children do nothave fully developed muscle and bone struc-tures. This means that children are subject toa greater risk of injury.

To reduce the risk of injuries, children mustalways use special child restraint systemswhen travelling in the vehicle.

We recommend the use of child safety prod-ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro-gramme, which includes systems for all agesmade by “Peke” (not for all countries).

These systems have been especially de-signed and approved, complying with theECE-R44. regulation.

24


Follow the manufacturer's instructions andobserve any statutory requirements when in-stalling and using child seats. Always readand note ››› page 25.

We recommend you always carry the manu-facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-gether with the on-board documentation.

Important information regarding thefront passenger's airbag

Fig. 21 Passenger's side sun visor: airbagsticker.

Fig. 22 On the rear frame of the passengerside door: airbag sticker.

A sticker with important information aboutthe passenger airbag is located on the pas-senger's sun visor and/or on the passengerside door frame. Read and always observethe safety information included in the follow-ing chapters:

● Safety distance with respect to the passen-ger airbag ››› page 17.

● Objects between the passenger and thepassenger side airbag ››› in Front airbagson page 20.

The passenger side front airbag, when activa-ted, is a serious risk for a child who is facingbackward since the airbag can strike the seatwith such force that it can cause serious orfatal injuries. Children up to 12 years oldshould always travel on the rear seat.

Therefore we strongly recommend you totransport children on the rear seats. This is

the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative-ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa-bled with a key-operated switch ››› page 23.When transporting children, use a child seatsuitable for the age and size of each child››› page 24.

WARNING

● If a child seat is secured to the front pas-senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain-ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of anaccident increases.

● An inflating front passenger airbag canstrike the rear-facing child seat and project itwith great force against the door, the roof orthe backrest.

● Never install a child seat facing backwardson the front passenger seat unless the frontpassenger front airbag has been disabled.Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child!However, if it is necessary, in exceptional ca-ses, to transport a child in the front passen-ger seat, the front passenger front airbagmust always be disabled ››› page 23, Frontpassenger front airbag deactivation. If thefront passenger seat has a height adjustmentoption, move it to the highest position.

● For those vehicles that do not include a keylock switch to deactivate the airbag, the vehi-cle must be taken to a Technical Service.

● All vehicle occupants, especially children,must assume the proper sitting position andbe properly belted in while travelling. »

25

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Safety

● Never hold children or babies on your lap,this can result in potentially fatal injuries tothe child!

● Never allow a child to be transported in avehicle without being properly secured, or tostand up or kneel on a seat while travelling.In an accident, the child could be flungthrough the vehicle, causing possibly fatal in-juries to themselves and to the other vehicleoccupants.

● If children assume an improper sitting posi-tion when the vehicle is moving, they exposethemselves to greater risk of injury in theevent of a sudden braking manoeuvre or in anaccident. This is particularly important if thechild is travelling on the front passenger seatand the airbag system is triggered in an acci-dent; as this could cause serious injury oreven death.

● A suitable child seat can protect your child!

● Never leave a child alone in the child seator inside the vehicle because depending onthe season, very high temperatures may bereached inside a parked vehicle, which couldbe fatal.

● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tallmust not wear a normal seat belt without achild seat, as this could cause injuries to theabdominal and neck areas during a suddenbraking manoeuvre or in an accident.

● Only one child may occupy a child seat››› page 26, Child seats.

● When a child seat is mounted in the rearseats, the door child-proof lock should be ac-tivated ››› page 66.

Child seats

Categorisation of child seats intogroups

Use only child seats that are officially ap-proved and suitable for the child.

Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-R 44. ECE-R stands for: Economic Commis-sion for Europe Regulation.

The child seats are grouped into 5 catego-ries:

Group 0: Up to 10 kg (up to around 9months)

Group 0+: Up to 13 kg (up to around 18months)

Group 1: From 9 to 18 kg (up to around 4years old)

Group 2: From 15 to 25 kg (up to around 7years old)

Group 3: From 22 to 36 kg (over around 7years old)

Child seats that have been tested and ap-proved under the ECE R44 standard bear thetest mark on the seat (the letter E in a circlewith the test number below it).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions andobserve any statutory requirements when in-stalling and using child seats.

We recommend you to always include themanufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manualtogether with the on-board documentation.

WARNING

Read and always observe information andwarnings concerning the use of child seats››› page 25.

Ways to secure a child seat

You can secure a child seat to the rear seat orfront passenger seat in the following ways:

● Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be securedwith a seat belt.

● Child seats for groups 0, 0+ and 1 can befastened without seatbelts, using the “ISO-FIX” and Top Tether* system, using the “ISO-FIX” and Top Tether* securing rings››› page 27.

26


Weightgroup

Seating position

Frontpassen-ger seat

Rear sideseat

Rear cen-tral seat

Group 0to 10 kg

U* U U

Group 0+to 13 kg

U* U U

Group I9 to 18 kg

U* U U

Group II15 to 25 kg

U* U U

Group III22 to 36 kg

U* U U

Suitable for universal restraint systemsfor use in this weight group.

Move the front passenger seat as farback as possible, as high as possibleand always disable the airbag.

WARNING

● When travelling, children must be securedin the vehicle with a restraint system suitablefor age, weight and size.

● Read and always observe information andwarnings concerning the use of child seats››› page 25.

U:

*:

Child seats fastened with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system

Fig. 23 ISOFIX securing rings. Fig. 24 Top Tether* securing ring. »

27

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Safety

Child seats with the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether*system can be secured quickly, easily andsafely on the rear outer seats.

When removing or fitting the child seat,please be sure to follow the manufacturer'sinstructions.

– Move the rear seat as far to the rear as itwill go.

– Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” re-taining rings until the child seat can be

heard to engage securely. If the child seatis equipped with Top Tether* anchor points,secure it to the correspondent ring››› Fig. 24. Follow the manufacturer's in-structions.

– Pull on both sides of the child seat to en-sure that it is secure.

Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted oneach rear seat. In some vehicles, the ringsare secured to the seat frame and in others

they are secured to the rear floor. Access tothe “ISOFIX” rings is between the rear seatbackrest and the seat cushioning. The TopTether* rings are located at the rear of thebackrests of the rear seats (behind the seatbackrest or in the boot).

Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*attachment system are available from Techni-cal Services.

Weight group Size class Electrical equipment Mounting directionVehicle Isofix positions

Rear side seats

Baby carrierF ISO/L1 Backward-facing X

G ISO/L2 Backward-facing X

Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 Backward-facing IU

Group 0+ to 13 kg

E ISO/R1 Backward-facing IU

D ISO/R2 Backward-facing IU

C ISO/R3 Backward-facing IU

Group I 9 to 18 kg

D ISO/R2 Backward-facing IU

C ISO/R3 Backward-facing IU

B ISO/F2 Forward-facing IU

B1 ISO/F2X Forward-facing IU

A ISO/F3 Forward-facing IU

Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- Forward-facing ---

28


Weight group Size class Electrical equipment Mounting directionVehicle Isofix positions

Rear side seats

Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- Forward-facing ---

Suitable for ISOFIX universal child re-straint systems approved for use in thisweight group

ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIXchild restraint systems for this weightgroup or size class.

WARNING

● The retaining rings are designed only foruse with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* childseats.

● Never secure other child seats without the“ISOFIX”, Top Tether* system, nor retainingbelts or objects to the fastening rings; other-wise this can result in potentially fatal inju-ries to the child.

● Ensure that the child seat is secured cor-rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* se-curing rings.

IU:

X:

29

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

Fig. 25 Dash panel.

30

Dash panel

Operation

Dash panel

Overview

Overview of the dash panel

Door release lever

Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Lighting control for instrument andswitch lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Air vents

Turn signal and main beam leverand cruise control system* . . . . . . . .77, 142

Controls on the steering wheel . . . . 57

Instrument panel:

– Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

– Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

– Control and warning lamps . . . . . . 35

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Horn (works only when the ignitionis on)/ Driver front airbag . . . . . . . . . 17

Windscreen wiper lever and opera-tion of the multi-function display* .84, 52

Left seat heating button . . . . . . . . . . 91

Controls for

– Heating* and ventilation . . . . . . . . 107

– Climatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

– Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Radio/Navigator*

Right seat heating button . . . . . . . . . 91

Control lamp for front passengerairbag deactivated warning lamp . . 23

Front passenger front airbag . . . . . . 17

Glove compartment lever . . . . . . . . . 93

Selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Cup holder compartment . . . . . . . . . 95

Controls in the centre console:

– Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

– ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

– Tyre pressure control* . . . . . . . . . . . 43

– Park Pilot* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

– Cigarette lighter/Power socket . . 98

– Exterior mirror adjustment . . . . . . 87

– Start-Stop* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Hazard warning lights switch . . . . . . 81

Pedals

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Steering column control lever* . . . . 7

Handle for releasing the bonnet . . . 163

Button for opening and closing thefront windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Safety switch* for the rear windows . . .72

Control* for opening and closingthe rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Note

Some of the items of equipment listed hereare fitted only on certain model versions orare optional extras.

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

31

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

Instruments

Instrument overview

Fig. 26 Detailed view of the dash panel: Dashpanel.

Fuel gauge ››› page 33

Multifunction display ››› page 47

Engine coolant temperature display››› page 34 or natural gas level indicatorin vehicles with natural gas engine (LPG)››› page 33

Rev counter ››› page 32

Time adjustment button / trip recorder re-set button ››› page 35

Speedometer ››› page 33

1

2

3

4

5

6

Rev counter

The rev counter displays the engine speed inrevolutions per minute.

The start of the red area ››› Fig. 26 4 indi-cates maximum engine speed working atservice temperature. However, it is advisableto change up into a higher gear, move the se-lector lever to D or lift your foot off the accel-erator before the needle reaches the redzone.

CAUTION

To prevent possible engine malfunctions, therev counter needle should not reach the redzone. The start of the red zone on the dial isdifferent for some engine versions.


Changing up into higher gears sooner, follow-ing the recommended gear indications››› Fig. 35 will help you to reduce fuel con-sumption, emissions and also engine noise.

32

Dash panel

Speedometer

The speedometer is equipped with a digitalodometer and a trip odometer, in addition toa service intervals display.

During the running-in period, the instructionsshown on ››› page 130 should be followed.

Fuel gauge and reserve indicator

Fig. 27 Instrument panel: fuel gauge

The fuel tank has a capacity of approx. 55 li-tres.

When the needle reaches the reserve area››› Fig. 27 (arrow), the warning lamp will light

up and an audible warning will sound re-minding the driver to refuel. At this pointthere are still 7 litres of fuel in the tank.

The following text appears in the dash paneldisplay1):

PLEASE REFUEL [XXX]

LPG gauge*3 Applies to the model: ALTEA / ALTEA XL

Fig. 28 Instrument panel: gas gauge.

LPG system filler level display

The LPG tank ››› in the spare wheel wellhas a capacity of 39 litres at an outside tem-

perature of +15 °C (+59 °F) ››› page 160, Re-fuelling with LPG.

The charge level can be checked on the ana-logue gas gauge located on the instrumentpanel ››› Fig. 28. When the level reaches re-serve, a notification text is displayed on thescreen. Refill with LPG at the earliest opportu-nity.

If while driving with LPG a sudden acousticwarning signal is heard, the on-screen mes-sage is shown2):

LPG fault, consult Workshop

This means there is a fault in the LPG system.Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop tocheck the system.

Problem: If the vehicle is left parked for along time immediately after refuelling, thenatural gas level indicator may not accuratelyindicate the same level shown after refuellingwhen the vehicle is started up again. This isnot necessarily due to a leak in the system.

WARNING

LPG is a highly explosive and inflammablesubstance. It may cause severe burns andother injury. »

1) Depending on the version of the model.2) Depending on the model version

33

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

● Due care must be taken to avoid any risk offire or explosion.

● When parking the vehicle in a closed area(e.g. in a garage), make sure that there is ad-equate ventilation, either natural or mechani-cal, to neutralise the LPG in the event of aleak.

Note

● The values shown in the average fuel con-sumption and distance to empty indicationson the multifunction display (MFI)1) on the in-strument panel display2) are approximate val-ues only.

● Two different consumption values are givenon the MFI, depending on whether the vehi-cle is running in gas or petrol mode.

● Please check the fuel level on the fuel levelgauge on the instrument panel ››› page 33.

● If frequent short journeys are made, espe-cially when the outside temperature is low,the vehicle will tend to run on petrol more of-ten than on LPG. Therefore, the petrol tankmay empty before the LPG tank.

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Fig. 29 Instrument panel: Engine coolanttemperature gauge.

Needle in cold zone A

Avoid high engine speeds and heavy engineloads ››› Fig. 29.

Needle in normal zone B

In normal driving conditions, the needleshould be in the middle section of the scale.The temperature may also rise when the en-gine is working hard, especially at high out-side temperatures. This is no cause for con-cern as long as the warning lamp does not

light up and no warning message* appearson the dash panel display.

Needle in warning zone C

The warning lamp* ››› Fig. 30 2 will light upif the needle is in the warning zone. The fol-lowing warning message appears on the in-strument panel display3). Stop the vehicleand switch off the engine. Check the coolantlevel ››› page 169 ››› .

Even if the coolant level is correct do not con-tinue driving. You should obtain technical as-sistance.

WARNING

When working in the engine compartment, al-ways observe the safety warnings››› page 163.

CAUTION

Accessories in front of the air inlet reduce thecooling effect of the coolant. At high outsidetemperatures and high engine loads, there isa risk of the engine overheating.

1) Optional equipment2) Depending on the model version3) Depending on the version of the model.

34

Dash panel

Setting the digital clock*

The digital clock is located in the instrumentpanel display.

– Turn the setting knob ››› Fig. 26 5 clock-wise until the first “click” to set the hour.The hour will flash. To change the hour,press the button.

– Turn the setting knob clockwise to the sec-ond “click” to set the minutes. The minuteswill flash. To change the minutes, press thebutton.

Warning lamps

Overview of the warning lamps

Fig. 30 Instrument panel warning and controllamps. Some of the items of equipment listedhere are fitted only on certain model versions orare optional extras.

Item Symbol Meaning of control and warning lamps Further information

1 Fuel level / reserve ››› page 40

2 Coolant level / coolant temperature ››› page 40 »

35

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation


3 Rear fog light switched on ››› page 40

4 Turn signals in operation ››› page 41

5 Engine fault (petrol engine) ››› page 41

Glow plug system (diesel engines) ››› page 41

6 Main beam switched on ››› page 41

7 Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particulate filter ››› page 41

8 ABS system fault ››› page 41

9 Windscreen washer fluid level ››› page 42

10 Alternator fault ››› page 42

11 Fasten seat belts! ››› page 11

12 Brake pad worn ››› page 42

13 Tyre pressure ››› page 43

14 Airbag or belt tensioner system fault or airbag disabled ››› page 16 ››› page 19

15 Bulb defective ››› page 44

16 Brake fluid required orbrake system fault

››› page 44

17

Red:Engine oil pressure

››› page 44Yellow:If flashing: engine oil sensor faultyIf it remains lit: insufficient engine oil

18 Handbrake on ››› page 123

36

Dash panel


19 Cruise speed activated (Cruise control) ››› page 45

20 Door open indicator ››› page 45

21 If it stays lit: ASR switched off ››› page 45 ››› page 46 ››› page 134

22 Electromechanical steering ››› page 45

23 Fault in the emission control system ››› page 45

24 If flashing: the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is working or the ASR is workingIf it remains lit: ESC or ASR faulty

››› page 45 ››› page 46 ››› page 134

25 Selector lever lock (automatic gearbox) ››› page 46

WARNING

● Failure to observe control lamps and warn-ing messages can result in serious personalinjury or damage to your vehicle.

● The risk of an accident increases if your ve-hicle breaks down. Use a warning triangle todraw the attention of other road users in or-der to prevent danger to third parties.

● The engine compartment is a dangerousarea. Before you open the bonnet to work onthe engine or in the engine compartment,switch the engine off and allow it to cool toreduce the risk of burns or other injuries.Read and observe the relevant warnings››› page 163.

Note

● The appropriate control lamp for a fault willlight up in vehicles without warning or infor-mation messages in the display.

● In vehicles with warning or informationmessages on the screen, the appropriate con-trol lamp for a fault will light up and a warn-ing or information message will also appearon the screen.

37

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

Overview of control and warninglamps (vehicles with LPG)

3 Applies to the model: ALTEA / ALTEA XL

Fig. 31 Instrument panel control and warninglamps in vehicles with LPG

1 Red: coolant level/coolanttemperature

››› page 40

2 Blue: cold engine warning ››› page 40

3

(green

)

The green lamp lights upwhen the vehicle is in LPGmode.The lamp goes off whenyou switch, automaticallyor manually, to petrolmode.

››› page 118

(yel-low)

The yellow warning lamplights up when the petrolhas reached the reservelevel.

WARNING

● Failure to observe control lamps and warn-ing messages can result in serious personalinjury or damage to your vehicle.

● The risk of an accident increases if your ve-hicle breaks down. Use a warning triangle todraw the attention of other road users in or-der to prevent danger to third parties.

● The engine compartment is a dangerousarea. Before you open the bonnet to work onthe engine or in the engine compartment,switch the engine off and allow it to cool toreduce the risk of burns or other injuries.Read and observe the relevant warnings››› page 163.

Note

● The appropriate control lamp for a fault willlight up in vehicles without warning or infor-mation messages in the display.

● In vehicles with warning or informationmessages on the screen, the appropriate con-trol lamp for a fault will light up and a warn-ing or information message will also appearon the screen.

Warning symbols

There are red warning symbols (priority 1)and yellow warning symbols (priority 2).

Warning messages, Priority 1 (red)

If one of these faults occurs, the warninglamp will light up or flash and will be accom-panied by three audible warnings. This is adanger warning. Stop the vehicle and switchoff the engine. Check the fault and correct it.Obtain professional assistance if necessary.

If several priority 1 faults are detected at thesame time, the symbols will be displayed oneafter the other for about 2 seconds at a timeand will continue until the fault is corrected.

No menus will be shown in the display for theduration of a priority 1 warning message.

Examples of priority 1 warning messages(red)

● Brake system symbol with the warningmessage STOP BRAKE FLUID INSTRUCTIONMANUAL or STOP BRAKE FAULT INSTRUCTIONMANUAL.

38

Dash panel

● Coolant symbol with the warning mes-sage STOP SEE COOLANT INSTRUCTION MAN-UAL.

● Engine oil pressure symbol with thewarning message STOP ENGINE OIL PRESSURELOW! INSTRUCTION MANUAL.

Warning messages, Priority 2 (yellow)

If one of these faults occurs, the correspond-ing warning lamp lights up and is accompa-nied by an audible warning. Check the corre-sponding function as soon as possible al-though the vehicle may be used without risk.

If several priority 2 warning messages are de-tected at the same time, the symbols are dis-played one after the other for about 2 sec-onds at a time. After a set time, the informa-tion text will disappear and the symbol willbe shown as a reminder at the side of thedisplay.

Priority 2 warning messages will not beshown until all Priority 1 warning messageshave been dealt with!

Examples of priority 2 warning messages(yellow):1)

● Fuel warning light with the information textPLEASE REFUEL.

● Windscreen washer fluid symbol with theinformation text REFILL WINDSCREEN WASHERFLUID. Top up the washer fluid level.

Information messages displayed onthe screen*

Messagesa) Description

SERVICEThe service interval has ended. Takethe vehicle to a Technical Service.

IMMOBILISERImmobiliser system active. The vehiclewill not start. Take the vehicle to aTechnical Service.

ERRORInstrument panel faulty. Take the vehi-cle to a Technical Service.

CLEAN AIR FIL-TER

Warning: The air filter must be cleaned

NO KEYWarning: Correct key cannot be foundin the vehicle.

KEY BATTERYWarning: Key battery low. Change thebattery.

CLUTCHWarning: Press the clutch to start. Invehicles with manual gearbox andStart-Stop system.

--> P/NWarning: Place the selector level in po-sition P/N to start. Only in vehicleswith automatic gearbox.


--> PWarning: Place the selector lever in po-sition P to stop the engine.

STARTINGWarning: The engine starts automati-cally. Start-Stop system activated.

START MAN-UALLY

Warning: The engine must be startedmanually. Start-Stop system activated

ERROR START-STOP

Warning: Start-Stop system error.

START-STOPIMPOSSIBLE

Warning: Although the Start-Stop sys-tem is switched on, the engine cannotbe stopped automatically. Not all thenecessary conditions are met

START-STOPACTIVE

Warning: Start-Stop system activated.Vehicle in Stop mode.

SWITCH OFFWarning: Start-Stop system activated.Switch off the ignition when you leavethe vehicle.

STOP TRANS-MISSION TOO

HOT

Warning: Stop the engine. Gearboxoverheated.

BRAKEWarning: To start the engine, press thebrake pedal. Only in vehicles with au-tomatic gearbox.

COASTINGFUNCTION

Warning: Coasting mode active. Trans-mission engaged. Only in vehicles withautomatic gearbox. »

1) Depending on the version of the model.39

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation


CHECK SAFE-LOCK

Notification of central locking functionactivated.

a) These messages may vary according the version of the vehi-cle model.

Fuel level/reserve

The light comes on when only 7 litres of fuelremain in the tank, and an acoustic signal al-so sounds. It reminds you to fuel up the fueltank as soon as possible ››› page 158.

The instrument panel displays the followingmessage1): PLEASE REFUEL!.

Coolant level* / temperature (red)

There is a fault if:

● The warning symbol does not go out againafter a few seconds.

● The warning lamp lights up or flashes whilethe vehicle is moving, and three acousticwarning signals ››› are emitted.

This means that either the coolant level is toolow or the coolant temperature is too high.

Coolant temperature too high

The instrument panel displays the followingmessage1): CHECK COOLANT INSTRUCTIONMANUAL ››› page 169.

First look at the coolant temperature gauge.The coolant temperature is too high if theneedle is over the warning area on the dial.Stop the vehicle, switch the engine off andwait for it to cool down. Check the coolantlevel.

If the coolant level is correct, the overheatingmay be caused by a malfunction of the radia-tor fan. Check the radiator fan fuse and haveit replaced if necessary ››› page 196.

If the control lamp lights up again after driv-ing on for a short distance, stop the vehicleand switch the engine off. Contact a Techni-cal Service or a specialised workshop.

Coolant level too low

The instrument panel displays the followingmessage1): STOP CHECK COOLANT INSTRUC-TION MANUAL.

First look at the coolant temperature gauge. Ifthe needle is in the normal range, top up withcoolant at the earliest opportunity ››› .

WARNING

● If your vehicle is immobilised for technicalreasons, move it to a safe distance from traf-fic. Turn the engine off, turn the hazard lightson and place the warning triangle.

● Never open the bonnet if you can see orhear steam or coolant escaping from the en-gine compartment. Risk of scalding. Wait un-til you can no longer see or hear escapingsteam or coolant.

● The engine compartment is a dangerousarea. Before carrying out any work in the en-gine compartment, switch off the engine andallow it to cool down. Always note the corre-sponding warnings ››› page 163.

Coolant temperature (blue)3 Applies to vehicles with LPG

This lamp lights up when the coolant is be-low approximately +45 °C (+113 °F). When itexceeds this temperature the lamp turns off.

Rear fog light

The warning lamp lights up when the rearfog light is switched on. For further informa-tion see ››› page 75.


Dash panel

Turn signals

Depending on which turn signal is operating,either the left or right turn signal lampflashes. Both control lamps will flash at thesame time when the hazard warning lightsare switched on.

If any of both turn signals fails, the warninglamp will start flashing twice faster than nor-mal.

For further information on the turn signals,please see ››› page 77.

Engine management*

This warning lamp monitors the engine man-agement system for petrol engines.

The warning lamp (Electronic Power Con-trol) lights up when the ignition is switchedon while system operation is being verified. Itshould go out once the engine is started.

If there is a fault in the electronic enginemanagement system while you are driving,this warning lamp will light up. Stop the vehi-cle and seek technical assistance.

Glow plug system / Engine fault

The warning lamp lights up to show that theglow plugs are preheating the diesel engine.

The control lamp lights up

If the control lamp lights up when the en-gine is started it means that the glow plugsare preheating. When the warning lamp goesoff, the engine should be started straightaway.

Control lamp flashes

If a fault develops in the engine managementsystem while you are driving, the glow plugsystem lamp will flash . Take the vehicle toa specialised workshop as soon as possibleand have the engine checked.

Main beam headlights

The warning lamp lights up when the mainbeams are on or when the headlight flasheris operated.

For further information see ››› page 77.

Soot accumulation in the dieselengine particulate filter

If the control lamp lights up you shouldhelp the filter clean itself by driving in the ap-propriate manner.

To do this, drive about 15 minutes in fourthor fifth gear (automatic gearbox: S gearrange) at a minimum speed of 60 km/h

(37 mph), with the engine running at approxi-mately 2,000 rpm. In this way, the soot buildup in the filter is burned. When cleaning issuccessful, the control lamp turns off.

If the lamp does not turn off, or the threelamps turn on (particulate filter , fault inthe emission control system and glowplugs ), drive the vehicle to a specialisedworkshop and have the fault repaired at theearliest opportunity.

WARNING

● Always drive according to the road weatherconditions, the terrain and traffic. Driving rec-ommendations should never lead to illegalmanoeuvres in surrounding traffic.

● The diesel engine particulate filter mayreach extremely high temperatures; in thiscase the vehicle should be parked so that itdoes not enter into contact with highly flam-mable materials underneath the vehicle. Oth-erwise there is a risk of fire.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)*

The warning lamp lights up for a few sec-onds when the ignition is switched on. Itgoes out again after the system has runthrough an automatic test sequence. »

41

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

There is a fault in the ABS if:

● The warning lamp does not light upwhen the ignition is switched on.

● The control lamp does not go out again af-ter a few seconds.

● The control lamp lights up when the vehicleis moving.

The vehicle can still be braked in the normalway, without the ABS function. Take the vehi-cle to a specialised workshop as soon aspossible. For further information on the ABSsee the ››› page 136.

If a fault occurs in the ABS, the ESC* controllamp will also light up.

Brake system fault

If the ABS warning lamp lights up togetherwith the brake warning lamp , there is afault in the ABS function and in the brakesystem ››› .

WARNING

● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-serve the warnings ››› page 163, Working inthe engine compartment.

● If the brake system warning lamp shouldlight up together with the ABS warning lamp, stop the vehicle immediately and check

the brake fluid level in the reservoir››› page 172, Brake fluid. If the brake fluidlevel has dropped below the “MIN” mark youmust not drive on. Risk of accident. Obtaintechnical assistance.

● If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault inthe brake system may have been caused by afailure of the ABS system. This could causethe rear wheels to lock quickly when youbrake. This could cause the rear to breakaway. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle andseek technical assistance.

Washer fluid*

This warning lamp lights up to indicate thatthe windscreen washer level is very low.

This serves as a reminder to fill up the reser-voir at the earliest opportunity ››› page 171.

The following message is shown on the in-strument panel display*1): REFILL WIND-SCREEN WASHER FLUID.

Alternator

This warning lamp signals a fault in the alter-nator.

The warning lamp lights up when the igni-tion is switched on. It should go out when theengine has started running.

If the warning lamp lights up while driv-ing, the alternator is no longer charging thebattery. You should immediately drive to thenearest specialised workshop.

You should avoid using electrical equipmentthat is not absolutely necessary because thiswill drain the battery.

Worn brake pads

If the symbol lights up, have the frontbrake pads (and, for safety reasons, the rearpads as well) inspected by a specialisedworkshop.


Dash panel

Tyre pressure

Fig. 32 Centre console: tyre monitoring sys-tem button.

The tyre pressure monitoring system controlstyre speed and the frequency spectrum ofeach tyre.

The tyre monitoring lamp1) compares wheelrevolutions and with it, using the ESC, thewheel diameter of each wheel. If the diame-ter of a wheel changes, the tyre control lamp lights up. The wheel diameter changeswhen:

● Tyre pressure is insufficient.

● The tyre structure is damaged.

● The vehicle is unbalanced because of aload.

● The wheels of one axle are under morepressure (for example, driving with a trailer oron steep slopes).

● The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.

● The temporary spare wheel is fitted.

● The wheel on one axle is changed.

Tyre pressure adjustment

Following the modification to tyre pressure orafter changing one or more wheels, the but-ton ››› Fig. 32 must be pressed down whilethe ignition is on until an audible warning isheard and the warning lamp goes out.

If the wheels are under excessive load (for ex-ample, driving with a trailer or heavy load),tyre pressure must be increased to the rec-ommended value for a full load (see thesticker on the inside of the fuel flap). If thetyre monitor system button is pressed down,the new tyre pressures are confirmed.

The tyre pressure control lamp lights up

If the tyre pressure of one or more wheels ismuch lower than the value set by the driver,the tyre control warning lamp lights up ››› .

The tyre pressure control lamp flashes

If the tyre pressure control lamp flashes, thisindicates a fault. Go to the nearest special-ised workshop.

WARNING

● When the tyre pressure monitoring lamplights up, reduce speed immediately andavoid any sudden manoeuvre or braking.Stop when possible, and check the tyre pres-sure and status.

● The driver is responsible for maintainingcorrect tyre pressures. For this reason, tyrepressure must be regularly checked.

● Under certain circumstances (e.g. whendriving in a sporty manner, in winter condi-tions or on a dirt track) the tyre monitoringlamp may light up or function incorrectly.

Note

If the battery is disconnected, the yellowwarning lamp lights up after turning theignition on. This should turn off after a briefjourney.


Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

Brake system*

Situations in which the warning lamp lightsup

● the brake fluid level is too low››› page 172.

The instrument panel displays the followingmessage1): STOP BRAKE FLUID INSTRUCTIONMANUAL.

● there is a fault in the brake system.

The instrument panel displays the followingmessage1): BRAKE SYSTEM FAULT INSTRUC-TION MANUAL.

This warning lamp can light up together withthe ABS system warning lamp.

WARNING

● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-serve the warnings on ››› page 163.

● If the brake warning lamp does not go out,or if it lights up when driving, the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir ››› page 172, Brake fluidis too low. Risk of accident. Stop the vehicleand do not drive on. Obtain technical assis-tance.

● If the brake warning lamp lights up to-gether with the ABS lamp this could bedue to an ABS fault. This could cause the rear

wheels to lock quickly when you brake. Thiscould cause the rear to break away. Risk ofskidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technicalassistance.

Handbrake

This lamp lights up when the handbrake isapplied.

If you drive faster than 6 km/h (4 mph) withthe handbrake on, the following message willappear on the instrument panel display1):HANDBRAKE ON. You will also hear an acous-tic warning signal ››› page 123.

Bulb defect*

The warning lamp lights up when there isa fault in the turn signals, headlights, sidelights and fog lights, e.g. in the left head-light.

The instrument panel displays the followingmessage1): LEFT FULL BEAM FAULTY.

Engine oil pressure

If this warning lamp is red it indicates thatthe engine oil pressure is too low.

If this warning symbol starts to flash, and isaccompanied by three audible warnings,switch off the engine and check the oil level.If necessary, add more oil ››› page 166.

The instrument panel displays the followingmessage1): STOP ENGINE OIL PRESSURE IN-STRUCTION MANUAL.

If the warning lamp flashes although the oillevel is correct, stop driving. Do not even runthe engine at idle speed! Obtain technical as-sistance.

Checking the oil level

If the warning lamp is yellow the engineoil level should be checked as soon as possi-ble. Top up the oil ››› page 168 at the nextopportunity.

Oil level sensor faulty*

If the yellow warning lamp flashes, takethe vehicle to a specialised workshop to havethe oil level sensor checked. Until then it isadvisable to check the oil level every timeyou refuel.


Dash panel

Cruise speed (cruise control)*

The warning lamp comes on when thecruise control system is switched on. For fur-ther information on the cruise control system,see ››› page 142.

Indicator for open doors or boot*

This warning lamp lights up if one of thedoors is open.

The warning light should go off when allthe doors are closed correctly.

The system also works when the ignition isswitched off. It should disappear approxi-mately 15 seconds after the vehicle has beenlocked.

Electromechanical steering*

For vehicles with power steering, the level ofsteering assistance depends on the vehicle'sspeed and on the steering angle.

The warning lamp should light up for a fewseconds when the ignition is switched on. Itshould go out once the engine is started.

If the battery is disconnected, the indicatorremains lit, even with the engine running.

The warning light only goes off after a dis-tance of approx. 50 m.

There is a fault in the electromechanicalsteering system if the lamp does not go outor lights up while the vehicle is in motion.The warning lamp may appear in two differ-ent colours to indicate faults. If the light isyellow, it indicates a minor fault. If the light isred, seek assistance from a specialised work-shop immediately, as the power steering isnot working; in this case you should not keepdriving. Stop the vehicle and seek technicalassistance. The power steering does not workif the battery is flat or if the engine is off (e.g.for towing). You should take into account thatyou will need considerably more power thannormal to steer the vehicle if the power steer-ing is not working correctly or at all.

For those vehicles fitted with ESC*, the“Steering manoeuvre recommendation”››› page 134 function is included.

Emission control system*

Control lamp flashes:

When there is misfiring that can damage thecatalytic converter. Reduce speed and drivecarefully to the nearest specialised workshopto have the engine checked.

The instrument panel displays the followingmessage1): EXHAUST GAS SEE WORKSHOP.

The control lamp lights up:

If a fault has developed during driving whichhas reduced the quality of the exhaust gas(e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed anddrive carefully to the nearest specialisedworkshop to have the engine checked.

The instrument panel displays the followingmessage: EXHAUST GAS SEE WORKSHOP.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)*/.

There are two control lamps for the electronicstability control. The lamp provides infor-mation concerning function and disconnec-tion status.

Both warning lamps light up together whenthe ignition is switched on and should turnoff after approximately 2 seconds. This is thetime taken for the function check.

This programme includes the ABS, EDL andASR. This also includes the brake assistancesystem (BAS), automatic cleaning of thebrake discs and the trailer stability pro-gramme (TSP). »


Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

The warning lamp has the followingfunctions:

● It flashes whilst driving when the ASR/ESCis activated.

● It will light up if there is a fault in the ESC.

● As the ESC operates in conjunction with theABS, the ESC light will also come on if a faultshould occur in the ABS.

If the ESC control lamp stays on after theengine is started, this may mean that thecontrol system has temporarily switched offthe ESC. In this case the ESC can be reactiva-ted by switching the ignition off and then onagain. If the control lamp goes out, thismeans the system is fully functional.

The lamp provides information about thedisconnection status of the system:

● It stays lit when the ASR is disconnectedwhen pressing the switch.

Differential lock fault (EDL)*

The EDL operates along with the ABS in vehi-cles equipped with Electronic Stability Con-trol (ESC)*.

A malfunction in the EDL is indicated by theABS control lamp . Take the vehicle to a

specialised workshop as soon as possible.For further information on the EDL see››› page 135, Electronic differential lock(EDL)*.

Traction control system (ASR)* /

The traction control system prevents the driv-en wheels from spinning when the vehicle isaccelerating.

There are two warning lamps for the tractioncontrol system: and . Both warning lampslight up together when the ignition is switch-ed on and should turn off after approximately2 seconds. This is the time taken for the func-tion check.

The lamp has the following function:

● It flashes when the ASR is working if the ve-hicle is moving.

If the system is deactivated or if it has anyfault, the warning lamp will remain lit. Thewarning lamp will also light up if a faultshould occur in the ABS because the ASR op-erates in conjunction with the ABS. For fur-ther information, see ››› page 137.

The lamp provides information about thedisconnection status of the system:

● It stays lit when the ASR is disconnectedwhen pressing the ASR OFF switch.

By pressing it again, the ASR function is reac-tivated and the warning lamp switched off.

Speed selector lever lock

The brake pedal must be depressed whenthis warning lamp lights up. This is necessarywhen the automatic gearbox* selector leveris moved out of the positions P or N.

Electronic immobiliser* “Safe”

This warning lamp flashes if an unauthorisedkey is used.

Inside the key there is a chip that deactivatesthe electronic immobiliser automaticallywhen the key is inserted into the ignition.The electronic immobiliser will be activatedagain automatically as soon as you pull thekey out of the ignition lock.

The instrument panel displays the followingmessage1): IMMOBILISER. The vehicle cannotbe used in that case ››› page 121.


Dash panel

The engine can, however, be started if theappropriate coded SEAT genuine key is used.

Note

A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensuredif genuine SEAT keys are used.

Digital instrument paneldisplay

Display (without warning orinformation texts)

Fig. 33 Detailed view of the instrument panel:screen with different indicators.

The display on the dash panel shows themileage and trip odometer as well as the se-lector lever position.

Digital clock display ››› page 35. On theright of the display: selector lever posi-

1

tion display for the automatic gearbox*.The current position of the selector leveror the gear which is engaged (for tiptron-ic)* is highlighted.

Outside temperature.

Odometer or flexible service interval dis-play*.

Displayed categories*

Fig. 34 Digital dash panel display.

Clock: “Setting the time”. On the right ofthe display: selector lever position dis-play for the automatic gearbox*. The cur-rent position of the selector lever or thegear which is engaged (for Tiptronic) ishighlighted.

There are optional and automatic dis-plays in this field.

2

3

1

2

Optional indicators: e.g. those on themultifunction display (MFI).

Automatic indicators: Information andwarning messages.

Menus providing further information andwhich can be used to make diverse set-tings are also shown: “Dash panel me-nus”.

Outside temperature.

Odometer or flexible service interval dis-play.

Recommended gear display*

Fig. 35 Gear display.

Use the gear display to save fuel. If you aredriving in the correct gear, a dot will beshown next to the gear display. If you are notin the correct gear, an arrow will appear next »

–

–

–

3

4

47

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

to the gear display indicating whether youshould change up or down.

Note

The gear change indication should not be tak-en into account when quick acceleration is re-quired (for example when overtaking).

Odometer

The left-hand counter in the display registersthe total amount of distance covered by thevehicle.

The right-hand counter registers the shortjourneys. The last digit indicates steps of 100metres. The trip recorder counter may be re-set by holding down the reset button for afew seconds.

Flexible service interval display

Vehicles with Service intervals dependent ontime/distance travelled already have certainservice intervals set. The intervals are calcu-lated individually in vehicles with LongLifeservice.

The service interval display only indicates thedates of services that include engine oilchange. The dates of all other services, suchas the Inspection Service or brake fluid

change, appear in the sticker on the door pil-lar or in the Maintenance Programme.

A Service pre-warning will appear in the od-ometer if a service is due soon. A “spanner”symbol appears and the display “km” withthe distance that can be driven until the nextservice appointment is due. This signalchanges after around 10 seconds. A “clocksymbol” appears and the number of days un-til the service appointment should be carriedout. The following message is shown in theinstrument panel display*:

Service in[XXXX]kmor[XXXX]days

The service message will disappear approxi-mately 20 seconds after the ignition isswitched on or the engine is running. Thenormal display can be resumed by brieflypressing the reset button on the trip counteror by pressing the OK button on the steeringwheel controls.

With the ignition on, you can check the cur-rent service message at any moment in theVehicle status menu or turning the reset but-ton to access the service display.

An overdue service is indicated by a minussign in front of the mileage or day informa-tion.

Indications for vehicles with LongLife service

Technical progress has made it possible toconsiderably reduce servicing requirements.With the LongLife System, SEAT ensures thatyour vehicle only has an Interval Servicewhen it is necessary. The length of the Inter-val Services (max. 2 years) is determined byfactors such as conditions under which thevehicle is used and personal driving style.

The service pre-warning will first appear 20days before the date on which the service isdue. The distance travelled is rounded off tothe nearest 100 km and the time to full days.The current service message can only be con-sulted 500 km after the last service. Untilthat time, only dashes are displayed.

Note

● If you reset the display manually, the nextservice interval will be indicated after15,000 km or one year and will not be calcu-lated individually.

● Do not reset the display between serviceintervals as the display will otherwise be in-correct.

48

Dash panel

● In LongLife Service vehicles, if the batteryis disconnected for a long period, the days re-maining until the next service cannot be cal-culated. Therefore, the service message dis-plays on the instrument panel may be incor-rect. Take into account the maximum author-ised service intervals.

Warning or information message inthe display

The system runs a check on certain compo-nents and functions when the ignition isswitched on and while the vehicle is moving.Functional faults are indicated by symbolswith warning or information messages in thedisplay. An audible warning is given in cer-tain cases.

Warning symbols

There are red warning symbols (priority 1)and yellow warning symbols (priority 2).

Information text

In addition to warning messages given on afault, you will receive information in the dis-play on procedures or will be asked to carryout certain tasks.

Note

In the case of screens without warning or in-formation messages, faults are indicated ex-clusively by the control lamps.

Warning messages, Priority 1 (red)

If one of these faults occurs, the warninglamp will light up or flash and will be accom-panied by three audible warnings. This is adanger warning. Stop the vehicle and switchoff the engine. Check the fault and correct it.Obtain professional assistance if necessary.

If several priority 1 faults are detected at thesame time, the symbols will be displayed oneafter the other for about 2 seconds at a timeand will continue until the fault is corrected.

No menus will be shown in the display for theduration of a priority 1 warning message.

Examples of priority 1 warning messages(red)

● Brake system symbol with the warningmessage STOP BRAKE FLUID INSTRUCTIONMANUAL or STOP BRAKE FAULT INSTRUCTIONMANUAL.

● Coolant symbol with the warning mes-sage STOP SEE COOLANT INSTRUCTION MAN-UAL.

● Engine oil pressure symbol with thewarning message STOP ENGINE OIL PRESSURELOW! INSTRUCTION MANUAL.

Warning messages, Priority 2 (yellow)

If one of these faults occurs, the correspond-ing warning lamp lights up and is accompa-nied by an audible warning. The functionshould be checked as soon as possible.

If several priority 2 warning messages are de-tected at the same time, the symbols are dis-played one after the other for about 2 sec-onds at a time. After a set time, the informa-tion text will disappear and the symbol willbe shown as a reminder at the side of thedisplay.

Priority 2 warning messages will not beshown until all Priority 1 warning messageshave been dealt with!

Examples of priority 2 warning messages(yellow):1)

● Fuel warning light with the information textPLEASE REFUEL. »


Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

● Windscreen washer fluid level symbol with the information message ADD WIND-SCREEN WASHER FLUID. Refill the windscreenwasher tank ››› page 171.

Instrument panel menus*

Example of menu use

Fig. 36 Windscreen wiper lever: control but-tons.

Fig. 37 Controls on the steering wheel: con-trol buttons.

The setting of a speed warning will be usedas an example of how to use the menus. Thisis a good idea if you are, for example, usingwinter tyres which are not suited for the topspeed of the vehicle.

1. Open the main menu with the MFI lever

– Switch the ignition on.

– Hold down button B for 2 seconds to re-turn to the main menu from another menu.It may be necessary to repeat this opera-tion until the main menu is displayed.

2. Open the menu “Configuration” with theMFI lever

– To choose an option from the menu, pressthe upper or lower end of the rocker switch.The selected option is displayed betweentwo lines and there will also be a triangleon the right.

– Select menu Configuration.

– Press button A on the windscreen wiperlever. The Configuration menu is opened.

2. Access the “Configuration” menu with thesteering wheel controls

– To access the “Configuration” menu, pressbutton C ››› Fig. 37 until the menu is dis-played. Now you are in this menu.

3. Open the main menu “Winter tyres”

– Select option Winter tyres using switch B .

– Press the button A . The menu Winter tyresis opened.

4. Program a speed limit warning

– Use button B to select the option+10 km/h or -10 km/h and press button B

to either increase or decrease the speeddisplayed.

5. To activate and deactivate the speed limitwarning

– Use switch B to select the menu pointOn / Off and press the button to switch thespeed warning on or off. If the speed warn-ing is deactivated, three dashes will be dis-played ---.

6. To close the menu “Winter tyres”

– In the menu select Back.

50

Dash panel

The function “Winter tyres” sends an opticaland an acoustic signal when the vehicle rea-ches the set speed.

Example menu “Winter tyres”

In the menuWinter tyres

FunctionName of menu displayed

X km/h The current set speed is displayed

or --- or dashes will appear if the function isdeactivated

On / Off If the function is activated or deactivated

+10 km/h The set value increases by 10 km/h

-10 km/h The set value decreases by 10 km/h

Back The menu “Winter tyres” is closed andthe last displayed menu is shown.

Note

For electronic and vehicle equipment one ormore of these menus will be displayed.

Main menu


The menu provides access to the differentdisplay functions (only with the MFI lever).

Open main menu


– Press and hold button B for at least 2 sec-onds. It may be necessary to repeat this op-eration until the main menu is displayed.

Select a menu from the main menu

– To choose an option from the menu, pressthe upper or lower end of rocker switch B .The selected option is displayed betweentwo horizontal lines.

– Press button A to select the entry.

Example of menu use ››› page 50

Mainmenu

Function

Multifunc-tion display

Change to the multifunction display(MFI): “Multifunction display (MFI)”

Audio This menu displays the available infor-mation for the active audio source (radiostation, CD audio track / MP3 / USB /iPod / Bluetooth audioa) / call informa-tiona).

Navigation This menu is only available if the vehicleis fitted with a navigation system. Thenavigation system must be switched on.When the route guidance is activated,the turning arrows and proximity bars aredisplayed. The appearance is similar tothe Navigation system.If the route guidance is not activated, thedirection of travel (compass) and thename of the street along which you aredriving are shown.

Telephone This menu is only available in vehicleswith a radio unit and if the vehicle is fit-ted with the telephone function. In vehi-cles fitted with a radio navigation sys-tem, this menu is available in the centralunit (navigator) ››› Booklet Navigationsystem..

Vehicle con-dition

This menu displays current warning or in-formation texts: “Vehicle status menu”This option flashes when one of thesetexts is displayed. »

51

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

Mainmenu

Function

Configura-tion

This option allows the time, the speedwarning when using winter tyres, units,language, independent heating, theLight and visibility menu and the Conven-ience menu to be reset.

a) Only in vehicles fitted with a radio navigation system.

Note


Multifunction display menu (MFI)


Fig. 40 Controls on the steering wheel: con-trol buttons.

The multifunction display (MFI) shows you in-formation on the journey and fuel consump-tion. It has two automatic memories: 1 - Tripmemory and 2 - Total memory. The selectedmemory is shown on the upper right handsection of the display at all times.

Open the multifunction display menu

Select the Multifunction display menufrom the main menu ››› page 51 andpress the OK button on the windscreenwiper lever or the multifunction steeringwheel*.

Selecting a memory

To change from one memory to another,briefly press button A ››› Fig. 36››› page 50 on the windscreen wiper lev-er or the OK button on the multifunction

–

–

steering wheel ››› Fig. 37 ››› page 50while the ignition is switched on.

Resetting a memory

Select the memory where you wish toerase the values.

Hold down button A on the windscreenwiper lever or the OK button on the mul-tifunction steering wheel* for at least 2seconds.

The trip memory 1 collects the travel andconsumption data from the moment the igni-tion is switched on until it is switched off. Ifthe journey is continued within two hours ofswitching off the ignition, the new values willbe added to the existing trip recorder memo-ry. The memory will automatically be deletedif the journey is interrupted for more than 2hours.

The total memory 2 collects the journey datafor any number of individual journeys (even ifthe ignition is switched off for longer than 2hours) up to a total of 19 hours and 59 mi-nutes of travel time or 1,999 km (1,250miles) of distance travelled. The memory willautomatically be deleted if one of the namedvalues is reached.

On-screen display

The following data can be viewed on the mul-tifunction display using rocker switch B

››› Fig. 36 ››› page 50 on the windscreen wiper

–

–

52

Dash panel

lever or by pressing button or ››› Fig. 37on the multifunction steering wheel*:

● Distance

● Average speed

● Driving speed

● Speed warning at --- km/h

● Journey duration

● Current fuel consumption

● Average fuel consumption

● Operating range

● Outside temperature

Distance travelled in km (miles)

The display shows the distance travelledsince the ignition was switched on.

The maximum display value in both memo-ries is 1,999 km. The memory will automati-cally be deleted once this value has beenreached.

Average speed in km/h (mph)

After starting the ignition, the average speedwill be shown after a distance of approxi-mately 100 metres has been travelled. Untilthen dashes will appear in the display. Thedisplay will be updated every five secondswhile the vehicle is in motion.

km/h (mph) - Driving speed

Driving speed is digitally shown in the dis-play.

Speed warning at --- km/h

This function may help you to keep within thespeed limits. Press the OK button on thewindscreen wiper lever A or the multifunc-tion steering wheel* to select the currentspeed. The instrument panel display givesthe selected speed, for example, Speedwarning 120 km/h. You have 5 seconds to re-set the speed to between 30 km/h (18 mph)and 250 km/h (155 mph) using rocker switchB or buttons or on the multifunction

steering wheel*. Press the OK button or wait5 seconds until the speed is stored and thewarning is activated. If the set speed is ex-ceeded, an audible warning is heard and awarning message is displayed until thespeed is reduced to at least 4 km/h (2 mph)below the stored speed. The function isswitched off by pressing the OK buttonagain. Speed warning --- km/h (miles) is nowdisplayed on the instrument panel.

Trip duration in h and min

The display shows the amount of time whichhas elapsed since the ignition was switchedon.

The maximum display value in both memo-ries is 19 hours and 59 minutes. The memory

will automatically be deleted once this valuehas been reached.

Current fuel consumption in l/100 km or l/hour

The display will show the current fuel con-sumption in litres/100 km whilst the vehicleis in motion or in litres/hour when the vehicleis in a stationary position with the enginerunning.

Using this display you can see how your driv-ing style affects fuel consumption››› page 117.

Average fuel consumption in l/100 km

The average fuel consumption will be shownafter a distance of approximately 100 metreshas been travelled. Until then dashes will ap-pear in the display. The display will be upda-ted every five seconds while the vehicle is inmotion. The amount of fuel used will not beshown.

Km (miles) - Fuel range

The fuel range is calculated using the figuresfor tank content and current fuel consump-tion. This shows how far the vehicle can trav-el using the same conditions as a reference.

Personal selection of display

The driver can establish which displays areshown on the instrument panel display as re-quired: »

53

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

● Select the submenu Multifunction DisplayData from the Configuration menu››› page 54.

● The displays can be activated or deactiva-ted individually by marking the required op-tion and pressing the OK button on the wind-screen wiper lever or the multifunction steer-ing wheel*.

Outside temperature indicator

The measurement margin ranges from -45 °C(-49 °F) to +58 °C (+136.4 °F). At tempera-tures lower than +4°C (+39.2 °F), an “ice crys-tal symbol” is displayed and a “warning” issounded if the vehicle is moving at morethan 20 km/h (12 mph) (ice warning). Thissymbol flashes first for around 10 secondsand remains lit as long as the outside tem-perature does not rise above +4 °C (+39.2 °F)or +6 °C (+42.8 °F) if it was already lit.

WARNING

There could be black ice on the road surfaceeven if the “snowflake symbol” is not shown.For this reason you should not rely exclusive-ly on this display - Risk of accident!

Note

● There are different instrument panels;therefore the multifunction display may vary.

● When the vehicle is stationary or travellingat very low speeds, the temperature dis-

played may be slightly higher than the actualoutside temperature as a result of the heatradiated from the engine.

● Vehicles with a multifunction steeringwheel* do not have buttons on the wind-screen wiper lever. The multifunction displaycan only be controlled from the buttons onthe multifunction steering wheel*.

Vehicle status menu

Open Vehicle Condition menu

– Select the option Vehicle status from themain menu: “Main menu” and press buttonOK on the windscreen wiper lever A

››› Fig. 38. or

– Press button or on the multifunctionsteering wheel* ››› Fig. 37 until the VehicleStatus menu is displayed.

Priority 2 warning messages and informationtexts: “Information and warning messages onthe screen” will automatically disappear fromthe screen after a time and will be stored inthe Vehicle status menu.

The warning and information texts may beviewed in this menu. If there is no warning orinformation message, the option Vehicle sta-tus is not displayed. If there are several mes-sages, each one is shown for a few seconds.

Example of menu use ››› page 50.

Note

If there are no warning messages, this menuis not available.

Configuration menu

Open Configuration menu

– Select the option Configuration from themain menu: “Main menu” and press buttonOK A ››› Fig. 36 on the windscreen wiper

lever. or

– Press button or on the multifunctionsteering wheel* ››› Fig. 37 until the Configu-ration menu is displayed.


Displayed onthe screen

Function

Multifunctiondisplay data.

This menu is used to establish the da-ta in the multifunction display menuto be displayed on the instrumentpanel ››› page 52

Convenience The convenience set-up mode is usedto make the settings for the conven-ience functions in the vehicle.

Lights and visi-bility

From this menu it is it possible to alterthe vehicle lighting settings.

54

Dash panel


Function

Time The hours and minutes of the clockand the navigation system can bechanged. Choose between 12 and 24-hour format and change to summertime.

Winter tyres The menu allows the setting of aspeed at which an optical and acous-tic warning will be given by the sys-tem. You can use this function, for ex-ample, if you have fitted winter tyreswhich are not suited for the top speedof your vehicle. Please see the section“Wheels and tyres”.

Language The display texts and the navigationsystem texts can be seen in differentlanguages.

Units This option allows you to select theunits for displaying temperature, fuelconsumption values and distances.

sel. speed The instrument panel also displaysthe speed in another different unit ofmeasurement (mph or km/h) to thatgiven on the speedometer.

Inter. Service Consult service messages and resetservice interval display here.

Factory set-tings

The manufacturer's predefined valuesfor the functions of this menu are re-stored.

Backa) This returns to the main menu.

a) Only if the windscreen wiper lever is used (MFI).

Note

● For electronic and vehicle equipment one ormore of these menus will be displayed.

● SEAT dealerships are able to programmeother functions or change the existing func-tions depending upon the vehicle equipment.

● The Configuration menu is only accessiblewhen the vehicle is at a standstill.

Convenience menu

Open menu Convenience

– Choose the option Configuration from themain menu and press the button OK A

››› Fig. 36 on the windscreen wiper lever.


– Choose the option Convenience from themain menu and press the button A on thewindscreen wiper lever.

Example of menu use ››› page 50


Function

Central lock-ing.

One door: Individual unlocking activa-ted.Auto lock: The doors are automaticallylocked when the vehicle is travellingat more than approx. 15 km/h(10 mph).Auto unlock: the doors are unlockedwhen the key is removed from the ig-nition.

Elec. windowcontrol

Opening and closing electric win-dows: this determines whether toopen or close all the windows whenthe vehicle is unlocked or locked. Theopen function can also be activatedfor the driver door only.

Exterior mirroradjust.

If synchronised adjustment is selec-ted, when the driver side exterior mir-ror is adjusted, the passenger exteriormirror is also moved.

Factory set-tings

The predefined factory values for thefunctions of this menu are restored.

Back This returns to the Configurationmenu.

Note


55

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

Lights and visibility menu

Open Lights and visibility Menu

– Select the option Configuration from themain menu: “Main menu” and press buttonOK A ››› page 50 on the windscreen wiper

lever. or


– Select the option Lights & visibil. from themenu and press button A on the wind-screen wiper lever.



Function

Coming Home/Leaving Home

This option permits the adjustment ofthe time during which the headlampsremain lit after the vehicle is locked,as well as connecting and disconnect-ing this function.

Indicator conf. The convenience turn signal functioncan be activated or deactivated here.With convenience mode activated, theturn signal will blink at least threetimes when turned on for a lanechange.

Factory set-tings

The predefined factory values for thefunctions of this menu are restored.


Function

Back This returns to the Configurationmenu.

Note


56

Steering wheel controls*


General information

The steering wheel includes a multifunctionmodule from where it is possible to controlthe audio, telephone and radio navigationfunctions, and the automatic gearbox*, with-out requiring the driver to be distracted fromdriving.

There are three versions of the multifunctionmodule:

● Audio version, to control the available au-dio functions from the steering wheel.

● Audio + Telephone version, to control theavailable audio functions and the telephonesystem from the steering wheel.

Both versions may be used to control the au-dio system (radio, Audio CD, mp3 CD,iPod1) /USB1) /SD1)) and the radio navigationsystem, in which case they also control thenavigation system.

● Version for automatic gearbox*››› page 129.

Audio system

Steering wheel audio version controls

Fig. 41 Steering wheel controls. Fig. 42 Steering wheel controls (dependingon version of model). »

1) If fitted in the vehicle.57

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX ››› table on page 59

A Volume up Volume up Volume up

B Volume down Volume down Volume down

C Search for next stationNext track

Hold down: fast forwardNo function specified

D Search for last stationPrevious track

Hold down: quick rewindNo function specified

E No function specified No function specified No function specified

F Mute Pause Mute

G a)Operates on instrument panel display Operates on instrument panel display Operates on instrument panel display

Next presetb) Next trackb) No function specifiedb)

H a)Operates on instrument panel display Operates on instrument panel display Operates on instrument panel display

Previous presetb) Previous trackb) No function specifiedb)

I a)Next preset Change folder No function specified

Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel

J a)Previous preset Change folder No function specified

Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel

K Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel

L a)Change source Change source Change source

Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel

a) Depending on the model versionb) Only if the panel is in Audio menu.

58


Steering wheel audio version + telephone controls

Fig. 43 Steering wheel controls. Fig. 44 Steering wheel controls (dependingon version of model).

Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX TELEPHONE

A Volume up Volume up Volume up Volume up

B Volume down Volume down Volume down Volume down


Hold down: fast forwardNo function specified No function specified


Hold down: quick rewindNo function specified No function specified

EAccess telephone menu on instrument pan-

elAccess telephone menu on instrument pan-

elAccess telephone menu on instru-

ment panel

Make callAccept incoming call

End callHold down: reject incoming call

F Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognitionActivate voice control/

Interrupt current message/Deactivate voice control »

59

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX TELEPHONE

G Next preseta) Next tracka) No function specified

Previous option in the menu/list/

selection shown on instrumentpanelb)

H Previous preseta) Previous tracka) No function specified

Next option in the menu/list/

selection shown on instrumentpanelb)

I Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel

J Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel

K Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Confirm

L Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Back to last-opened menu

a) Only if the panel is in audio menu.b) Only if the instrument panel is in the “TELEPHONE” menu. Examples of use: agenda, call list, select numbers, select letters, main menu.

60


Radio navigation system

Steering wheel audio version + telephone controls

Fig. 45 Steering wheel controls. Fig. 46 Steering wheel controls (dependingon version of model).

Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX NAVIGATOR TELEPHONE

A Volume up Volume up Volume up Volume up Volume up

B Volume down Volume down Volume down Volume down Volume down


Hold down: fast forwardNo function specified No function specified No function specified


Hold down: quick rewindNo function specified No function specified No function specified »

61

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX NAVIGATOR TELEPHONE

E No function specified No function specified No function specified No function specified

Accept incoming call (press briefly)Reject incoming call (press and hold

down)End ongoing call /establish call (press

briefly)Switch to private mode (press and hold

down)Redial last number (press and hold

down)a)

F

Activation of voice recog-nition for mobile phoneconnected to the system

(if the phone has thisfunction)* / MUTE

Activation of voice recognitionfor mobile phone connected to

the system (if the phone hasthis function)* / MUTE

Activation of voice recogni-tion for mobile phone con-nected to the system (if thephone has this function)* /

MUTE

Activation of voice recogni-tion for mobile phone con-nected to the system (if thephone has this function)* /

MUTE

Activation of voice recognition for mo-bile phone connected to the system (ifthe phone has this function)* / MUTE

G Next presetb) Next trackb) No function specifiedOperates on instrument pan-

elOperates on instrument panel/no func-

tion specified

H Previous presetb) Previous trackb) No function specifiedOperates on instrument pan-

elOperates on instrument panel/no func-

tion specified

IChange menu on instru-

ment panelChange menu on instrument

panelChange menu on instru-

ment panelNo function specified Change menu on instrument panel

JChange menu on instru-

ment panelChange menu on instrument

panelChange menu on instru-

ment panelNo function specified Change menu on instrument panel

KOperates on instrument

panelOperates on instrument panel

Operates on instrumentpanel

Operates on instrument pan-el

Operates on instrument panel/no func-tion specified

LOperates on instrument

panelOperates on instrument panel

Operates on instrumentpanel

Operates on instrument pan-el

Operates on instrument panel/no func-tion specified

a) For a more detailed description of how to use this button, please refer to the radio navigation system user handbook (SEAT Media System)b) Only if the panel is in audio menu.

62

Opening and closing

Opening and closing

Central locking

Basic functions

The central locking system enables you tolock and unlock all doors and the rear lid byjust pushing the button.

Description

Central locking can be activated by using anyof the following options:

● the key, by inserting it into the driver doorcylinder and rotating it manually,

● the central lock button in the vehicle interi-or ››› page 65.

● the radio frequency remote control, usingthe buttons on the key ››› page 67.

Various functions are available to improvethe vehicle safety:

“Safe” locking system

Selective unlocking system*

Automatic speed-dependent locking andunlocking system*

Self-locking system to prevent involunta-ry unlocking

Emergency unlocking system

–

–

–

–

–

Unlocking the vehicle*

Press button ››› Fig. 50 on remotecontrol to unlock all the doors and rearlid.

Locking the vehicle*

Press button ››› Fig. 50 on the remotecontrol to lock all doors and the rear lidor turn the key in the door to lock alldoors and the rear lid.

WARNING

● Never leave children or disabled persons inthe vehicle. In case of emergency, they maynot be able to leave the vehicle or manage ontheir own.

● Never allow children to play in or aroundthe vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjectedto extremely high and low temperatures, de-pending on the time of year, thus causing se-rious injuries/illness. It could even have fatalconsequences. Close and lock both the rearlid and all the other doors when you are notusing the vehicle.

● Always take you car keys with you whenyou leave the vehicle. Misuse of the keys, forexample, by children, may result in seriousdamage and accident.

– The engine may accidentally be startedand be out of control.

– If the ignition is switched on, the electricequipment could be activated with risk of

–

–

injury, for example, in the electric win-dows.

– The doors can be locked using the remotecontrol key. This could become an obsta-cle for assistance in an emergency situa-tion.

– Always take the key with you when youleave the vehicle.

● Never remove the key from the ignition ifthe vehicle is in motion. The steering lockcould suddenly engage, and you would not beable to steer the vehicle.

Note

● While the driver door is open, the vehiclecannot be locked with the remote control.This avoids the user from forgetting his keyinside the vehicle.

● If the driver door is unlocked with the keyshaft, only the driver door is unlocked, therest of the doors remain locked. When the ig-nition is switched on, the door “deadlock”function is deactivated (although the doorsremain locked) and the central lock button isactivated. See ››› page 68.

● If the central locking or anti-theft alarm arefaulty, the driver door control lamp remainslit for approx. 30 seconds after the vehiclelocks.

● For anti-theft security, only the driver dooris fitted with a lock cylinder.

63

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

“Safe” security system*

This is an anti-theft device which consists ofa double lock for the door locks and a deacti-vation function for the boot in order to pre-vent forced entry.

Activating the “deadlock”

– Press once the locking button on the re-mote control. or

– Turn the key once in the driver door lock tolock. A warning lamp in the driver doorflashes to indicate the “deadlock” is work-ing. The warning lamp flashes for approx. 2seconds at short intervals and then moreslowly.

Deactivating the “deadlock” when thevehicle is locked

– Press the lock button on the remote con-trol twice within 2 seconds. The vehicle islocked without activating the “deadlock”.The driver door warning lamp flashes forapprox. 2 seconds and then goes out. Itflashes again after around 30 seconds.

The doors can be unlocked and opened fromthe inside if the “deadlock” has not been ac-tivated. You will have to pull the door releaselever once. When the “deadlock” is off, theanti-theft alarm* ››› page 68 remains active.The vehicle interior monitoring system* andthe anti-tow system are deactivated*.

WARNING

Nobody should remain in the vehicle if the“deadlock” system mechanism has been acti-vated. It is not possible to open the doorsfrom the inside. Locked doors could delay as-sistance in an emergency. People could be-come trapped inside in an emergency.

Selective unlocking system*

This system allows to unlock either just thedriver door or all the vehicle.

Using the remote control, press the unlockbutton on the remote once. The “Safe”system for all the vehicle is deactivated, onlythe driver door is unlocked and both thealarm and the warning lamp are also turnedoff.

Unlocking all doors and the luggagecompartment

The unlock button on the remote controlmust be pressed twice so that all doorsand the luggage compartment can beopened.

Press twice within 2 seconds to deactivatethe “Safe” system for all vehicle, to unlock alldoors and to use the luggage compartment.The warning lamp and the alarm (only vehi-cles fitted with one) are turned off.

Automatic speed-dependent lockingand unlocking system*

This is a safety system which prevents accessto the vehicle from the outside when it is run-ning (e.g. when stopped at a traffic light).

Locking

The doors and boot will lock automatically ifthe speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) is exceeded.

If the vehicle is stopped and one of the doorsis opened, when the vehicle moves off againand exceeds a speed of 15 km/h (9 mph),the unlocked door(s) will lock once more.

Unlocking

The driver door automatically unlocks whenthe key is removed from the ignition.

Each door can be unlocked and opened inde-pendently from the inside (for example, whena passenger gets out). To do it, simply oper-ate the lever inside the door.

WARNING

The door handles must not be operated whenthe vehicle is running: the door would open.

64

Opening and closing

Automatic locking system forinvoluntary unlocking*

It is an anti-theft system and prevents the un-intentional unlocking of the vehicle.

If the vehicle is unlocked and none of thedoors (including the boot) are opened within30 seconds, it re-locks automatically. Thisfunction prevents the vehicle from remainingunlocked if the unlock button is pressed bymistake.

Emergency unlocking system

If the airbags are triggered during an acci-dent, the vehicle is unlocked, except for theluggage compartment. It is possible to lockthe vehicle from inside with the central lock-ing, after turning the ignition off and back onagain.

If the doors must be locked from the outside,see “Emergency locking of the doors”.

Unlocking and locking - Manualpersonalisation

Activating selective unlocking

With the driver door open, turn the key to un-lock for approx. 3 seconds.

Deactivating selective unlocking

With the driver door open, turn the key tolock for approx. 3 seconds.

The turn signal lamps flash to confirm activa-tion or deactivation.

Activation of automatic locking

Press the lock button on the central lock-ing button for 3 seconds.

Deactivation of automatic locking

Press the unlock button on the centrallocking button for 3 seconds.

The lock button lamp flashes to confirm acti-vation or deactivation.

Central lock button

Fig. 47 Detailed view of the centre console:central locking button.

The central lock button allows you to lock andunlock the vehicle from the inside.

Locking the vehicle

– Press the button ››› .

Unlocking the doors

– Press button .

The central lock button also works with theignition switched off, except when the “safe”system is activated.

Please note the following if you lock your ve-hicle with the central lock button:

● Locking the doors and rear lid prevents ac-cess from the outside (for safety reasons, e.g.when stopped at a traffic light).

● The driver door and/or front passengerdoor cannot be locked if any of the vehicledoors (except the boot) are open. This avoidsthe user from forgetting his key inside the ve-hicle.

● Repeated operation of the central lockingwill deactivate the central lock button for 30seconds. Once this time has passed, the but-ton if operative again.

● There is a danger of leaving the key insidethe vehicle if the vehicle is locked by the cen-tral locking button when the driver door isclosed and any of the rear doors open. Onclosing any of the rear doors, the vehiclelocks and the keys remain inside it. »

65

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

● All doors can be unlocked separately frominside the vehicle. Do this by pulling the doorrelease lever once.

WARNING

● If the vehicle is locked, children and disa-bled people may be trapped inside it.

● The central lock button is not operative inthe following cases:

● When the vehicle is locked from the outside(with the remote control or the key).

● While the ignition is not activated after un-locking the door lock cylinder with the key.

Note

● Vehicle locked, amber button .

● Vehicle unlocked, red button .

Childproof lock

Fig. 48 Childproof lock on the left hand sidedoor.

The childproof lock prevents the rear doorsfrom being opened from the inside. This sys-tem prevents minors from opening a door ac-cidentally while the vehicle is running.

This function is independent of the vehicleelectronic opening and locking systems. Itonly affects rear doors. It can only be activa-ted and deactivated manually, as describedbelow:

Activating the childproof lock

– Unlock the vehicle and open the door inwhich you wish to activate the childprooflock.

– With the door open, rotate the slot in thedoor using the ignition key, clockwise forthe left-hand side doors and anti-clockwisefor the right-hand side doors ››› Fig. 48.

Deactivating the childproof lock

– Unlock the vehicle and open the doorwhose childproof lock you want to deacti-vate.

– With the door open, rotate the slot in thedoor using the ignition key, clockwise forthe right-hand side doors, and anti-clock-wise for the left-hand side doors ››› Fig. 48.

Once the childproof lock is activated, thedoor can only be opened from the outside.The childproof lock can be activated or deac-tivated by inserting the key in the slot whenthe door is open, as described above.

Keys

Set of keys

Fig. 49 Set of keys.

66

Opening and closing

The set of keys belonging to your vehicle con-sists of the following items:

● one remote control key ››› Fig. 49 A withfolding key bit,

● one key without remote control B ,

● a plastic key tab* C .

Duplicate keys

If you need a replacement key, go to a Techni-cal Service with your vehicle identificationnumber.

WARNING

● An incorrect use of the keys can cause seri-ous injuries.

● Never leave children or disabled persons inthe vehicle. In case of emergency, they maynot be able to leave the vehicle or manage ontheir own.

● An uncontrolled use of the key could startthe engine or activate any electric equipment(e.g. electric windows), causing risk of acci-dent. The doors can be locked using the re-mote control key. This could become an ob-stacle for assistance in an emergency situa-tion.

● Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. Anunauthorised use of your vehicle could resultin injury, damage or theft. Always take thekey with you when you leave the vehicle.

● Never remove the key from the ignition ifthe vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steer-

ing could suddenly block and it would be im-possible to steer the vehicle.

CAUTION

There are electronic components in the re-mote control key. Avoid wetting and hittingthe keys.

Radio frequency remote control

Locking and unlocking the vehicle

Fig. 50 Assignment of buttons on the remotecontrol key.

Fig. 51 Range of the radio frequency remotecontrol.

The radio frequency remote control key isused to lock and unlock the vehicle from adistance.

By using button 4 ››› Fig. 50 on the control,the key shaft is released.

Unlocking the vehicle ››› Fig. 50 1 .

Locking the vehicle ››› Fig. 50 2 .

Unlocking the rear lid. Press button ››› Fig. 50 3 until all the turn signals on thevehicle flash briefly. When the unlocking but-ton 3 is pressed, you have 2 minutes toopen the door. Once this time has passed, itwill lock again.

Moreover, the battery indicator on the key››› Fig. 50 (arrow), will flash.

The remote control transmitter and the bat-teries are integrated in the key. The receiver »

67

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

is inside the vehicle. The maximum range de-pends on different factors. The range is re-duced as the batteries start to lose power.

Selective unlocking*

When the button ››› Fig. 50 1 , is pressedonce, the driver door is unlocked, all othersremain locked.

Press the button ››› Fig. 50 1 twice to un-lock all doors.

WARNING

Read and observe the relevant warnings ››› in Set of keys on page 67

Note

● The radio frequency remote control can beprogrammed by means of pressing the un-locking button once; as a result, only thedriver door will unlock. When the button ispressed once more, all doors and the rear lidwill be unlocked.

● The radio frequency remote control func-tions only when you are in range ››› Fig. 51(red area).

● If the vehicle is unlocked using the 1

button, it will lock again automatically if anyof the doors or the rear lid are not openedwithin 30 seconds after unlocking it. Thisfunction prevents the vehicle from remainingunlocked if the unlock button is pressed bymistake.

● If the vehicle cannot be opened and closedusing the radio frequency remote control, theremote control key will have to be re-synchronised ››› page 68.

Changing the battery

If the battery indicator does not flash whenthe buttons are pushed, the battery must bereplaced.

CAUTION

The use of inappropriate batteries may dam-age the radio frequency remote control. Forthis reason, always replace the dead batterywith another of the same size and power.


Used batteries must be disposed of at an ap-propriate waste facility or through an author-ised service, given that their components canaffect the environment.

Synchronising the remote control key

If it is not possible to unlock or lock the doorwith the remote control, it should be re-synchronised.

– Press the ››› Fig. 50 button on the re-mote control.

– Then close the vehicle using the key shaftwithin one minute.

It is possible that the vehicle could no longerbe opened and closed with the remote con-trol if the button is repeatedly pressedoutside of the effective range of the radio fre-quency remote control. The remote controlkey will have to be resynchronised.

Spare remote control keys are available atyour Technical Service, where they must bematched to the locking system.

Up to four remote control keys can be used.

Anti-theft alarm system*

Description of anti-theft alarmsystem*

The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult tobreak into the vehicle or steal it. Audible andvisible alarms are triggered if the vehicle isopened using the key, or if unauthorised ac-cess to the vehicle is forced.

The anti-theft alarm system is automaticallyswitched on when locking the vehicle. Thesystem is then primed.

● The turn signal light will flash twice onopening and deactivating the alarm.

68

Opening and closing

● The turn signal light will flash once on clos-ing and activating the alarm.

When does the system trigger an alarm?

The system triggers an alarm if the followingunauthorised actions are carried out whenthe vehicle is locked:

● Opening the vehicle mechanically usingthe key and with the ignition off.

● A door is opened.

● Opening the bonnet.

● The rear lid is opened.

● Ignition switched on with a non-validatedkey.

● Movements in the driving compartment(vehicles with interior monitoring).

● Undue manipulation of the alarm.

● Battery handling.

The acoustic signals sound and the turn sig-nals flash for approx. 30 seconds. This cyclemay be repeated up to 10 times dependingon the country.

Opening the doors mechanically (emergencyopening)

If the radio frequency remote control functionfails, you will have to use the key to unlockthe vehicle. This is done as follows:

● Use the lock on the driver door to unlockthe vehicle. The anti-theft alarm system re-mains active, but an alarm is not triggeredimmediately.

● Switch on the ignition within 15 seconds.When the ignition is switched on, the elec-tronic immobiliser recognises a valid vehiclekey and deactivates the anti-theft alarm sys-tem. If you do not switch on the ignition with-in 15 seconds, the alarm is triggered (in cer-tain markets, such as the Netherlands, thereis no 15-second waiting time and the alarmis activated immediately after opening thedoor).

Opening all the doors in manual mode

In vehicles without an alarm, when openingthe driver door manually, all doors areopened.

How to switch the alarm off

When the vehicle is unlocked via the unlock-ing button of the radio frequency remote con-trol or when the key is inserted in the ignitionlock.

Note

● After 28 days, the indicator light will beswitched off to prevent the battery fromdraining if the vehicle has been left parkedfor a long period of time. The alarm systemremains activated.

● If, after the audible warning turns off, an-other monitored area is accessed (e.g. theboot hatch is opened after a door has beenopened), the alarm is triggered again.

● The anti-theft alarm is not activated whenthe vehicle is locked from within using thecentral locking button .

● If the vehicle battery is run down or flatthen the anti-theft alarm will not operate cor-rectly.

● Vehicle monitoring remains active even ifthe battery is disconnected or not working forany reason.

● The alarm is triggered immediately if one ofthe battery cables is disconnected while thealarm system is active.

Interior monitoring*

This is a monitoring or control function incor-porated in the anti-theft alarm* which de-tects unauthorized vehicle entry by means ofultrasound.

The system consists of 3 sensors, 2 emittersand a receptor.

Activation

– It is automatically turned on with the anti-theft alarm, when the vehicle is locked me-chanically with the key and when the but-ton on the remote control is used. »

69

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

Deactivation

– Press the button on the remote controltwice. It only deactivates the interior moni-tor. The alarm system remains activated.

False alarms

Interior monitoring will only operate correctlyif the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob-serve related legal requirements.

The following cases may cause a false alarm:

● Open windows (partially or fully).

● Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially orcompletely).

● Movement of objects inside the vehicle,such as loose papers, items hanging fromthe rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.

WARNING

● The “deadlock” system remains deactiva-ted if the interior monitor is deactivated.

● For those vehicles in which a separationscreen is fitted, the alarm will not functioncorrectly due to interference with the sensor.

Note

● If the alarm has been triggered by the inte-rior monitor, this will be indicated by a flash-ing of the warning lamp on the driver door

when the vehicle is opened. This flashing willbe different to that for an activated alarm.

Deactivating vehicle interiormonitoring systems1)

Fig. 52 interior monitor button.

With the vehicle locked, any movement in theinterior (e.g. pets) will set off the alarm. De-activate interior monitor systems to preventthe alarm from going off unintentionally.

– To switch off the vehicle interior monitor,switch off the ignition and press button››› Fig. 52. The indicator on the button willlight up.

– When the vehicle is now locked, the vehicleinterior monitor is switched off until thenext time the door is opened.

If the anti-theft security system “deadlock”*››› page 64 is switched off, the interior moni-tor automatically turns off.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings ››› in “Safe”security system* on page 64.

1) Only available in certain markets.70

Opening and closing

Boot hatch

Unlocking and locking

Fig. 53 Rear lid: opening from the outside.

Fig. 54 Close-up of the inside trim of the rearlid: hand grip

The rear lid opening system operates electri-cally. It is activated by using the handle onthe rear boot lid.

Opening the rear lid

– Pull on the release lever and lift the rear lid››› Fig. 53. The rear lid will automaticallyopen.

Closing the rear lid

– Hold the rear lid by one of the two handleson the interior lining and close it, pushingslightly.

This system may or may not be operative, de-pending on the situation of the vehicle.

If the rear lid is locked then it cannot beopened, however if it is unlocked then theopening system is operative and the rear lidmay be opened.

To lock/unlock, press the button or thebutton 1 on the remote control key.

A warning appears on the instrument paneldisplay if the rear lid is open or not properlyclosed.* An audible warning is also given if itis opened while the vehicle is moving fasterthan 6 km/h (4 mph)*.

WARNING

● Always close the rear lid properly. Risk ofaccident or injury.

● Do not close the rear lid by pushing it downwith your hand on the rear window. The glasscould smash. Risk of injury!

● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing it.If not, it may open unexpectedly while driv-ing.

● Never allow children to play in or aroundthe vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjectedto extremely high and low temperatures, de-pending on the time of year, thus causing se-rious injuries/illness. It could even have fatalconsequences. Close and lock both the rearlid and all the other doors when you are notusing the vehicle.

● Closing the rear lid without observing andensuring it is clear could cause serious injuryto you and to third parties. Make sure that noone is in the path of the rear lid.

● Never drive with the rear lid open or half-closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into theinterior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!

● If you only open the rear lid, do not leavethe key inside. The vehicle cannot be openedif the key is left inside.

71

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

Electric windows

Opening or closing the electricwindows

Fig. 55 Detail of the driver door: controls forthe front and rear windows.

The front and rear electric windows can beoperated by using the controls on the driverdoor.

Opening and closing the windows

– Press the button to open the window.

– Pull the button to close the window››› .

Always close the windows fully if you parkthe vehicle or leave it unattended ››› .

You can use the electric windows for approx.10 minutes after switching off the ignition ifneither the driver door nor the front passen-

ger door has been opened and the key hasnot been removed from the ignition.

Buttons on the driver door

Button for window in front left door

Button for window in front right door

Buttons for rear windows*

Safety switch for deactivating the electricwindow buttons in the rear doors

Button for window in rear left door

Button for window in rear right door

Safety switch *

Safety switch 3 on the driver door can beused to disable the electric window buttonsin the rear doors.

Safety switch not pressed: buttons on reardoors are activated.

Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doorsare deactivated.

WARNING

● Incorrect use of the electric windows canresult in injury.

● Never close the rear lid without observingand ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise couldcause serious injury to you and third parties.Make sure that no one is in the path of a win-dow.

1

2

3

4

5

● Always take the vehicle key with you whenyou leave the vehicle.

● Never leave children or disabled persons inthe vehicle, particularly if they have access tothe keys. An uncontrolled use of the keycould start the engine or activate any electricequipment (e.g. electric windows), causingrisk of accident. The doors can be locked us-ing the remote control key. This could be-come an obstacle for assistance in an emer-gency situation.

● The electric windows will work until the keyhas been removed from the ignition and oneof the front doors has been opened.

● If necessary, use the safety switch to disa-ble the rear electric windows. Make sure thatthey have been disabled.

Note

If the window is not able to close because itis stiff or because of an obstruction, the win-dow will automatically open again››› page 73. If this happens, check why thewindow could not be closed before attempt-ing to close it again.

One-touch opening and closing

One-touch opening and closing means youdo not have to hold down the button.

72

Opening and closing

One-touch closing

– Pull up the window button briefly up to thesecond position. The window closes fully.

One-touch opening

– Push down the window button briefly up tothe second position. The window opensfully.

Restoring one-touch opening and closing

– Close all windows.

– Use the key to lock the vehicle from outsideand hold the key in the lock position for atleast one second. The one-touch function isnow ready for operation.

The buttons ››› Fig. 55 1 and 2 have twolevels for opening the window and two forclosing it. This makes it easier to open andclose windows to the desired position.

One-touch closing does not work when theignition has been switched off, even if thekey is in the ignition.

The automatic open and close function willnot work if the battery has been temporarilydisconnected, or if the battery is flat. Thefunction then has to be reactivated.

The one-touch function and roll-back functionwill not work if there is a malfunction in theelectric windows. Contact a specialised work-shop.

Roll-back function

The roll-back function reduces the risk of in-jury when the electric windows close.

● If a window is obstructed when closing au-tomatically, the window stops at this pointand lowers immediately ››› .

● If this happens, check immediately (within10 seconds) why the window could not beclosed before attempting to close it again. Af-ter 10 seconds the normal automatic func-tion resumes.

● If the window is still obstructed, the win-dow will stop at this point.

● If there is no obvious reason why the win-dow cannot be closed, try to close it againwithin 5 seconds.

If you wait longer than 10 seconds, the win-dow will open again fully when you operateone of the buttons. One-touch closing is reac-tivated.

The one-touch function and roll-back functionwill not work if there is a malfunction in theelectric windows. Contact a specialised work-shop.

WARNING

● Incorrect use of the electric windows canresult in injury.

● Always take the ignition key with you whenleaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to

be gone for a short time. Please ensure thatchildren are never left alone inside the vehi-cle.

● The electric windows will work until the keyhas been removed from the ignition and oneof the front doors has been opened.

● Never close the rear lid without observingand ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise couldcause serious injury to you and third parties.Make sure that no one is in the path of a win-dow.

● Never allow people to remain in the vehiclewhen you close the vehicle from the outside.The windows cannot be opened even in anemergency.

Note

The roll-back function is deactivated if thewindows are closed from the outside of thevehicle using the ignition key for convenienceclosing ››› page 73.

Convenience opening and closing*

Using the door lock

– Hold the key in the door lock of the driverdoor in either the locking or the unlockingposition until all windows are eitheropened or closed.

– Release the key to interrupt this function. »

73

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

Using the remote control

– Push the lock or unlock button on the re-mote control for approximately 3 seconds.All windows which function electrically willbe either opened or closed.

– Release the unlock button to interrupt thefunction.

– Once the windows are completely closed,the turn signals will flash.

Sliding/tilting sunroof*

Opening and closing thesliding/tilting roof

Fig. 56 Roof lining description: sliding/tiltingsunroof rotary knob.

The sliding/tilting sunroof is opened andclosed using the rotary knob when the igni-tion is switched on.

Closing the sliding/tilting sunroof

– Turn the rotary button to position A

››› Fig. 56 ››› .

Opening the sliding/tilting sunroof

– Turn the rotary button to position B . Thesunroof opens to the convenience positionwhere wind noise is reduced.

– To open the roof further, turn the switch toposition C and hold the switch in this po-sition until the roof opens to the desiredposition.

Tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof

– Turn the rotary button to position D .

Always close the sliding/tilting sunroof fullyif you park the vehicle or leave it unattended››› .

The sliding/tilting sunroof can be operatedfor up to about 10 minutes after the ignitionhas been switched off, provided the driverdoor and the front passenger door are notopened.

Sun visor

The sun visor is opened together with thesliding/tilting sunroof. If required, it can beclosed by hand when the sunroof is closed.

WARNING

● Incorrect use of the sliding/tilting sunroofcan result in injury.

● Never close the sliding/tilting sunroof with-out checking there are no obstructions, to dootherwise could cause serious injury to youand others. Make sure that no one is in thepath of the sliding/tilting sunroof.

● Always take the vehicle key with you whenyou leave the vehicle.

● Never leave children or disabled persons inthe vehicle, particularly if they have access tothe keys. Unsupervised use of a key couldmean that the engine is started or that elec-trical equipment is used (e.g. electric slid-ing/tilting sunroof). Risk of accident! Thedoors can be locked using the remote controlkey. This could become an obstacle for assis-tance in an emergency situation.

● The sliding/tilting sunroof continues tofunction until one of the front doors isopened and the key removed from the igni-tion.

Convenience closing*

Using the door lock

– Hold the key in the door lock of the driverdoor in the locking position until the slid-ing/tilting sunroof is closed.

– Release the key to interrupt this function.

74

Lights and visibility

Using the remote control

– Push the lock button on the remote controlfor approximately 3 seconds. The slid-ing/tilting sunroof is closed.

– Release the unlock button to interrupt thefunction.

– When the sliding/tilting sunroof has closedcompletely, the turn signals flash once.

Note

The sliding/tilting sunroof rotary knob re-mains in the last position selected if the roofis closed using convenience closing from out-side the vehicle and will have to be re-posi-tioned the next time you drive.

Roll-back function of thesliding/tilting sunroof*

Fig. 57 Roof lining description: sliding/tiltingsunroof rotary knob.

The sliding/tilting sunroof has a roll-backfunction which prevents larger objects get-ting trapped when the roof is closed. The roll-back function does not prevent fingers get-ting pinched against the roof opening. Thesliding/tilting sunroof stops and opens againimmediately if it is obstructed when closing.

If the sliding/tilting sunroof has beenopened again by the roll-back function, it canbe closed only by pressing the rotary buttonat the front in position A ››› Fig. 57 until thesliding/tilting sunroof has closed fully.Please note that the sunroof will now closewithout the roll-back function.


Lights

Switching lights on and off

Fig. 58 Detailed view of the dash panel:lights, front fog lights and rear fog lightswitch.

Switching on the side lights

– Turn the light switch ››› Fig. 58 to position.

Switching on dipped beam headlights

– Turn the light switch to position .

Switching off the lights

– Turn the light switch to position 0. »

75

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

Switching on front fog lights*

– Pull the switch out of position or tothe first stop. The symbol of the lightcontrol lights up.

Switching on the rear fog lights (vehicleswith front fog lights)

– Pull the switch out of position or tothe second stop ››› . A control lamp lightsup on the dash panel.

Switching on the rear fog lights (vehicleswith no front fog lights)

– Pull the light switch from position to thelast stop. A control lamp lights up in thedash panel.

WARNING

Never drive with just the side lights on. Riskof accident. The side lights are not brightenough to illuminate the road ahead and toensure that other road users are able to seeyou. Always use your dipped beam head-lights if it is dark or if visibility is poor.

Note

● The dipped beam headlights will only workwith the ignition on. The side lights come onautomatically when the ignition is turned off.

● If the lights are left on after the key hasbeen taken out of the ignition lock, an audi-ble warning will sound while the driver door

remains open. This is a reminder to switchthe lights off.

● The rear fog light is so bright that it candazzle drivers behind you. You should usethe rear fog light only when visibility is verypoor.

● If you are towing a trailer equipped with arear fog light on a vehicle with a factory-fittedtowing bracket, the rear fog light on the vehi-cle will automatically be switched off.

● The use of the lighting described here issubject to the relevant statutory require-ments.

● Depending on weather conditions (verycold or wet), the front and rear lights and theindicators may be temporarily misted. Thishas no influence on the useful life of thelighting system. The lights will soon demistwhen they are switched on.

Automatic lighting*

Fig. 59 Automatic lighting.

Activation

– Rotate the switch to the position. It willlight up.

Deactivation

– Turn the light switch to .

Automatic lighting

If automatic headlight control is switched on,dipped beam headlights are automaticallyswitched on by a photosensor if you drive in-to a tunnel, for example.

The rain sensor switches on the dipped beamheadlights when the windscreen wipers havebeen operating continuously for a few sec-onds and it switches the lights off when thecontinuous or interval wipe is switched off forsome minutes ››› page 84.

76


When the automatic dipped beam headlightcontrol is on but the dipped beam headlightsare off, the warning lamp lights up onthe light control ››› Fig. 59. If the automaticcontrol switches on the dipped lights, the in-strument and control lighting is also switch-ed on.

WARNING

● Even if the automatic headlight control isswitched on, the dipped beam headlights willnot be switched on with fog. Therefore, thedipped beam must be switched on manually.

Note

● For those vehicles with the automatic head-light system, when the key is removed fromthe ignition, the audible warning will onlysound if the light control is in the position or if the vehicle is not fitted with the com-ing home function.

● If the daylight driving automatic light func-tion is switched on, the front fog lights orrear fog light cannot be switched on in addi-tion.

● The use of the lighting described here issubject to the relevant statutory require-ments.

● Do not put stickers on the windscreen infront of the sensor. This may cause disrup-tions or faults in the automatic lighting sys-tem.

● To avoid damage to the tail lights, thelights mounted on the rear lid go off when therear lid is opened (depending on the country).

Turn signal and main beam headlightlever

Fig. 60 Turn signal and main beam lever

The turn signal and main beam headlight lev-er has the following functions:

Switching on the turn signals

– Move the lever all the way up ››› Fig. 60 1

to indicate right, and all the way down 2

to indicate left.

Signalling a lane change

– Push the lever up 1 or down 2 to thepoint where you incur resistance and thenrelease it. The turn signal will flash several

times. The corresponding control lamp willalso flash.

Switching main beam on and off

– If the dipped lights are on, push the leverforward ››› Fig. 60 3 to switch on the mainbeam headlights.

– Push the lever towards the steering wheel››› Fig. 60 4 to switch off the main beam.

Headlight flashers

– Pull the lever towards the steering wheel4 to operate the flasher.

Switching on parking lights

– Switch the ignition off and remove the keyfrom the lock.

– Move the turn signal lever up or down toturn the right or left-hand parking lights on,respectively.

WARNING

The main beam can dazzle other drivers. Riskof accident! Never use the main beam head-lights or the headlight flasher if they coulddazzle other drivers.

Note

● The turn signals only work when the igni-tion is switched on. The corresponding warn-ing lamp or flashes in the instrument »

77

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

panel. The control lamp flashes when theturn signals are operated, provided a trailer iscorrectly attached and connected to the vehi-cle. If a turn signal bulb is defective, the con-trol lamp flashes at double speed. If the trail-er turn signal bulbs are defective, the controllamp does not light up. Change the bulb.

● The main beam headlights can only beswitched on if the dipped beam headlightsare already on. The warning lamp thencomes on in the instrument panel.

● The headlight flasher comes on for as longas you pull the lever – even if no other lightsare switched on. The warning lamp thencomes on in the instrument panel.

● When the parking lights are switched on,the headlight and the tail light on the corre-sponding side of the vehicle light up. Theparking lights will only work if the key is re-moved from the ignition. If said light is on, anaudible warning will be emitted while thedriver door is open.

● If the turn signal lever is left on after thekey has been taken out of the ignition lock,an acoustic signal sounds when the driverdoor is opened. This is intended as a remind-er to switch off the turn signal, unless youwish to leave the parking light on.

Daytime driving lights*

Daytime running lights are signalling devicesfor improving road safety. The lights are built

into the headlights and come on each timethe ignition is turned on if the light switch isin position 0 or . It is automaticallyswitched off when the side lights are turnedon.

Automatic control of the dipped beam incombination with the daytime running lights

If the dipped beam control and the daytimerunning lights are activated at the sametime, the dipped beams and the instrumentpanel lighting will automatically come on asrequired (e.g. when entering a tunnel) andthe daytime running lights will switch off.When the automatic dipped beam controlswitches off the dipped beams (e.g. whencoming out of a tunnel), the daytime runninglights come back on.

WARNING

The side lights or daytime driving lights arenot bright enough to illuminate the roadahead and to ensure that other road users areable to see you.

● Always use your dipped beam head lights ifit is raining or if visibility is poor.

● The rear lights do not come on with thedaytime driving light. A vehicle which doesnot have the rear lights on may not be visibleto other drivers in the darkness, if it is rain-ing or in conditions of poor visibility.

Note

Please observe any relevant legal require-ments which may apply in your country.

Nordic country solution3 Only available in certain countries or as anoptional extra

The so-called “Nordic country solution” is analternative solution to daytime running lightsin vehicles without this function. It consistsof simultaneously connecting the dimmeddipped beams, the sidelights and the licenceplate lights.

The aforementioned lights are switched oneach time the ignition is turned on if the lightswitch is in position 0 or . Dependingupon the model, the control lamp on thelight control switch or the instrument panellighting will indicate that the lights are on.

Activation of the Nordic country solution

● Remove the key from the ignition, move theturn signal lever upward (right turn signal),press it back to flash position and hold itthere.

● Insert the key and switch on the ignition,holding it in this position for 3 seconds.Then, switch off the ignition. The Nordiccountry solution is now activated and the cor-responding lights can come on.

78


Deactivation of the Nordic country solution

● Remove the key from the ignition, press theturn signal lever down (left turn signal), pressit back to flash position and hold it here.

● Insert the key and switch on the ignition,holding it in this position for 3 seconds.Then, switch off the ignition. The Nordiccountry solution is now deactivated and thecorresponding lights will not come on.

Coming Home/Leaving Homefunction*

The Coming Home function is controlled man-ually. The Leaving Home function is control-led with a photosensor.

If the Coming Home or Leaving Home func-tion is connected, the front side and dippedlights, the tail lights and the number platelight will light up to provide assistance.

Coming home function

The Coming Home function is activated byswitching off the ignition and briefly flashingthe lights. When the driver door is opened,the Coming Home lighting comes on. If thedriver door is already open when the lightsare flashed briefly, the Coming Home lightingcomes on immediately.

When the last door of the vehicle or the rearlid is closed, the Coming Home function

starts and the switching off the headlights isdelayed.

The Coming Home lighting switches off in thefollowing cases:

● On completion of the time period establish-ed for the delay in switching off the lights af-ter all the vehicle doors and the rear lid havebeen closed.

● If, 30 seconds after being connected, anydoors or the rear lid remain open.

● If the light switch is turned to position .

● If the ignition is switched on.

Leaving home function

The Leaving Home function is activated whenthe vehicle is unlocked if:

● the light control is in position and

● the photosensor detects “darkness”.

The Leaving Home lighting switches off in thefollowing cases:

● If the time period for the delay in switchingoff the headlights has ended

● If the vehicle is locked again.

● If the light switch is turned to position .

● If the ignition is switched on.

Note

The setting for the delay in switching off theheadlights in the Coming Home and LeavingHome function can be changed or the func-tion can be connected or disconnected in themenu Lights and visibility ››› page 56.

● If the ignition key is removed while thelights are on, the lights flash briefly and thedriver door opens, no audible warning isheard, since with the Coming Home functionon, the lights are automatically switched offafter a period of time (except when the lightswitch is in position or .

Instrument and switch lighting /Headlight range control

Fig. 61 Dash panel: Instrument panel andcontrol dimmers and headlight range control. »

79

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

Instrument and switch lighting 1

When the headlights are switched on, thebrightness of the instrument panel and con-trols can be adjusted by turning the thumbwheel ››› Fig. 61 1 .

The instrument lighting (dials and needles),the centre console illumination and the illu-mination of the displays are regulated by aphotodiode incorporated in the instrumentpanel.

The instrument lighting (dials and needles) isswitched on when the ignition is on and thevehicle lights are off. The instrument lightingis dimmed automatically as the daylightstarts to fade. It goes out completely whenambient light is very low. This function is in-tended to remind the driver to switch on thedipped beam headlights in good time whenlight conditions become poor.

Headlight range control 2

By using the electrical headlight range con-trol, 2 you can adjust the headlight range tothe load level that is being carried in the ve-hicle. This way, it is possible to avoid daz-zling oncoming traffic more than necessary.At the same time, by using the correct head-light settings, the driver has the best possi-ble lighting for the road ahead.

The headlights can only be adjusted whenthe dipped beam is switched on. To lower the

beam, turn the thumb wheel down 2 fromthe basic setting 0.

Dynamic headlight range control

Vehicles with gas discharge lamps (“xenonlamps”) are equipped with dynamic head-light range control. This means that theheadlights will be adjusted to suit the loadlevel of the vehicle and “nodding move-ments” when pulling off and braking are au-tomatically compensated for.

Vehicles with gas discharge bulbs do nothave headlight range control.

Adaptive headlights* (for drivinground bends)

Fig. 62 Cornering lighting using adaptiveheadlights.

When driving around bends, the headlightswill light the most important areas of theroad.

Dynamic cornering lights* (AFS)

Dynamic cornering lights only operate if thevehicle is travelling at more than 10 km/h(6 mph) and the dipped headlights are on.When taking a bend, the road is illuminatedbetter with directional gas discharge bulbsthan with conventional fixed headlights.

A fault in the system is indicated via theflashing of the control lamp on the instru-ment panel. At the same time, a text mes-sage with information or instructions to per-form necessary operations may appear onthe instrument panel display. Take the vehi-cle to a specialised workshop and have thefault repaired.

If the control lamp lights up on the instru-ment panel but all the bulbs are operatingcorrectly ››› page 198, there may still be afault in the dynamic curve lighting system(AFS). Take the vehicle to a specialised work-shop and have the fault repaired.

WARNING

If the “automatic dipped beam control” isswitched on, the dipped beam headlights willnot be switched on in fog. They should beswitched on manually using the light switch.The driver is personally responsible for the

80


correct use of lights in all situations. “Auto-matic headlight control” is merely a systemto support the driver. Where necessary,switch on the lights manually using the lightswitch.

Fog lights with cornering function*3 Applies to the model: ALTEA / ALTEA XL

When the turn signal is switched on to turn oron very tight bends, the right or left fog lightautomatically comes on to function as a cor-nering light. The cornering light only oper-ates if the dipped beam lights are on.

WARNING

Read and observe the relevant warnings ››› in Adaptive headlights* (for driving roundbends) on page 80

Hazard warning lights

Fig. 63 Dash panel: switch for hazard warn-ing lights.

The hazard warning lights are used to drawthe attention of other road users to your vehi-cle in emergencies.

If your vehicle breaks down:

1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance frommoving traffic.

2. Press the button to switch on the hazardwarning lights ››› .

3. Switch the ignition off.

4. Apply the handbrake.

5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear;for an automatic gearbox, move the gearlever to P.

6. Use the warning triangle to draw the atten-tion of other road users to your vehicle.

7. Always take the vehicle key with you whenyou leave the vehicle.

Switch on the hazard warning lights to warnother road users, for example:

● reaching the tail end of a traffic jam,

● there is an emergency

● your vehicle breaks down due to a techni-cal fault,

● you are towing another vehicle or your vehi-cle is being towed.

All turn signals flash simultaneously whenthe hazard warning lights are switched on.The two turn signal turn signal lamps and the turn signal lamp in the switch willflash at the same time. The hazard warninglights also work when the ignition is switch-ed off.

Emergency braking warning

If the vehicle brakes suddenly and continu-ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50mph), the brake light flashes several timesper second to warn the vehicles driving be-hind. If you continue braking, the hazardwarning lights will come on automaticallywhen the vehicle comes to a standstill. Theyswitch off automatically when the vehiclestarts to move again. »

81

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

WARNING

● The risk of an accident increases if your ve-hicle breaks down. Always use the hazardwarning lights and a warning triangle to drawthe attention of other road users to your sta-tionary vehicle.

● Never park where the catalytic convertercould come into contact with inflammablematerials under the vehicle, for example drygrass or spilt petrol. This could start a fire!

Note

● The battery will run down if the hazardwarning lights are left on for a long time,even if the ignition is switched off.

● The use of the hazard warning lights de-scribed here is subject to the relevant statu-tory requirements.

Interior lights

Front interior lights and reading lights

Fig. 64 Interior roof trim: front interior light-ing option 1.

Fig. 65 Interior roof trim: front interior light-ing option 2.

Switch A ››› Fig. 64 o ››› Fig. 65 is used to se-lect the following positions:

Courtesy light position

Rocker switch in flat position (not activated).The interior lighting is automatically switchedon when the vehicle is unlocked or the key re-moved from the ignition. It goes out approxi-mately 20 seconds after the doors areclosed. The interior lights are switched offwhen the vehicle is locked or when the igni-tion is switched on.

Interior light switched on

Push the switch to the position .

Turning off the interior light 0

Press the switch to position 0 ››› Fig. 64 or››› Fig. 65.

Switching on the reading light

Press the corresponding button B ››› Fig. 64or ››› Fig. 65 to switch on the reading light.

Switching the reading lights off

Press the corresponding button to switch thereading light off.

Note

If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the in-terior lights will be switched off after approx.10 minutes, providing the ignition key hasbeen removed and the courtesy light positionselected. This prevents the battery from dis-charging.

82


Rear interior lights and readinglights*

Fig. 66 Interior roof trim: rear interior lightsand reading lights.

The switch ››› Fig. 66 C is used to select thefollowing positions:

Interior light switched off 0

In switch position ››› Fig. 66 1 , the interiorand reading lights are switched off.

Switching on the reading light

Turn the switch to position 2 (left readinglight) or to position 4 (right reading light).

Courtesy light position

Turn the control to position 3 . The interiorlighting is automatically switched on whenthe vehicle is unlocked or the key removedfrom the ignition. The light goes out approxi-mately 20 seconds after the doors are

closed. The interior lights are switched offwhen the vehicle is locked or when the igni-tion is switched on.

Interior lights or both reading lightsswitched on

Turn the control to position 5 .

Note

If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the in-terior lights will be switched off after approx.10 minutes, providing the ignition key hasbeen removed and the courtesy light positionselected. This prevents the battery from dis-charging.

Visibility

Sun visors

Fig. 67 Sun visor on the driver side.

The sun visors for the driver and the frontpassenger can be pulled out of their mount-ings in the centre of the vehicle and turnedtowards the doors ››› Fig. 67 1 .

The vanity mirrors in the sun visors have cov-ers. When you open the cover 2 , a lamp inthe roof lights up.

The light* in the roof lining will go out whenthe vanity mirror cover is pushed back or thesun visor is pushed back up.

Note

The roof lighting will go out approximatelyten minutes after the ignition key has beenremoved. This prevents the battery from dis-charging.

Sun blind*3 Applies to the model: ALTEA XL/ALTEA FREETRACK

Fig. 68 Rear door blind. »83

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

Rear window sun blind*

– Pull out the visor and hook it onto thehooks at the top of the door frame››› Fig. 68.

Windscreen wiper and rearwindow wiper systems

Windscreen wipers

Fig. 69 Windscreen wiper lever.

Fig. 70 Rain sensor on the windscreen seenfrom the interior.

The windscreen wiper lever ››› Fig. 69 has thefollowing positions:

Initial position 0

Rest, windscreen disconnected.

Intermittent wipe / automatic wipe with rainsensor*

– Move the lever up to position 1 .

– With switch A adjust the wipe interval orsensitivity of the rain sensor*.

Switch A has 4 positions.

The rain sensor* is part of the intermittentwipe function. You will have to switch the rainsensor back on if you switch off the ignition.This is done by switching the wiper intervalwipe function off and back on.

Slow wipe

– Push the lever up to position 2 .

Continuous wipe

– Push the lever up to position 3 .

Short wipe

– Move the lever down to position 4 to givethe windscreen a short wipe. The wiper willstart to move faster if you keep the leverpressed down for longer than two seconds.

Automatic wash/wipe

– Pull the lever towards the steering wheel,position 5 . The wash function will startimmediately and the wipers will start with aslight delay. The wash and wiper systemswill function at the same time at speeds ofover 120 km/h (75 mph).

– Release the lever. The wipers will keep run-ning for approximately 4 seconds.

Heated windscreen in the wiper blade area*

In some countries and in some versions, it ispossible to heat the windscreen in the areaof the windscreen wiper blades in order toaid de-icing in this area. The function isswitched on by pressing the heated rear win-dow key .

84


WARNING

● Worn and dirty wiper blades reduce visibili-ty and safety levels while driving.

● In cold conditions, you should not use thewash/wipe system unless you have warmedthe windscreen with the heating and ventila-tion system. The windscreen washer fluidcould otherwise freeze on the windscreen andobscure your view of the road.

● The rain sensor may not detect enough rainto switch on the wipers. If necessary, switchon the wipers manually when water on thewindscreen impedes visibility.

● Always note the corresponding warnings››› page 194.

CAUTION

In icy conditions, always check that the wiperblades are not frozen to the glass before us-ing the wipers for the first time. If you switchon the windscreen wipers when the wiperblades are frozen to the windscreen, youcould damage both the wiper blades and thewiper motor.

Note

● The windscreen wipers will only work whenthe ignition is switched on.

● In certain versions of vehicles with alarms,the windscreen wiper will only work when theignition is on and the bonnet closed.

● When in use, the wipers do not go as far asthe rest position. When the lever is moved toposition 0, they are totally hidden.

● If the vehicle stops when wiper speed 2

››› Fig. 69 or 3 is selected, the next speeddown will be selected automatically. The setspeed will be resumed when the vehicle pullsaway.

● The windscreen will be wiped again afterapproximately five seconds once the “auto-matic wash/wipe system” has been activa-ted, provided the vehicle is moving (drip func-tion). If you activate the wipers less than 3seconds after the drip function, a new washsequence will begin without performing thelast wipe. For the “drip” function to workagain, you have to turn the ignition off andthen on again.

● When the “interval wipe function” is on,the intervals are directly proportional to thespeed. This way, the higher the vehicle speedthe shorter the intervals.

● The wiper will try to wipe away any obsta-cles that are on the windscreen. The wiperwill stop moving if the obstacle continues toblock its path. Remove the obstacle andswitch the wiper back on again.

● Before removing any objects that may betrapped in the side areas of the windscreen,always move the wiper arms to the serviceposition (horizontal).

● The heat output of the heated jets is con-trolled automatically when the ignition isswitched on, depending upon the outsidetemperature.

● Do not put stickers on the windscreen infront of the rain sensor*. This may cause sen-sor disruption or faults.

Rear window wiper

Fig. 71 Windscreen wiper lever: rear windowwiper.

Switching on the interval wipe

– Press the lever forward to position 6

››› Fig. 71. The wiper will wipe the windowapproximately every 6 seconds.

Switching off the interval wipe function

– Pull the lever back from position 6 towardthe steering wheel. The wiper will continueto function for a short period if you switchoff whilst the wipers are in motion. »

85

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

Switching on automatic wipe

– Press the lever fully forwards to position 7

››› Fig. 71. The rear wash function will startimmediately and the wiper will start a fewseconds later. The rear window wash sys-tem will function as long as you hold thelever in this position.

– Release the lever. The wiper then wipes forapproximately 4 seconds, and then in inter-vals again.

– Release the lever. The washer system stopsand the wipers function.

WARNING

● Worn and dirty wiper blades reduce visibili-ty and safety levels while driving.

● Always note the corresponding warningson ››› page 194.

CAUTION

In icy conditions, always check that the wiperblade is not frozen to the glass before usingthe wiper for the first time. If you switch onthe wiper when the wiper blade is frozen tothe glass, this could damage both the wiperblade and the wiper motor.

Note

● The windscreen wiper will only functionwhen the ignition is switched on and the rearlid is closed.

● In reverse gear, with the windscreen wipersswitched on, the rear windscreen wiper willmake one wipe.

Headlight washer*

The headlight washers clean the headlightlenses.

The headlight washers are activated auto-matically when the windscreen washer isused and the window wiper lever is pulled to-wards the steering wheel for at least 1.5 sec-onds – provided the dipped beam headlightsor main beams are switched on. Clean offstubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from the head-lights at regular intervals, for instance, whenfilling the fuel tank.

Note

● To ensure that the headlight washers workproperly in winter, keep the nozzle holders inthe bumper free of snow and remove any icewith a de-icer spray.

● To remove water, the windscreen wiperswill be activated from time to time, the head-light washers will be activated every three cy-cles.

Rear vision mirrors

Interior rear vision mirror

It is dangerous to drive if you cannot seeclearly through the rear window.

Manual anti-dazzle function for interior rearvision mirror

In the basic mirror position, the lever at thebottom edge of the rear vision mirror shouldbe at the front. Pull the lever to the back toselect the anti-dazzle function.

Automatic anti-dazzle interior rearvision mirror*

Fig. 72 Automatic anti-dazzle interior rear vi-sion mirror.

86


Switching off the anti-dazzle function

– Press button A ››› Fig. 72. Control lamp B

goes off.

Switching on the anti-dazzle function

– Press button A ››› Fig. 72. The controllamp lights up.

Anti-dazzle function

The anti-dazzle function is activated everytime the ignition is switched on. The greenwarning lamp lights up in the rear vision mir-ror housing.

When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, theinterior rear vision mirror will darken auto-matically according to the amount of light itreceives. The anti-dazzle function is cancel-led if reverse gear is engaged.

Note

● The automatic anti-dazzle function will onlywork properly if the sun blind* for the rearwindow is retracted and there are no otherobjects preventing light from reaching the in-terior rear vision mirror.

● If you have to stick any type of sticker onthe windscreen, do not do so in front of thesensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-daz-zle function from working well or even fromworking at all.

Exterior mirrors

Fig. 73 Exterior mirror controls.

The exterior mirrors can be adjusted usingthe rotary knob in the centre console.

Basic setting of exterior mirrors

1. Turn knob ››› Fig. 73 to position L (left ex-terior mirror).

2. Turn the rotary knob to position the exteri-or mirror so that you have a good view tothe rear of the vehicle.

3. Turn the knob to position R (right exteriormirror).

4. Swivel the rotary knob to position the ex-terior mirror so that you have a good viewto the rear of the vehicle ››› .

Heating the exterior mirrors*

– Turn the knob forward ››› Fig. 73 so that theheated rear vision mirrors warm up and the

heated windscreen* in the wiper blade restarea is activated ››› page 84.

– Exterior mirror heating is not activated intemperatures above approximately +20 °C(+68 °F).

Folding in exterior mirrors*

– Turn the control ››› Fig. 73 to position tofold in the exterior mirrors. You should al-ways fold in the exterior mirrors if you aredriving through an automatic car wash.This will help prevent damage.

Folding exterior mirrors with convenienceclosing*

– The exterior mirror will fold back automati-cally with convenience closing (with the re-mote or the key).

– To unfold it again, open the door andswitch on the ignition.

Folding exterior mirrors back out to theextended position*

– Turn the knob to another position to foldthe exterior mirrors back out ››› .

Synchronised mirror adjustment

1. Turn the control to the position L (left ex-terior mirror).

2. Turn the rotary knob to position the exteri-or mirror so that you have a good view to »

87

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

the rear of the vehicle. The right exteriormirror will be adjusted at the same time(synchronised).

WARNING

● Convex or spherical mirrors increase thefield of vision however the objects appearsmaller and further away. If you use thesemirrors to estimate the distance to vehiclesbehind you when changing lane, you couldmake a mistake. Risk of accident.

● If possible, use the rear vision mirror to es-timate distances to vehicles behind you.

● Make sure that you do not get your fingertrapped between the mirror and the mirrorbase when folding back the mirrors. Risk ofinjury!


The exterior mirror heating should be switch-ed off when it is no longer needed. Other-wise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste.

Note

● If the electrical adjustment ever fails to op-erate, the mirrors can be adjusted by hand bylightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.

● In vehicles with electric exterior mirrors,the following points should be observed: if,due to an external force (e.g. being knockedwhile manoeuvring), the adjustment of themirror housing is altered, the mirror will haveto be fully folded electrically. Do not readjust

the rear vision mirror housing by hand, asthis will interfere with the mirror adjusterfunction.

● The rear vision mirrors can be adjusted sep-arately or simultaneously, as describedabove.

● The folding function on the exterior mirrorsis not active at speeds over 40 km/h(25 mph).

Seats and head restraints

Adjusting the seat and headrestraints

The importance of correct seatadjustment

Proper seat adjustment optimises the level ofprotection offered by seat belts and airbags.

Your vehicle has five seats, two in the frontand three in the rear. Each seat is equippedwith a three-point seat belt.

The driver seat and the front passenger seatcan be adjusted in many ways to suit thephysical requirements of the vehicle occu-pants. The correct seat position is very impor-tant for:

● a fast and easy operation of all controls onthe instrument panel,

● a relaxed posture which does not causedrowsiness,

● a safe driving ››› page 5,

● ensuring that the seat belts and airbag sys-tem provide maximum protection ››› page 11.

WARNING

● If the driver and passengers assume im-proper sitting positions, they may sustaincritical injuries.

88


● Never transport more than the permittedamount of people in your vehicle.

● Every vehicle occupant must properly fas-ten and wear the seat belt belonging to his orher seat. Children must be protected with anappropriate child restraint system ››› page 24,Transporting children safety.

● The front seats and all head restraints mustalways be adjusted to body size and the seatbelt must always be properly adjusted to pro-vide you and your passengers with optimumprotection.

● Always keep your feet on the footwell whenthe vehicle is moving; never rest them on thedash panel, out of the window or on the seat.This is also applied to passengers. An incor-rect sitting position exposes you to an in-creased risk of injury in case of a suddenbraking or an accident. If the airbag is trig-gered, you could sustain severe injuries dueto an incorrect sitting position.

● It is important for the driver and front pas-senger to keep a distance of at least 25 cmfrom the steering wheel and dash panel. Fail-ure to respect the minimum distance meansthat the airbag will not protect you. Risk offatal injury. The distance between the driverand the steering wheel or between the frontpassenger and the dash panel should alwaysbe as great as possible.

● Adjust the driver or front passenger seatonly when the vehicle is stationary. This alsoapplies to the forwards/backwards adjust-ment of the rear seats. Otherwise, your seatcould move unexpectedly while the vehicle is

moving. This could increase the risk of an ac-cident and therefore, injury. In addition,while adjusting your seat, you will assume anincorrect sitting position. Risk of fatal acci-dents.

● Special guidelines apply to installing achild seat on the front passenger seat. Wheninstalling a child seat, please observe thewarnings described in ››› page 24, Transport-ing children safety.

Adjustment of the front seats

Fig. 74 Front left seat controls

The control elements in ››› Fig. 74 are mir-rored for the front right-hand seat.

1 Adjusting the seat forwards andbackwards

– Pull up the grip and move the seat forwardsor backwards.

– Then release the grip 1 and move the seatfurther until the catch engages.

2 Adjusting the seat height*

– Pull the lever up or push down (severaltimes if necessary) from its home position.This adjusts the seat height in stages.

3 Adjusting the backrest angle

– Take your weight off the backrest and turnthe hand wheel.

4 Adjusting the lumbar support*

– Take your weight off the backrest and turnthe hand wheel to adjust the lumbar sup-port.

As you make the adjustments, the curvatureof the cushioned area of the lumbar regionbecomes more or less acute. In this way, itadapts to the natural curvature of the spine.

WARNING

● Never adjust the driver or front passengerseat while the vehicle is in motion. While ad-justing your seat, you will assume an incor-rect sitting position. Risk of fatal accidents.Adjust the driver or front passenger seat onlywhen the vehicle is stationary.

● To reduce the risk of injury to the driver andfront passenger in case of a sudden brakingor an accident, never drive with the backresttilted towards the rear. The maximum »

89

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

protection of the seat belt can be achievedonly when the backrests are in an upright po-sition and the driver and front passengerhave properly adjusted their seat belts. Thefurther the backrests are tilted to the rear,the greater the risk of injury due to improperpositioning of the belt web!

● Exercise caution when securing the seatheight into forwards/backwards position. In-juries can be caused if the seat height is ad-justed without due care and attention.

Correct adjustment of head restraints

Fig. 75 Front and side view: head restraintsand seat belts correctly adjusted.


– Adjust the head restraint so that the top isat the same level as the top of your head,at the very least, at eye level ››› Fig. 75.

Adjusting the head restraints ››› page 90

WARNING

● Travelling with the head restraints removedor improperly adjusted increases the risk ofsevere injuries.

● Improperly adjusted head restraints couldlead to death in the event of a collision or ac-cident.

● Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also in-crease the risk of injury during sudden or un-expected driving or braking manoeuvres.

● The head restraints must always be adjus-ted according to the height of the passenger.

Removing or adjusting head restraints

Fig. 76 Adjusting and removing the head re-straints.

Adjusting height (front seats)

– Press the button on the side and pull up-wards to the desired position.

– To lower the head restraint, press the but-ton and push head restraint downwards.

– Make sure that it engages securely into oneof its positions.

Adjusting height (rear seats)

– Press the button on the side and pull up-wards to the desired position.

– To lower the head restraint, press the but-ton and push head restraint downwards.

– Make sure that the head restraint engagessecurely in one of its positions. ››› page 10

90


Angle adjustment (front seats)

– Press the head restraint forward or back tothe required position.

Removing the head restraint

– Push the head restraint up as far as it willgo.

– Press the button ››› Fig. 76 (arrow).

– Pull head restraint out of fitting without re-leasing the button.

Fitting the head restraint

– Insert the head restraint into the guides onthe backrest.

– Push head restraint down.

– Adjust the head restraint to suit body size››› page 10 and ››› page 9.

WARNING

● Never drive if the head restraints have beenremoved. Risk of injury.

● Never drive if the head restraints are in anunsuitable position, there is a risk of seriousinjury.

● After refitting the head restraint, you mustalways adjust it properly for height to achieveoptimal protection.

● Please observe the safety warnings in››› page 90, Correct adjustment of head re-straints.

Seat functions

Heated seats*

Fig. 77 Thumb wheel for front seat heating.

Fig. 78 Front seat heating with Climatronic.

The front seat cushions and backrests can beheated electrically.

Front seat heating for vehicles withoutClimatronic

– Turn the appropriate thumb wheel››› Fig. 77 to switch on the seat heating. Theseat heating is switched off in the 0 posi-tion.

Front seat heating for vehicles withClimatronic

– Press the button to switch on seat heating.

– Press once to set seat heating at maximumlevel (level 3).

– Press twice to set seat heating at mediumlevel (level 2).

– Press three times to set seat heating atminimum level (level 1).

– When the button is pressed four times, theheating goes off and the LED goes out (lev-el 0).

The seat heating only works when the igni-tion is switched on. The left thumb wheelcontrols the left seat and the right thumbwheel the right seat.

CAUTION

To avoid damaging the heating elements,please do not kneel on the seat or applysharp pressure at a single point to the seatcushion and backrest.

91

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

Rear seats

Seat adjustment

Fig. 79 Unlock bar on rear seat

Fig. 80 Rear seat backrest angle adjustment.

The seats may be moved forwards or back-wards independently. This movement rangecan be 1/3 or 2/3 of the seat. There are vari-ous possible positions.

Adjusting reach

– In the seated position, unlock the lever inthe direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 79.

– Move the seat cushion forwards or back-wards to the desired position.

Adjusting the backrest angle

– Hold the backrest at the top. Pull the loopon the side of the seat ››› Fig. 80 1 in thedirection of the arrow and hold it in this po-sition. Push the backrest to the requiredposition and release the loop.

WARNING

● Adjust the seat only when the vehicle isstationary. Otherwise, your seat could moveunexpectedly while the vehicle is moving.This could increase the risk of an accidentand therefore, injury.

● Do not push the backrests down when theseat is moved to prevent damage to the cen-tre console.

● Ensure that the seat, once moved, is fixedin position.

Note

● In order to maintain the maximum luggagecompartment space, put the backrests in po-sition normal, without moving.

● In order to maintain the maximum spacewithout putting the backrests down, movethe seats forward to the desired position.

Folding and lifting the seat backrest

Fig. 81 Folding the rear seat backrests down.

Fig. 82 Lifting the rear seat backrests.

Folding the backrest forwards

– Pull the loop on the side of the seat››› Fig. 81 1 .

In this position the backrest is locked.

92

Transport and practical equipment

Converting the table to a seat

– Pull the loop on the side of the seat››› Fig. 82 2 in the direction of the arrowand lift the seat backrest until it is in place.

When folding and lifting the backrest, makesure to place the side seat belts in the trimclip ››› Fig. 81 to prevent them from beingdamaged by becoming trapped in the back-rest lock.

WARNING

● You should check that the backrest has en-gaged properly in position after the loop isreleased.

● For safety reasons the locking system loopson the seats may not be used to secure anyitems.

● After locking the seat backrest into positionensure that the seat belts protrude from theseat.

Transport and practicalequipment

Compartments

Storage compartment on the frontpassenger side

Fig. 83 Passenger side: storage compartment

The compartment can be opened by pullingthe lever ››› Fig. 83.

WARNING

Always keep the storage compartment coverclosed while the vehicle is in motion in orderto reduce the risk of injury caused by a sud-den braking or by an accident.

Front centre armrest with storagecompartment

Fig. 84 Front armrest with storage compart-ment.

There is a storage compartment in the arm-rest.

– To open the storage compartment, lift thearmrest up in the direction of the arrow››› Fig. 84 and then lift the cover.

– To access the CD changer* or the lowerstorage compartment, pull on the armrestcover without pressing on the button.

– To close the storage compartment, pushthe armrest down.

WARNING

Always keep the storage compartment closedwhile the vehicle is in motion to reduce the »

93

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

risk of injury from the armrest during a sud-den braking manoeuvre or in the event of anaccident.

Note

The CD changer is located in this compart-ment.

Storage compartment under the frontseats*

Fig. 85 Storage compartment under the frontseats.

There is a storage compartment with a coverunder each front seat.

The drawer* ››› Fig. 85 is opened by pushingthe button and moving the cover back.

There are two open positions of 15 and 60degrees depending on the pressure appliedto the cover. In the 60 degree position, the

cover will collapse if too much pressure is ap-plied.

To close the drawer, press the cover until itlocks into position.

WARNING

● The drawers will hold a maximum weight of1.5 kg.

● Do not drive with the drawer cover open.There is an injury risk for passengers if thecargo is released in case of sudden braking oran accident.

Folding table*

Fig. 86 Folding tray on the front left seat.

Folding trays are fitted to the rear of the frontseat backrests.

– To open the tray, open it up in the directionof the arrow ››› Fig. 86.

WARNING

● The folding trays may not be folded downwhilst the vehicle is in motion and anyone isseated on the second row of seats. There is arisk of injury during a sudden braking ma-noeuvre! The tray must therefore be closedand properly secured whilst the vehicle is inmotion.

● Do not put hot drinks in the drink holders.During normal or sudden driving manoeuvres,sudden braking or an accident, the hot drinkcould be spilled. Danger of scalding.

CAUTION

When driving, do not leave open cans in thecup holders. The drink might be spilt on brak-ing, for example, and could damage the vehi-cle.

Roof storage compartment*

Fig. 87 Roof storage compartments.94


There are four storage compartments in theroof.

– Press the button on the cover to open thesecompartments ››› Fig. 87. The cover willthen open.

– To close the cover, press it up until it en-gages.

WARNING

Always keep the storage compartment coverclosed while the vehicle is in motion to re-duce the risk of injury during a sudden brak-ing manoeuvre or in the event of an accidentand to prevent any items from being thrownthrough the vehicle interior.

Front drinks holders

Fig. 88 Front drink holders.

In the centre console, in front of the gear lev-er, there are two drink holders ››› Fig. 88.

WARNING

● Never place hot drinks in the drink holders.During sudden or normal driving manoeuvres,when braking suddenly or in case of an acci-dent, the hot drink could spill. Risk of scald-ing.

● Never use rigid cup materials (for example,glass or ceramic), since they could cause in-jury in the case of an accident.

Rear cup holder*/armrests*

Fig. 89 Opening the rear cup holder.

Fig. 90 Rear cup holder in the armrest.

Opening and closing the armrest*/drinkholder*

– To open, pull the loop in the direction ofthe arrow ››› Fig. 89 1 .

– To close, lift the cup holder*/armrest* inthe direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 90 2 .

WARNING

Ensure that the load in the luggage compart-ment is correctly secured with the net* whentravelling with the armrest down››› page 104.

Other storage compartments

Other storage compartments can be found:

● in the centre console,

● in the door trims (front and rear), »

95

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

● in the side trims of the luggage compart-ment,

● in the spare wheel recess in the luggagecompartment (only on vehicles with an op-tional anti-puncture kit*.

The clothes hooks are located on the rearroof handles.

WARNING

● Do not store loose objects on the dash pan-el. These objects could be flung through thepassenger compartment when the vehicle ismoving (e.g. while accelerating, braking orcornering) and distract the driver.

● Ensure that no objects can fall from thecentre console or other storage compart-ments into the driver footwell while the vehi-cle is moving. In the event of a sudden brak-ing manoeuvre, you will not be able to usethe brake, clutch or accelerator. Risk of acci-dent.

● Clothing hung on the coat hooks must notrestrict the driver's view. Risk of accident.The coat hooks are intended only for use withlight articles of clothing. Do not leave anyhard, sharp or heavy objects in hanging arti-cles of clothing. During sudden braking ma-noeuvres or accidents, especially those in-volving airbag deployment, these objectscould injure the vehicle occupants.

Multi-purpose mobile storagecompartment*

General information

Fig. 91 Mobile storage compartment. Open-ing.

Fig. 92 Mobile storage compartment. Func-tions.

This storage compartment may only beplaced in the central area of the rear seat.

Opening

– Lift the cover B , in area A ››› Fig. 91.

Closing

– Push the cover down, until it clips intoplace.

Uses of the mobile storage compartment

● The front open glove compartment may beused to store small objects that will not dam-age passengers in the event that the objectsare flung around the interior of the vehicle.

● The cup holders are used for holding drinkcans or cups.

● The elastic belt on the side may be used forkeeping papers and magazines.

● The tables may be used as a support forwriting.

To use the table C ››› Fig. 92, it must be re-moved from its compartment in the side ofthe mobile storage compartment and fittedinto slot D ››› Fig. 92 on the front section ofthe mobile storage compartment.

The table in the right-hand compartment isfitted into the left-hand slot of the front of themobile storage compartment and the table inthe left-hand compartment is fitted in theright-hand slot.

96


The tables have two positions for use andcannot be interchanged.

WARNING

● The mobile stowage compartment supportsa maximum load of 5 kg. Do not overload.

● Do not drive when the cover of the mobilestorage compartment is open.

● Do not drive when the tables are set up foruse.

● When the vehicle is moving and when thetables are not in use, keep them stored insidethe mobile storage compartment with thecover closed.

● Never place hot drinks in the cup holders.The drink may spill and cause burns when thevehicle is moving.

● Do not leave cans in the cup holders whenthe vehicle is in motion, there is a dangerthat the can may be flung around the vehicleand cause injury.

● Make sure that the mounting plate is prop-erly fixed onto the cushion frame.

● When the plate is not in use, store insidethe storage compartment.

● When the mobile storage compartment isnot in use, it should always be properly fas-tened using the storage net in the boot.

Note

● Check that the mobile storage compart-ment is fitted correctly, pulling it forward by

the front storage compartment and checkingthat both safety clips are securely fastened toboth rings.

Mounting and removal

Fig. 93 Mobile storage compartment. Mount-ing.

Fig. 94 Mobile storage compartment mount-ing plate.

Mounting the mobile storage compartment

– Fold down the small section of the rear seatbackrest in order to access the back of thelarge backrest.

– Fit the mobile storage compartment mount-ing plate H ››› Fig. 94 from the inside ofthe vehicle, through the rear part of theseat. It should be fitted between the back-rest and the seat, in the central seat area.

– Push the plate until it clips the cushionframe. The rings of the mobile storage com-partment mounting plate appear at thefront of the seat.

– If it is difficult to make the plate clip, tilt therear backrest of the large section forwardsslightly and then lean the backrest back-wards to make the fitting of the mobilestorage compartment onto the mountingplate easier.

– Place the mobile storage compartment on-to the foam of the central seat.

– Set both mounting pieces together E

››› Fig. 93, with both mounting rings G

››› Fig. 94 and press hard until both theclips completely connect with the rings.

Removing the mobile storage compartment

– Pull each of the buttons ››› Fig. 93 F onthe clips (red buttons) forwards, until theysnap out of place. »

97

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

– Fold the larger seat down and remove themobile storage compartment mountingplate.

Ashtray*, cigarette lighter* andpower sockets

Front ashtray*

Fig. 95 Ashtray located in the front cup hold-er.

Opening and closing the ashtray

– To open the ashtray, lift the cover ››› Fig. 95.

– To close, push the cover down.

Emptying the ashtray

– Extract the ashtray and empty it.

WARNING

Never put paper in the ashtray. Hot ash couldignite the paper in the ashtray and cause afire.

Cigarette lighter*

Fig. 96 The cigarette lighter is located in thepower socket of the front centre console.

– Press on the cigarette lighter ››› Fig. 96 toactivate it ››› .

– Wait for the lighter to spring out.

– Pull out the cigarette lighter and light thecigarette on the glowing coil.

WARNING

● Improper use of the cigarette lighter canlead to serious injuries or start a fire.

● Using the lighter carefully. Carelessness ornegligence when using the cigarette lightercan cause burns and serious injuries.

● The lighter only works when the ignition isturned on or the engine is running. To avoidthe risk of fire, never leave children alone in-side the vehicle.

98


Power sockets

Fig. 97 Power socket, front centre console.

Fig. 98 Altea XL/Freetrack model: powersocket in boot.

Electrical accessories may be connected tothe 12 volt power socket in the front centreconsole ››› Fig. 97 and in the luggage com-partment*. The appliances connected to eachpower point must not exceed a power ratingof 120 Watt.

WARNING

The power sockets and the connected acces-sories will only operate when the ignition ison or when the engine is running. Improperuse of the sockets or electrical accessoriescan lead to serious injuries or cause a fire. Toavoid the risk of injury, never leave childrenalone inside the vehicle.

Note

● The use of electrical appliances with theengine switched off will cause a battery dis-charge.

● Before using any electrical accessories, seethe instructions in ››› page 147.

Auxiliary audio input (AUX-IN)*

Fig. 99 Auxiliary audio connection.

– Lift the AUX cover ››› Fig. 99.

– Insert the plug as far as possible (see Ra-dio manual).

AUX RSE connection*

Fig. 100 AUX RSE connection.

This connector may be used as an audio in-put (red and white connectors) or audio andvideo connector (red, white and yellow con-nectors). For more details about the use ofthis audio and video source, see the RSEmanual.

99

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

MEDIA-IN* connector

Fig. 101 Connection in central armrest com-partment.

For information concerning the use of thisequipment, please see the Radio handbook.

First-aid kit, warning triangle,fire extinguisher

Warning triangle* and first-aid kit*

Fig. 102 Altea: warning triangle storage un-der the rear shelf.

The warning triangle* can be stowed underthe rear shelf in a storage compartment››› Fig. 102 or in the storage compartment lo-cated on the boot floor, under the carpet, de-pending on the version.

The first aid kit can be stowed in the storagecompartment under the carpet on the bootfloor, or in the storage compartment in theboot side lining, depending on the version.

Note

● The warning triangle and the first aid kit donot belong to the standard vehicle equip-ment.

● The first aid kit must comply with legal re-quirements.

● Observe the expiry date of the contents ofthe first aid kit. After it has expired youshould purchase a new one.

● Before purchasing accessories and spareparts, see the instructions in ››› page 147.

Fire extinguisher*

The fire extinguisher* can be attached to theluggage compartment carpet with Velcro.

Note

● The fire extinguisher does not belong tothe standard vehicle equipment.

● The fire extinguisher must comply with le-gal requirements.

● Make sure the fire extinguisher works.They should therefore be checked. The stick-er on the fire extinguisher will inform you ofthe next date for checking.

● Before purchasing accessories and spareparts, see the instructions in ››› page 147.

100


Luggage compartment

Loading the luggage compartment

All luggage and other loose objects must besafely secured in the luggage compartment.Unsecured objects which shift back and forthcould impair the driving safety or drivingcharacteristics of the vehicle by shifting thecentre of gravity.

– Distribute the load evenly in the luggagecompartment.

– Place heavy objects as far forward as possi-ble in the luggage compartment.

– Place the heavy objects first.

– Secure heavy objects to the fitted fasteningrings ››› page 103.

WARNING

● Loose luggage and other objects in the lug-gage compartment could cause serious inju-ries.

● Always stow objects in the luggage com-partment and secure them on the fasteningrings.

● Use suitable straps to secure heavy ob-jects.

● During sudden manoeuvres or accidents,loose objects can be thrown forward, injuringvehicle occupants or passers-by. This in-creased risk of injury will be further increased

if a loose object is struck by an inflating air-bag. If this happens, objects can be trans-formed into “missiles”. Risk of fatal injury.

● Please note that the centre of gravity mayshift when transporting heavy objects; thismay affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac-cident. Therefore, it is essential to adjustyour speed and driving style accordingly, toavoid accidents.

● Never exceed the allowed axle weights orallowed maximum weight. If said weights areexceeded, the driving characteristics of thevehicle may change, leading to accidents, in-juries and damage to the vehicle.

● Never leave your vehicle unattended, espe-cially when the rear lid is open. Childrencould climb into the luggage compartment,closing the door behind them; they will betrapped and run the risk of death.

● Never allow children to play in or aroundthe vehicle. Close and lock all the doors andrear lid when you leave the vehicle. Beforeyou lock the vehicle, make sure that there areno adults or children in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Hard objects on the boot cover could chafeagainst the wires of the heating element inthe rear window and cause damage.

Note

● Air circulation in the vehicle helps reducefogging of the windows. Used air escapes

through ventilation slits in the side trim ofthe luggage compartment. Ensure that theseventilation slits are never covered.

● Straps for securing the load to the fasten-ing rings are commercially available.

Rear shelf3 Applies to the model: ALTEA

Fig. 103 Rear shelf.

Fig. 104 Removing the storage compartment. »101

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

Removing the shelf

– Unhook the loops ››› Fig. 103 B fromhousings A .

– Extract the shelf from its slot, in its rest po-sition and pull outwards. The storage com-partment should remain closed.

To remove the storage compartment

– Pull outwards until the compartment isfreed from the pivot point ››› Fig. 104.

WARNING

Do not place heavy or hard objects on therear shelf, because they will endanger the ve-hicle occupants in case of sudden braking.

CAUTION

● Before closing the rear lid, ensure that therear shelf is correctly fitted.

● An overloaded luggage compartment couldmean that the rear shelf is not correctly seat-ed and it may be bent or damaged.

● If the luggage compartment is overloaded,remove the tray.

Note

● Ensure that, when placing items of clothingon the luggage compartment cover, rear visi-bility is not reduced.

● If the vehicle is fitted with a storage com-partment*, it should only be used to store theemergency triangles* and light objects.

Retractable rear shelf3 Applies to the model: ALTEA XL/ALTEA FREETRACK

Fig. 105 Operating the storage compartmentshelf.

Fig. 106 Removing the storage compartmentshelf.

Using the rear shelf

– Use the handle A to pull the shelf backuntil you hear a “click” ››› Fig. 105.

– Press the area marked “PRESS”, and thecover is retrieved automatically.

To remove the rear shelf

– Press the side pin in the direction of the ar-row, lift the cover and remove it ››› Fig. 106.

– Installation is done in the reverse order.

WARNING

Do not place heavy or hard objects on therear shelf, because they will endanger the ve-hicle occupants in case of sudden braking.

CAUTION

● Before closing the rear lid, ensure that therear shelf is correctly fitted.

● An overloaded luggage compartment couldmean that the rear shelf is not correctly seat-ed and it may be bent or damaged.

● If the luggage compartment is overloaded,remove the tray.

Note

● Ensure that, when placing items of clothingon the luggage compartment cover, rear visi-bility is not reduced.

102


Fastening rings*

There can be four fastening rings in the lug-gage compartment for fastening luggage andother objects.

– Always use suitable and undamaged strapsto secure luggage and other objects to thefastening rings ››› in Loading the lug-gage compartment on page 101.

– Pull up the fastening rings to attach thestraps.

During a collision or an accident, even smalland light objects can build up so much ener-gy that they can cause very severe injuries.The amount of “energy” depends on thespeed of the vehicle and the weight of theobject. The most significant factor, however,is the speed of the vehicle.

Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lyingunsecured in the vehicle. During a frontal col-lision at a speed of 50 km/h (30 mph), thisobject generates a force corresponding to 20times its weight. This means that the effec-tive weight of the object increases to about90 kg. Imagine the injuries that may resultfrom said “object” if it hits any passengerwhen flying through the passenger compart-ment. This increased risk of injury will be fur-ther increased if a loose object is struck byan inflating airbag.

WARNING

● If pieces of baggage or other objects are se-cured to the fastening rings with inappropri-ate or damaged retaining cords, injuriescould result in the event of braking manoeu-vres or accidents.

● Never secure a child seat on the fasteningrings.

Cargo separation net*3 Applies to the model: ALTEA XL/ALTEA FREETRACK

Fig. 107 Separation net.

Fig. 108 Fastening rings for the separationnet.

The separation net prevents loose objects inthe boot from being thrown forward into thepassenger compartment (e.g. when brakingsuddenly).

– Pull the net from underneath between thebackrest and the folding tray and fit it tothe slots in the roof, first the right then theleft ››› Fig. 107.

– Hook the belts into the front fasteningrings to tense the net ››› Fig. 108.

103

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

Storage in the boot floor*

Fig. 109 Variable storage in the boot floor.

Fig. 110 Boot floor partition.

There is a variable storage compartment* inthe boot floor.

– Lift the boot floor and fold it back all theway ››› Fig. 109.

– Fit the separator A ››› Fig. 110, into theside grooves depending on the size of theobjects to be transported. The on-board

tool kit and the spare wheel are located un-derneath the luggage compartment.

– Secure objects in the luggage compart-ment with suitable straps on the fasteningrings.

Note

● The maximum weight capacity of the varia-ble boot floor is 100 kg distributed evenlyover the whole floor.

Luggage compartment net*

Fig. 111 Boot storage net.

There is a storage net in the luggage com-partment for securing objects.

– Use the fastening rings located on the sideof the boot to attach the retaining net››› Fig. 111.

Note

● Do not exceed the maximum authorisedweight for the vehicle ››› page 207.

Roof carrier/rack system*

Introduction

Please observe the following points if you in-tend to carry loads on the roof:

● For safety reasons, only luggage racks andaccessories supplied by SEAT official servicesare recommended.

● It is essential that you strictly follow the as-sembly instructions included with the bars,being especially careful to position the bootcover bars on the special housings; you mustalso respect their position according to thedirection of travel indicated in the assemblymanual. Not following these instructions maycause marks on the bodywork and the longi-tudinal bars.

● Pay special attention to the tightening tor-que of the attachment bolts and check themfollowing a short journey. If necessary, re-tighten the bolts and check them at regularintervals.

● Distribute the load evenly. A maximum loadof 40 kg is permitted for each roof rack sys-tem support bar, the load must be

104


distributed evenly along the entire length.However, the maximum load permitted forthe entire roof (including the support system)of 75 kg must not be exceeded nor the totalweight recommended for the entire vehicle.See the “Technical Data” ››› page 207 sec-tion.

● When transporting heavy or large objectson the roof, any change in the normal vehiclebehaviour due to a change in the centre ofgravity or an increased wind resistance mustbe taken into account. For this reason, a suit-able speed and driving style must be used.

● On vehicles fitted with a sliding/tilting sun-roof*, make sure it does not hit the load onthe roof upon opening.

Attachment points

Fig. 112 Altea model: securing points for theroof carrier.

Fig. 113 Altea XL/Altea Freetrack model: se-curing points for the roof carrier.

Install and remove following the instructionsgiven.

Securing the base supports and roof carriersystem (Altea)

Location of the basic roof carrier attachmentpoints ››› Fig. 112.

● A: marks for securing on the rear section.

● B: hole for securing on the front section.

Securing the base supports and roof carriersystem (Altea XL/Altea Freetrack)

Always secure the base supports and roofcarrier system correctly.

The roof carrier system must always be instal-led exactly according to the instructions pro-vided. »

105

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

The position holes are located on the innerside of the rail ››› Fig. 113.

CAUTION

Follow the instructions given in the manual.

106

Air conditioning

Air conditioning

Heating

Operating instructions

Fig. 114 Heating controls on the dash panel.

– Use the knobs ››› Fig. 114 1 and 4 andcontrol 5 to set the temperature, air distri-bution and blower speed.

– To switch a function on or off, press the ap-propriate button 2 or 3 . When the func-tion is activated, the display window in thelower left of the button is lit.

Temperature

With the regulator 1 the heating level is de-termined. The desired temperature inside thevehicle cannot be lower than the ambienttemperature. Maximum heat output, which is

needed to defrost the windows quickly, is on-ly available when the engine has reached itsoperating temperature.

Heated rear window

This function 2 will be switched off automat-ically approximately 20 minutes after beingswitched on. It can also be switched off soon-er by pushing the button.

Air recirculation mode

Air recirculation mode 3 prevents strongodours in the outside air from entering thevehicle interior, for example when passingthrough a tunnel or in queuing traffic ››› .

With low outside temperatures, the air recir-culation increases the effectiveness of theheating system by heating the air inside thevehicle rather than the air from outside. »

107

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

Air distribution

Control 4 for setting the flow of air in the re-quired direction.

Air distribution towards the windscreen.If the windscreen air output is on and airrecirculation mode is pressed, it is acti-vated. When the recirculation mode ison, if the air distribution towards thewindscreen mode is selected, the recir-culation mode is deactivated. For safetyreasons, the air recirculation modeshould not be connected.

Air distribution to the upper body

Air distribution towards the footwell

Air distribution towards the windscreenand the footwell

Blower

The air flow can be set at four speeds withthe control 5 . The air flow should always beset at the lowest speed when driving slowly.

WARNING

● For road safety all windows must be clear ofice, snow, and condensation. This is essentialto ensure good visibility. Please familiariseyourself with the correct operation of theheating and ventilation system, including theanti-fog/defrost functions for the wind-screens.

● In air recirculation mode, no cold air fromthe outside enters the vehicle interior. Thewindows can quickly fog over if the heating isswitched off. Therefore, never leave the air re-circulation mode switched on for a long time(risk of accident).

Note

Please observe the general notes››› page 116.

108

Air conditioning

Climatic*

Controls

Fig. 115 On the dash panel: Climate controls.

The Climatic or semi-automatic air condition-ing system only works when the engine isrunning and the blower is switched on.

– Use the knobs ››› Fig. 115 1 and 5 andcontrol 6 to set the temperature, air distri-bution and blower speed.

– To switch a function on or off, press the ap-propriate button 2 , 3 or 4 . When thefunction is activated, the display window inthe lower corner of the button is lit.

Temperature selector ››› page 110

A/C button – Cooling system on/off››› page 110

1

2

button – Heated rear window Theheating will be switched off automaticallyapproximately 20 minutes after switchingon. It can also be switched off before-hand by pushing the button.

Button – Air recirculation mode››› page 111

Air distribution control ››› page 110

Blower switch. There are four speed set-tings for the air flow. The air flow shouldalways be set at the lowest speed whendriving slowly.

3

4

5

6

WARNING

For road safety all windows must be clear ofice, snow, and condensation. This is essentialto ensure good visibility. Please familiariseyourself with the correct operation of theheating and ventilation system, including theanti-fog/defrost functions for the wind-screens.

Note

Please observe the general notes››› page 116.

109

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

Heating and cooling the interior

Fig. 116 On the dash panel: Climate controls.

Interior heating

– Turn the temperature selector ››› Fig. 1161 clockwise to select the desired tempera-

ture.

– Turn the blower switch to one of the set-tings 1-4.

– Set the air distribution control to the airflow configuration desired: (towards thewindscreen), (towards the chest), (towards the footwell) and (towards thewindscreen and footwell areas).

Interior cooling

– Switch on the air conditioner using the but-ton ››› Fig. 115 A/C .

– Turn the temperature selector anticlockwiseuntil the desired cooling output is reached.

– Turn the blower switch to one of the set-tings 1-4.

– Use the air distribution regulator to guidethe airflow in the required direction (tothe windscreen), (to the upper body), (to the footwell) and (to the wind-

screen and to the footwell).

Heating

Maximum heat output, which is needed todefrost the windows quickly, is only availablewhen the engine has reached its operatingtemperature.

Air conditioner

When the air conditioning system is switchedon, not only the temperature, but also the airhumidity in the vehicle interior is reduced.This improves comfort for the vehicle occu-pants and prevents misting of the windowswhen the ambient air humidity is high.

If the air conditioning system cannot beswitched on this may be caused by the fol-lowing reasons:

● The engine is not running.

● The blower is switched off.

● The outside temperature is lower than ap-proximately +3 °C (+37 °F).

110

Air conditioning

● The air conditioning system compressorhas been temporarily switched off becausethe engine coolant temperature is too high.

● The air conditioner fuse is faulty.

● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the airconditioner checked by a specialised work-shop.


Air recirculation mode ››› Fig. 116 4 pre-vents strong odours or contaminated air from

the outside from entering the vehicle, for ex-ample when passing through a tunnel or in atraffic jam.

With low temperatures outside, the air recir-culation increases the effectiveness of theheating system by warming the air inside thevehicle rather than the cold air from outside.

With high outside temperatures, the air recir-culation increases the effectiveness of the airconditioning system by cooling the air insidethe vehicle rather than the ambient air.

If the windscreen air output is on and air re-circulation mode is pressed, it is activated.

When the recirculation mode is on, if the airdistribution towards the windscreen mode isselected, the recirculation mode is deactiva-ted. For safety reasons, the air recirculationmode should not be connected.

WARNING

In air recirculation mode, no cold air from theoutside enters the vehicle interior. If the airconditioning system is switched off, the win-dows can quickly mist over. Therefore, neverleave the air recirculation mode switched onfor a long time (risk of accident).

111

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

2C-Climatronic*

Controls

Fig. 117 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic con-trols.

The air conditioner controls the temperaturewhen the engine is running and the blower isswitched on.

– Turn the temperature control knobs››› Fig. 117 to adjust the temperature on theleft-hand or right-hand side respectively.

– The functions will be switched on when itsbuttons are pressed. When these functionsare activated, they are indicated on the ra-dio display. In addition, all these functionsare lit with LEDs. Press the button again toswitch off the function.

The temperature can be adjusted separatelyfor the left and right sides of the vehicle inte-rior.

Button – defrost function for the wind-screen. The air drawn in from outside thevehicle is directed at the windscreen. Theair recirculation mode, if switched on, willbe switched off as soon as the defrostfunction is switched on. At temperaturesover +3 °C (+37 °F), the cooling systemwill be switched on automatically in orderto dehumidify the air. The button is lit in

1

yellow and the symbol appears on the ra-dio or navigator display.

button – Upward air distribution

button – Central air distribution

button – Downward air distribution

button – Manual air recirculationmode

button – Heated rear window Theheating will be switched off automaticallyapproximately 20 minutes after switchingon. However, it may be turned off bypushing the button. The button lights up

2

3

4

5

6

112

Air conditioning

yellow and the symbol appears in the dis-play.

AUTO button – Automatic temperature,ventilation and air distribution control››› page 113

SYNC button – Dual zone synchroniser

OFF button – Switches the 2C-Climatronicon and off ››› page 114

Blower control ››› page 114

A/C button – To switch on the coolingsystem

WARNING

For road safety all windows must be clear ofice, snow, and condensation. This is essentialto ensure good visibility. Please familiariseyourself with the correct operation of theheating and ventilation system, including theanti-fog/defrost functions for the wind-screens.

7

8

9

10

11

Viewing Climatronic information

Fig. 118 Navigation display with informationabout Climatronic.

Fig. 119 Radio display with information aboutClimatronic.

Information about the Climatronic system canbe displayed on the radio or radio and navi-gation screen mounted at factory.

The LEDs on the Climatronic controls indicatethat the selected function has been activa-ted.

In addition, the radio or radio and navigationdisplays mounted at factory briefly displaythe current Climatronic settings if any ofthem have been modified.

The symbols used on the radio or radio andnavigation displays are the same as the sym-bols used for the Climatronic controls.

Automatic mode

In automatic mode air temperature, air flowand distribution are automatically regulatedso that a specified temperature is attained asquickly as possible and then maintained.

The temperature can be adjusted separatelyfor the left and right sides of the vehicle inte-rior.

Switching on automatic mode

– Press the AUTO ››› Fig. 117 button. “AUTOHigh” is shown on the radio display (highfan speed).

– Press the AUTO button again ››› Fig. 117.“AUTO Low” is shown on the radio display(low fan speed).

Depending upon the version and finish, thevehicle may include: »

113

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

A pleasant temperature is quickly reached inautomatic mode at a temperature of +22 °C(+72 °F). Therefore, we recommend you notto change this adjustment, except as neces-sary to suit individual preferences or particu-lar circumstances. It is possible to select inte-rior temperatures from +18 °C (+64 °F) to+26 °C (+80 °F). These are approximate tem-peratures and the actual temperature may beslightly higher or lower depending on out-side ambient conditions.

Climatronic maintains a constant tempera-ture. The temperature of the air supplied to

the interior, the blower speed and the air dis-tribution are regulated automatically. Thesystem also considers the sunlight radiation,so there is no need for manual readjustment.Therefore, automatic mode almost alwaysprovides the best comfort for the vehicle oc-cupants throughout the year.

Automatic mode is switched off whenever anadjustment is made using the buttons for theair distribution, fan or or the air recircula-tion button . The temperature will continueto be regulated within the parameters man-ually selected by the user.

Note

There are two automatic modes:

● Automatic mode LO: this calculates the airflow for two people.

● Automatic mode HI: this calculates the airflow for more than two people.

Manual mode

Fig. 120 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic con-trols.

114

Air conditioning

In manual mode you can adjust the air tem-perature, air flow and distribution as re-quired.

Switching on manual mode

– To enter manual mode, press one of thebuttons ››› Fig. 120 1 to 5 or press theair flow control 10 . The selected function isshown on the radio or navigator display.

Temperature

There are separate temperature selectors forthe left and right sides of the vehicle interior.The selected temperature is displayed abovethe selector. It is possible to select interiortemperatures from +18 °C (+64 °F) to +26 °C(+80 °F). These are approximate tempera-tures and the actual temperature may beslightly higher or lower depending on theoutside ambient conditions.

If you select temperatures below +18 °C(+64 °F), the indication: LO will appear on thescreen. In this setting the system runs atmaximum cooling output and the tempera-ture is not regulated.

If a temperature above +26 °C (+80 °F) is se-lected, the screen will show HI. In this settingthe system runs at maximum heating outputand the temperature is not regulated.

Blower

The fan may be adjusted freely using the con-trols 10 . Always have the blower running at alow setting to ensure a constant flow of freshair into the vehicle. Pushing the button tothe minimum -1, turns the Climatronic off.

Air distribution

The air distribution is adjusted using the but-tons , and . It is also possible toopen and close some of the air vents sepa-rately.

Switching the air conditioning on and off

When the A/C button is on (LED lit), the airconditioning system is on.

When the A/C button is off (LED off), the airconditioning system is off.

When the A/C button is off, the air condition-ing system is switched off to save fuel. Thetemperature continues to self-regulate. Theset temperature can only be reached if it ishigher than the outside temperature.

Driver and passenger temperature control

The SYNC button controls the synchronisa-tion of the 2 Climatronic climate zones.

When the SYNC button is off (LED off), the Cli-matronic climate zone is personalised. Forexample: driver side temperature +22 °C

(+72 °F) and passenger side temperature +24℃ (+23.89 ℃).

When the SYNC button is on (LED lit), the Cli-matronic climate zone is synchronised. Forexample: driver side temperature +22 °C(+72 °F) and passenger side temperature +22℃ (+22.22 ℃).

If the SYNC button is on and the passengerside temperature is changed, the function isautomatically deactivated.


– Press the button ››› Fig. 120 5 toswitch air recirculation mode on or off. It isswitched on if the following symbol ap-pears in the display .

Air recirculation mode prevents strongodours or contaminated air from the outsidefrom entering in the vehicle, for examplewhen passing through a tunnel or in a trafficjam.

With low outside temperatures, the air recir-culation increases the effectiveness of theheating system by heating the air inside thevehicle rather than the air from outside.

With high outside temperatures, the air recir-culation increases the effectiveness of the airconditioning system by cooling the air insidethe vehicle rather than the ambient air. »

115

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

If the windscreen air output is on and air re-circulation mode is pressed, this remains ac-tive. When the recirculation mode is on, if theair distribution towards the windscreen modeis selected, the recirculation mode is deacti-vated. For safety reasons, the air recirculationmode should not be connected.

WARNING

In air recirculation mode, no cold air from theoutside enters the vehicle interior. If the airconditioning system is switched off, the win-dows can quickly mist over. Therefore, neverleave the air recirculation mode switched onfor a long time (risk of accident).

General notes

Pollution filter

The pollution filter (a combined particulatefilter and active carbon filter) serves as a bar-rier against impurities in the outside air, in-cluding dust and pollen.

For the climate control system to work withmaximum efficiency, the pollution filter mustbe replaced at the specified intervals in theMaintenance Programme.

If the filter loses efficiency prematurely dueto use in areas reaching very high pollutionlevels, the pollen filter must be changedmore frequently than stated in the ServiceSchedule.

Air conditioner

When the air conditioning system is switchedon, not only the temperature, but also the airhumidity in the vehicle interior is reduced.This improves comfort for the vehicle occu-pants and prevents misting of the windowswhen the ambient air humidity is high.

If the air conditioning system cannot beswitched on this may be caused by the fol-lowing reasons:

● The engine is not running.

● The A/C button is switched off.

● The outside temperature is lower than ap-proximately +3 °C (+37 °F).

● The air conditioning system compressorhas been temporarily switched off becausethe engine coolant temperature is too high.

● The air conditioner fuse is faulty.

● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the airconditioner checked by a specialised work-shop.

CAUTION

● If you suspect that the air conditioner isdamaged, switch it off with the A/C button toprevent further damage and have it checkedby a specialised workshop.

● Repairs to the air conditioner require spe-cialist knowledge and special tools. There-fore, we recommend you to take the vehicleto a specialised workshop.

Note

● If the humidity and temperature outside thevehicle are high, condensation can drip offthe evaporator in the cooling system andform a pool underneath the vehicle. This isnormal and does not indicate a leak.

● Keep the air intake slots in front of thewindscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to en-sure heating and cooling are not impaired,and to prevent the windows from mistingover.

● The air from the vents flows through the ve-hicle interior and is extracted by slots de-signed for this purpose. Therefore, do notcover these slots with items of clothing orother objects.

● The air conditioner operates most effective-ly with the windows and the sliding/tiltingsunroof* closed. However, if the temperatureinside the vehicle is excessive because of thesun, the air inside can be cooled faster byopening the windows for a short time.

● Do not smoke while air recirculation modeis on, as smoke drawn into the air condition-ing system leaves residue on the evaporator,producing a permanent unpleasant odour.

● It is advisable to turn on the air condition-ing at least once a month, to lubricate thesystem gaskets and prevent leaks. If a de-crease in the cooling capacity is detected, aTechnical Service should be consulted tocheck the system.

116

Driving

Driving

Power steering (servotronic*)

Power steering assists the driver by reducingthe force needed to turn the steering wheel.In cars equipped with servotronic* powersteering the degree of power assistance isregulated electronically according to roadspeed.

The power steering will keep on working evenif the servotronic* device fails. The degree ofpower assistance will, however, no longeradapt to different speeds. If the electronicregulating system is not working properly,this is most noticeable when turning thesteering wheel at low speeds (for instancewhen parking), as more effort will be requiredthan usual. The fault should be corrected bya specialised workshop as soon as possible.

Power steering does not work if the engine isoff. In this case the steering wheel requiresmuch more force to turn.

Turning the steering to its limit when the ve-hicle is stationary will place an excessiveload on the power steering system. Turningthe steering wheel to its limit places a loadon the system, which causes noise. It will al-so reduce the idling speed of the engine.

CAUTION

When the engine is running, do not turn thesteering wheel to its limit for more than 15seconds. Otherwise, there is a risk of damag-ing the power steering.

Note

● If the power steering should fail at any timeor the engine is switched off (for instancewhen being towed), the vehicle can still besteered. However, more effort will be requiredto turn the steering wheel.

● If the system is leaking or malfunctioning,please take the car to a specialised workshopimmediately.

● The power steering system requires a spe-cial hydraulic fluid. The container is locatedin the engine compartment (front left). Thecorrect fluid level in the reservoir is impor-tant for the power steering to function prop-erly. The hydraulic fluid level is checked atthe Inspection Service.

All-wheel drive*

On all-wheel drive models, the engine poweris distributed to all four wheels

General notes

The all-wheel drive system operates com-pletely automatically. The propulsion force isdistributed among the four wheels and adap-

ted to the driving style and the road condi-tions.

The all-wheel drive is specially designed tocomplement the superior engine power. Thiscombination gives the vehicle exceptionalhandling and performance capabilities, bothon normal roads and in more difficult condi-tions, such as snow and ice.

Winter tyres

Thanks to its all-wheel drive, your vehicle willhave plenty of traction in winter conditions,even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless,we still recommend that winter tyres or all-season tyres should be fitted on all fourwheels when winter road conditions are ex-pected, mainly because this will give a betterbraking response.

Snow chains

On roads where snow chains are mandatory,this also applies to cars with all-wheel drive.

Changing tyres

On vehicles with all-wheel drive, all four tyresmust have the same rolling circumference››› page 179.

WARNING

● Even with all-wheel drive, you should al-ways adjust your speed to suit the condi-tions. Do not let the extra safety features »

117

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

tempt you into taking any risks when driving.Failure to follow this instruction could resultin an accident.

● The braking capability of your vehicle islimited by the tyres' grip. Vehicle behaviouris no different from a vehicle without four-wheel drive. So do not be tempted to drivetoo fast on icy or slippery roads just becausethe vehicle still has good acceleration inthese conditions. Failure to do so could resultin an accident.

● On wet roads bear in mind that the frontwheels may lose contact with the road andstart to float (aquaplaning) if the vehicle isdriven too fast. If this should happen, therewill be no sudden increase in engine speedwhen aquaplaning begins to warn the driver,as with a front-wheel drive vehicle. For thisreason and for that mentioned above, alwayschoose a driving speed suitable for the roadconditions. Failure to follow this instructioncould result in an accident.

Driving with LPG*3 Applies to the model: ALTEA / ALTEA XL

Fig. 121 Centre console: gas system controlswitch.

Your SEAT vehicle has a bivalent engine ableto run on either LPG or petrol. The LPG tank››› page 160, Refuelling with LPG is in thespare wheel well ››› .

Connecting LPG operating mode

● Press the GAS button.

After checking the system, the engine auto-matically switches from petrol to LPG provi-ded the following conditions are met:

● There is enough LPG in the tank.

● The engine coolant has reached the neces-sary temperature for LPG operation.

● The outside temperature is suitable for LPGto work.

● The engine speed is always above 1,200rpm.

● The LPG system check has been completedand the established waiting time has elapsed(this operation may take several minutes).

● No fault was detected during the systemcheck.

The green LPG gauge control lamp willlight up.

Connecting petrol operating mode

● Press the GAS button.

The green control lamp will go out on theLPG level indicator.

Petrol operating mode connects automatical-ly when the engine is started or when any ofthe LPG operating mode conditions are notmet. As soon as the necessary conditions aremet again, the LPG operating mode recon-nects.

LPG system fault

Message in the instru-ment panel display

How to proceed

Error: LPG Visit the work-shop!

Have the system checkedimmediately by a special-ised workshop.

118

Driving

Message in the instru-ment panel display

How to proceed

Gas operating mode cur-rently impossible See themanual!

Check that all conditionsfor LPG operating modehave been met››› page 118. If so, havethe system checked imme-diately by a specialisedworkshop.

Petrol operating mode cur-rently impossible. See themanual!

Have the system checkedimmediately by a special-ised workshop.

LPG quality and consumption

Quality requirements for LPG are regulatedfor all Europe in DIN EN 589 and permit theuse of LPG throughout Europe without anyproblems.

LPG is a mixture of propane and butane.

A difference is drawn between winter gas andsummer gas. Winter gas has a higher propor-tion of propane gas. As a result, the drivingrange of winter gas may be lower (due to in-creased consumption) than that of summergas.

The vehicle's engine management adapts au-tomatically to the LPG used. Therefore, bothtypes of LPG can be mixed in the tank, with-out the need for comprehensive draining be-fore applying a different quality LPG.

LPG and safety

If you smell gas or suspect that there is aleak in the LPG system. ›››

● Stop the vehicle immediately.

● Switch the ignition off.

● Open all the doors to properly ventilate thevehicle.

● Extinguish cigarettes immediately.

● Move away from the vehicle or switch offobjects that may cause sparks or a fire.

● If you continue to smell gas, do not contin-ue driving!

● Seek specialist assistance. Have the faultrepaired.

WARNING

LPG is a highly explosive and inflammablesubstance. It may cause severe burns andother injury.

● Due care must be taken to avoid any risk offire or explosion.

● When parking the vehicle in a closed area(for example in a garage), make sure thatthere is adequate ventilation, either naturalor mechanical, to neutralise the LPG in theevent of a leak.

WARNING

Failure to act when you can smell gas in thevehicle or when refuelling can cause seriousinjuries.

● Carry out the necessary operations.

● Leave the danger zone.

● If necessary, warn the emergency services.

Note

● The LPG system must be subject to regularinspections at a specialised workshop in ac-cordance with the Maintenance Plan.

● The engine is always started with petrol,even when LPG was being used when it wasswitched off. For this reason the tank shouldnever be drained of petrol completely.

● If frequent short journeys are made, espe-cially when the outside temperature is low,the vehicle will tend to run on petrol more of-ten than on LPG. Therefore, the petrol tankmay empty before the LPG tank.

● If while driving the system switches auto-matically to petrol operating mode becausethe LPG tank is almost empty, the next fewtimes the engine starts up, and depending onthe outside temperature and driving style, itmay automatically switch briefly to LPG oper-ating mode to use up what is left in the tank.

● When the system automatically switches topetrol operating mode because the LPG tankis almost empty, you can revert to gas operat-ing mode by pressing the ››› Fig. 121 GAS »

119

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

button while driving slowly and with low ac-celeration. This procedure can be repeatedseveral times while driving carefully until allthe LPG left in the tank has been used up.

● Vehicles that display information or warn-ing messages on the dash panel may showinformation related to LPG operation.

● The notification LPG mode not possible maybe displayed.

Journeys abroad

To drive abroad, the following must be takeninto consideration:

● For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converterensure that unleaded petrol is available forthe journey. See the chapter “Refuelling”. Au-tomobile organisations will have informationabout service station networks selling unlea-ded fuel.

● In some countries, your vehicle model maynot be available, and therefore some spareparts may not available or technical servicescan only carry out limited repairs.

SEAT importers and distributors will gladlyprovide information about the technical prep-aration that your vehicle requires and alsoabout necessary maintenance and repairpossibilities.

Adhesive strips for headlights

If you have to drive a right-hand drive vehiclein a left-hand drive country, or vice versa, theasymmetric dipped beam headlights will daz-zle oncoming traffic.

To prevent dazzling, you must apply stickersto certain parts of the headlight lenses. Fur-ther information is available at any TechnicalService.

In vehicles with adaptive headlights, the ro-tation system must previously be disconnec-ted. To do this, please go to a specialisedworkshop.

Ignition lock

Ignition key positions

Fig. 122 Ignition key positions.

Ignition switched off, steering lock 0

In this position ››› Fig. 122, the ignition andthe engine are OFF and the steering may belocked.

For the Steering lock to operate without theignition key, turn the steering wheel until itlocks with an audible sound. You should al-ways lock the steering wheel when you leaveyour vehicle. This will help prevent vehicletheft ››› .

Switching the ignition or the glow plugsystem on 1

Turn the ignition key to this position and re-lease it. If the key cannot be turned or it isdifficult to turn from position 0 to position

1 , move the steering wheel from one side tothe other to release it.

Starting 2

The engine is started when the key is in thisposition. Electrical devices with high powerconsumption are switched off temporarily atthe same time.

Each time that the vehicle is restarted, the ig-nition key must be turned to position 0 . Therepetitive start prevention lock of the igni-tion prevents possible damage to the startermotor if the engine is already running.

120

Driving

WARNING

● The ignition key must NOT be removed fromthe lock until the vehicle comes to a stand-still. Otherwise, the steering could be imme-diately blocked- Risk of accident!

● Always remove the key from the ignitionwhen leaving the vehicle, even if only for ashort period. This is especially important ifchildren or disabled people are left alone inthe vehicle. They could accidentally start theengine or work electrical equipment such asthe electric windows, resulting in an acci-dent.

● Unsupervised use of the key could start theengine or any electrical system, such as theelectric windows. This could result in seriousinjury.

CAUTION

The starter motor will only work when the en-gine is stopped (ignition key position 2 ).

Electronic immobiliser

The electronic immobiliser prevents unau-thorised persons from driving the vehicle.

Inside the key there is a chip that deactivatesthe electronic immobiliser automaticallywhen the key is inserted into the ignition.

The electronic immobiliser will be activatedagain automatically as soon as you pull thekey out of the ignition lock.

The engine can only be started using a genu-ine SEAT key with its correct code.

Note

A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensuredif genuine SEAT keys are used.

Starting petrol engines


– Move the gearbox lever to the neutral posi-tion and depress the clutch pedal thor-oughly and hold it in this position for thestarter to turn the engine on.

– Turn the ignition key to the starting posi-tion ››› page 120.

– Let go of the ignition key as soon as the en-gine starts; the starter motor must not runon with the engine.

After starting a very hot engine, you mayneed to slightly press down the accelerator.

When starting a cold engine, it may be a littlenoisy for the first few seconds until oil pres-sure has built up in the hydraulic valve com-pensators. This is quite normal, and no causefor concern.

If the engine does not start immediately,switch the starter off after 10 seconds and tryagain after half a minute. If the engine stilldoes not start, the fuel pump fuse should bechecked ››› page 196, Fuses.

WARNING

● Never start or run the engine in unventila-ted or closed rooms. The exhaust gases con-tain carbon monoxide, an odourless and col-ourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal acci-dents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss ofconsciousness and result in death.

● Never leave the vehicle unattended if theengine is running.

● Never use “cold start sprays”, they couldexplode or cause the engine to run at highrevs. Risk of injury.

CAUTION

● When the engine is cold, you should avoidhigh engine speeds, driving at full throttleand over-loading the engine. Risk of enginedamage.

● The vehicle should not be pushed or towedmore than 50 metres to start the engine. Un-burnt fuel could enter the catalytic converterand damage it.

● Before attempting to push-start or tow a ve-hicle in order to start it, you should first try tostart it using the battery of another vehicle.Note and follow the instructions in››› page 189, Jump-starting. »

121

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation


Do not warm-up the engine by running theengine with the vehicle stationary. Start offimmediately, driving gently. This helps theengine reach operating temperature fasterand reduces emissions.

Starting diesel engines


– Move the gearbox lever to the neutral posi-tion and depress the clutch pedal thor-oughly and hold it in this position for thestarter to turn the engine on.

– Turn the ignition key to position ››› Fig. 1221 . The warning lamp will light for en-

gine pre-heating.

– When the lamp turns off, turn the ignitionkey to position 2 to start the engine. Donot press the accelerator.

– Release the ignition key as soon as the en-gine starts. The starter motor should notturn at the same time.

When starting a cold engine, it may be a littlenoisy for the first few seconds until oil pres-sure has built up in the hydraulic valve com-pensators. This is quite normal, and no causefor concern.

If there are problems starting the engine, seethe ››› page 189.

Glow plug system for the diesel engine

To avoid unnecessary discharging of the bat-tery, do not use any other major electricalequipment while the glow plugs are pre-heat-ing.

Start the engine as soon as the glow plugwarning lamp ››› page 41 goes out.

Starting a diesel engine after the fuel tankhas been completely run dry

If the fuel tank has been completely run dry,it may take longer than normal (up to one mi-nute) to start a diesel engine after refuelling.This is because the fuel system must elimi-nate air first.

WARNING

● Never start or run the engine in unventila-ted or closed rooms. The exhaust gases con-tain carbon monoxide, an odourless and col-ourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal acci-dents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss ofconsciousness and result in death.

● Never leave the vehicle unattended if theengine is running.

● Never use “cold start sprays”, they couldexplode or cause the engine to run at highrevs. Risk of injury.

CAUTION

● When the engine is cold, you should avoidhigh engine speeds, driving at full throttleand over-loading the engine. Risk of enginedamage.

● The vehicle should not be pushed or towedmore than 50 metres to start the engine. Un-burnt fuel could enter the catalytic converterand damage it.

● Before attempting to push-start or tow a ve-hicle in order to start it, you should first try tostart it using the battery of another vehicle.Note and follow the instructions in››› page 189, Jump-starting.


Do not warm-up the engine by running theengine with the vehicle stationary. Youshould drive off as soon as you start the en-gine. This helps the engine reach operatingtemperature faster and reduces emissions.

Switching off the engine

– Stop the vehicle.

– Turn the ignition key to position ››› Fig. 1220 .

After switching the engine off, the radiatorfan may run on for up to 10 minutes. The fanmay also turn on again if coolant temperatureincreases from accumulated heat in the

122

Driving

engine compartment or due to its prolongedexposure to solar radiation.

WARNING

● Never switch the engine off until the vehi-cle is completely stationary.

● The brake servo works only when the en-gine is running. With the engine switched off,more strength is needed to brake. As normalbrake operation cannot be performed, risk ofaccidents and serious injury may exist.

● The steering lock can be immediatelyblocked once the key is removed from the ig-nition. The vehicle cannot be steered. Risk ofaccident.

CAUTION

When the engine has been running under aheavy load for a long period, heat can accu-mulate in the engine compartment and causeengine damage. For this reason, idle the en-gine for approximately 2 minutes beforeswitching it off.

Braking and parking

Braking capacity and distance

The following factors impair braking capacity:

New brake pads

New brake pads do not provide optimal per-formance during the first 400 km; first theymust be “run in”. However, the reduced brak-ing capacity may be compensated by press-ing on the brake pedal a little harder. Avoidoverloading the brakes during run-in.

Wear

The rate of wear on the brake pads dependsa great deal on how you drive and the condi-tions in which the vehicle is operated. Nega-tive factors are, for instance, city traffic, fre-quent short trips or hard driving with abruptstarts and stops.

Wet roads or road salt

In certain conditions, such as in heavy rain,or after washing the vehicle or drivingthrough water, the full braking effect can bedelayed by moisture (or in winter by ice) onthe discs and brake pads. In this case thebrakes should be “dried” by pressing thebrake pedal several times.

The effectiveness of the brakes can also betemporarily reduced if the vehicle is drivenfor some distance without using the brakeswhen there is a lot of salt on the road in win-ter. In this case, the layer of salt on the brakediscs and pads has to wear off before brak-ing.

Corrosion

There may be a tendency for corrosion toform on the discs and dirt to build up on thebrake pads if the vehicle is used infrequentlyor the brakes are not used very often.

If the brakes are not used frequently, or ifrust has formed on the disks, it is advisableto clean off the pads and disks by brakingfirmly a few times at a moderately high speed››› .

Faults in the brake system

If the brake pedal travel should ever increasesuddenly, this may mean that one of the twobrake circuits has failed. Drive immediatelyto the nearest specialised workshop andhave the fault repaired. Drive there slowlyand remember that you will have to applymore pressure on the brake pedal and allowfor longer stopping distances.

Low brake fluid level

Malfunctions can occur in the brake system ifthe brake fluid level is too low. The brake flu-id level is monitored electronically.

Brake servo

The brake servo increases the pressure youapply to the brake pedal. It works only whenthe engine is running. »

123

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

WARNING

● Apply the brakes heavily to clean the brakesystem only in a suitable traffic situation. Donot put other road users in danger: there isrisk of causing an accident.

● Ensure the vehicle does not move while inneutral, when the engine is stopped. Failureto follow this instruction could result in anaccident.

● If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and issubjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles canform in the brake system. This reduces the ef-ficiency of the brakes.

● If a brake system circuit fails, the brakingdistance will be increased considerably. Con-tact a specialised workshop immediately andavoid unnecessary journeys.

CAUTION

● Never let the brakes “drag” by leaving yourfoot on the pedal when it is not necessary tobrake. This overheats the brakes, resulting inlonger stopping distances and greater wear.

● Before driving down a long, steep gradient,it is advisable to reduce speed and select alower gear. This makes use of engine brakingand relieves the brakes. If you still have touse the brakes, it is better to brake firmly atintervals than to apply the brakes continu-ously.

Note

● If the brake servo is out of action, for exam-ple when the car is being towed, you willhave to press the brake pedal considerablyharder than normal to make up for the lack ofservo assistance.

● If you wish to equip the vehicle with acces-sories such as a front spoiler or wheel covers,it is important that the flow of air to the frontwheels is not obstructed, otherwise thebrakes can overheat. Before purchasing ac-cessories please observe the relevant instruc-tions ››› page 147, Technical modifications.

Operating the handbrake

Fig. 123 Handbrake between the front seats.

The handbrake should be applied firmly toprevent the vehicle from accidentally rollingaway.

Always apply the handbrake when you leaveyour vehicle and when you park.

Applying the handbrake

– Pull the handbrake lever up firmly››› Fig. 123.

Releasing the handbrake

– Pull the lever up slightly and press the re-lease knob in the direction of the arrow››› Fig. 123 and guide the handbrake leverdown fully ››› .

Always pull the handbrake all the way up, sothere is less risk of driving off with it still en-gaged ››› .

The handbrake warning lamp lights upwhen the handbrake is applied and the igni-tion switched on. The warning lamp turns offwhen the handbrake is released.

If you drive faster than 6 km/h (4 mph) withthe handbrake on, the following message*will appear on the instrument panel: HAND-BRAKE ON. You will also hear an audiblewarning.

WARNING

● Never use the handbrake to stop the vehi-cle when it is in motion. The braking distanceis considerably longer, because braking isonly applied to the rear wheels. Risk of acci-dent!

124

Driving

● If the handbrake is only partially released,this will cause the rear brakes to overheat,which can impair the function of the brakesystem and could lead to an accident. This al-so causes premature wear on the rear brakepads.

CAUTION

Always apply the handbrake before you leavethe vehicle. Put it in 1st gear as well.

Parking

The handbrake should always be firmly ap-plied when the vehicle is parked.

Always note the following points when park-ing the vehicle:

– Use the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.

– Apply the handbrake.

– Put it in 1st gear.

– Switch the engine off and remove the keyfrom the ignition. Turn the steering wheelslightly to engage the steering lock.

– Always take you keys with you when youleave the vehicle ››› .

Additional notes on parking the vehicle ongradients:

Turn the steering wheel so that the vehiclerolls against the kerb if it started to roll.

● If the vehicle is parked facing downhill,turn the front wheels so that they point to-wards the kerb.

● If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turnthe front wheels so that they point away fromthe kerb.

● Secure the vehicle as usual by applying thehandbrake firmly and putting it in 1st gear.

WARNING

● Take measures to reduce the risk of injurywhen you leave your vehicle unattended.

● Never park where the hot exhaust systemcould ignite inflammable materials, such asdry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc.

● Never allow vehicle occupants to remain inthe vehicle when it is locked. They would beunable to open the vehicle from the inside,and could become trapped in the vehicle inan emergency. In the event of an emergency,locked doors will delay assistance to vehicleoccupants.

● Never leave children alone in the vehicle.They could set the vehicle in motion, for ex-ample, by releasing the handbrake or thegearbox lever.

● Depending on weather conditions, it maybecome extremely hot or cold inside the vehi-cle. This can be fatal.

Hill driving assistant*

This function is only included in vehicles withESC.

The hill driving assistant helps the driver tomove off and upward on a hill without rollingbackward.

The system maintains brake pressure for ap-proximately 2 seconds after the driver takeshis foot off the brake pedal to prevent the ve-hicle from rolling backward when starting off.During these 2 seconds, the driver hasenough time to release the clutch pedal andaccelerate without the vehicle moving andwithout having to use the handbrake, makingstarting off easier, more comfortable and saf-er.

These are the basic operation conditions:

● being on a ramp or hill/slope,

● closed doors,

● vehicle completely stationary,

● engine running and foot on the brake,

● besides having a gear engaged or being inneutral for manual gear change and with theselector lever at position S, D or R for an au-tomatic gearbox. »

125

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

This system is also active when reversing up-hill.

WARNING

● If you do not start the vehicle immediatelyafter taking your foot off the brake pedal, thevehicle may start to roll back under certainconditions. Depress the brake pedal or usethe hand brake immediately.

● If the engine stalls, depress the brake ped-al or use the hand brake immediately.

● When following a line of traffic uphill, if youwant to prevent the vehicle from rolling backaccidentally when starting off, hold the brakepedal down for a few seconds before startingto move.

Note

The official service or a specialist workshopcan tell you if your vehicle is equipped withthis system.

Manual gearbox

Driving with a manual gearbox

Fig. 124 Detailed view of the centre console:gear shift pattern of a 5- or 6-speed manualgearbox.

Engaging the reverse gear

– The vehicle should be stationary with theengine idling. Press the clutch down thor-oughly.

– Place the gearbox lever into neutral andpush the lever downwards.

– Slide the gearbox lever to the left, and theninto the reverse position shown on the lev-er.

The reverse gear can only be engaged whenthe vehicle is stationary. When the engine isrunning and before engaging this gear, waitabout 6 seconds with the clutch pressed

down thoroughly in order to protect the gear-box.

The reverse lights switch on when the reversegear is selected and the ignition is on.

WARNING

● When the engine is running, the vehiclewill start to move as soon as a gear is engag-ed and the clutch released.

● Never select the reverse gear when the ve-hicle is in motion. Risk of accident.

Note

● Do not rest your hand on the gear leverwhile driving. The pressure of your handcould cause premature wear on the selectorforks in the gearbox.

● When changing gear, you should alwaysdepress the clutch fully to avoid unnecessarywear and damage.

● Do not “slip” the clutch to hold the vehicleon a hill. This causes premature wear anddamage to the clutch.

● Do not leave your foot on the clutch pedal;although the pressure may seem insignifi-cant, it can cause the premature wear of theclutch plate. Use the foot rest when you donot need to change gear.

126

Driving

Automatic gearbox/DSGautomatic gearbox*

Selector lever positions

Fig. 125 Centre console: selector lever for au-tomatic gearbox/DSG automatic gearbox.

Selector lever positions indicated on thecover

Parking position (lever locked).

Reverse position.

Neutral position (lever locked). This po-sition is similar to the neutral positionfor manual gearboxes).

Drive position (economic driving pro-gramme).

Sports driving position.

Tiptronic driving position (this pro-gramme is similar to the operation of amanual gearbox).

P

R

N

D

S

+/-

Driving programmes

The automatic gearbox / DSG gearbox hasthree programmes.

Selecting the economy programme

– This programme selects a higher gear earli-er rather than remain in a lower gear.

– Put the selector lever into position D todrive forwards.

– Put the selector lever into position R to re-verse. This position is shared by all pro-grammes for reversing.

Selecting the sport programme

– Move the lever to position S.

If you select sport programme S, the pro-gramme is designed for sport mode, that is,a programme which changes up at higher en-gine speeds to use the full power of the en-gine. This programme is not recommendedfor use on the motorway or in the city.

Selecting the manual programme (Tiptronic)

This programme allows driving similar to amanual gearbox.

This programme may be accessed using theselector lever or from the steering wheel con-trols when this option is fitted ››› page 129.

Selector lever locking

Fig. 126 Centre console: automatic gearboxselector lever.

The selector lever lock prevents gears frombeing engaged inadvertently, which wouldcause the vehicle to move.

Releasing the selector lever lock

– Start the vehicle.

– Press and release the brake pedal, at thesame time press the button on the selectorlever.

The lock can only be engaged when the vehi-cle is stationary or at a speed of less than5 km/h (3 mph). It is automatically switchedoff at higher speeds in position N.

For rapid gear changes (e.g. from R to D) thelever will not lock. If the lever remains in po-sition N for more than one second it will lock.With the automatic lock, the lever is »

127

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

prevented from passing from P and N to anyother gear without first pressing the brakepedal.

The selector lever must be put in the positionP in order to remove the key.

Driving with automatic gearbox/DSGautomatic gearbox*

Fig. 127 Centre console: automatic gearboxselector lever.

The gearbox changes gear ratios automatical-ly as the vehicle moves.

Starting

– Start the engine with the selector lever inposition P or N.

Driving

– Press and hold the brake pedal.

– Holding down the lock button (button onthe selector lever), select R or D.

– Release the lever and wait a little for thegearbox to engage the gear (a slight move-ment can be felt).

– Release the brake and press the accelerator››› .

Stopping briefly

– If stopping for a short time, keep the vehi-cle stationary by pressing the foot brakehard to prevent the vehicle moving back-wards on a slope or “creeping” forwards,e.g. at traffic lights. The selector lever doesnot need to be put into the positions P or Nfor this.

– Do not press the accelerator.

Parking

– Press and hold the brake pedal until the ve-hicle comes to a standstill ››› .


– By pressing the lock button down, movethe selector lever to P and release the lockbutton.

Driving up and down hills

– Press the selector lever from position “D”to the right into the tiptronic selector gate.

– Lightly press the selector lever back tochange down.

Holding the car on a hill

– The brake must be always pressed down toprevent the vehicle from “rolling back-wards” ››› . Do not try to prevent the vehi-cle from “rolling backwards” by increasingthe engine speed while a range of gears isselected.

Starting the vehicle up hills


– With a selected gear, accelerate slowly andat the same time, release the handbrake.

The steeper the slope, the lower the neededgear. This increases the braking effect of theengine. For example, when driving down avery steep slope in third gear. If the enginebrake effect is not enough, the vehicle willspeed up. The automatic gearbox automati-cally changes up to prevent the engine over-revving. Use the foot brake to reduce speedand change into 3rd gear using Tiptronic*››› .

Your vehicle has an automatic interlockwhich prevents the selector lever from beingput into a position for driving forwards or inreverse from positions P or N if the brakepedal is not depressed.

128

Driving

The ignition key cannot be removed unlessthe selector lever is in position P.

Control lamp “Pressing brake pedal”

When the warning lamp next to the selectorlever lights up, press the brake pedal. This isnecessary when the automatic gearbox selec-tor lever is moved out of positions P or N. Atext message or instructions to perform nec-essary operations may appear on the instru-ment panel.

WARNING

● As a driver, you should never leave your ve-hicle if the engine is running and a gear rangeis engaged. If you have to leave your vehiclewhile the engine is running, you must applythe parking brake and put the selector leverin position P.

● If the engine is running and if D or R is en-gaged, you will need to hold the car on thefoot brake. The car will creep forward as thepower transmission is not fully interruptedeven when the engine is idling.

● Never accelerate when moving the selectorlever or you may cause an accident.

● Never move the selector lever to R or Pwhen driving. Risk of accident!

● Before driving down a long, steep slope, itis advisable to reduce speed and change intoa lower gear.

● If you stop the vehicle up hill, always holdthe foot brake strongly depressed down tostop it from rolling back.

● Never allow the brake to rub and do not usethe brake pedal too often or for long periods.Constant braking will cause the brakes tooverheat and will considerably reduce thebrake effect. This increases the braking dis-tance and could cause the brake system tofail.

● Never allow the car to roll down a gradientwith the gear in neutral N, or in selector leverposition D, even if the engine is not running.

CAUTION

● If you stop the vehicle up hills, do not at-tempt to stop it from rolling back by depress-ing the accelerator when a gear has been se-lected. Otherwise, the automatic gearboxmay overheat causing damage. Pull the hand-brake up or fully depress the brake pedal toprevent the vehicle from rolling away.

● If you allow the vehicle to roll when the en-gine is not running, or with the selector leverin position N, a lack of lubrication in the auto-matic gearbox will damage it.

Changing gear in Tiptronic mode*

Fig. 128 Changing gear with Tiptronic.

Fig. 129 Steering wheel with paddle shiftersfor automatic gearbox.

The Tiptronic system allows the driver to se-lect gears manually.

Changing gear with the selector lever

– Press the selector lever from position D tothe right into the tiptronic selector gate. »

129

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

– Lightly press the selector lever forward››› Fig. 128 + to change up to a highergear.

– Lightly press the selector lever backward››› Fig. 128 - to change down to a lowergear.

Changing gear with the steering wheelpaddle levers*

– Press the right paddle lever + towards thesteering wheel to change up ››› Fig. 129.

– Press the left paddle – towards the steer-ing wheel to change down ››› Fig. 129.

Using the paddle levers on the steeringwheel, you can access manual driving moderegardless of the pre-selected driving mode.

General information about driving intiptronic mode

When accelerating, the automatic gearbox /DSG automatic gearbox goes into a highergear a little before the engine reaches itsmaximum permitted revolutions.

If a lower gear is selected, the automaticgearbox / DSG automatic gearbox will onlychange down when the engine cannot goover its maximum permitted revolutions.

If “tiptronic” is selected whilst the vehicle isin motion and the automatic gearbox / DSGautomatic gearbox is in third gear and selec-

tor lever position D, “tiptronic” mode willthen also be in third gear.

Changing gears in the normal or sportprogramme using the steering wheel paddlelevers

If the paddle levers ››› Fig. 129 are used inthe normal or sport programme, the systemswitches temporarily to “tiptronic” mode. Toexit “Tiptronic” mode again, press the rightpaddle shifter +OFF toward the steeringwheel for approximately one second. You willalso leave “Tiptronic” mode if the paddle lev-ers are not moved for a certain time.

Note

● The gearbox controls on the steering wheelcan operate with the selector lever in any po-sition and with the vehicle in motion.

Kick-down feature

This feature allows maximum acceleration.

If you press the accelerator down thoroughly,the gearbox automatically changes down, de-pending on speed and engine speed, into alower gear to take full advantage of give thevehicle maximum acceleration.

The gearbox does not change gear until theengine reaches the maximum determined en-gine speed for the gear.

WARNING

You could lose control of the vehicle if you ac-celerate on slippery road surfaces. Risk of se-rious injury.

● Be particularly careful when using the kick-down features on slippery road surfaces. Witha fast acceleration, the vehicle could losetraction and skid.

● You should use the kick-down feature onlywhen traffic and weather conditions allow itto be used safely.

Run-in and economical driving

Running in a new engine

The engine needs to be run in over the first1,500 km.

Up to 1,000 kilometres

– Do not drive at speeds of more than 2/3the maximum speed.

– Do not accelerate hard.

– Avoid high engine revolutions.

– Do not tow a trailer.

130

Driving

From 1,000 to 1,500 kilometres

– Speeds can be gradually increased to themaximum road speed or maximumpermissible engine speed (rpm).

During its first few hours of running, the in-ternal friction in the engine is greater thanlater on, when all the moving parts have bed-ded in.


If the engine is run in gently, its life will be in-creased and its oil consumption reduced.

Environmental friendliness

Environmental protection is a top priority inthe design, choice of materials and manufac-ture of your new SEAT.

Constructive measures to encouragerecycling

● Joints and connections designed for easydismantling

● Modular construction to facilitate disman-tling

● Increased use of single-grade materials.

● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked inaccordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 andISO 1629.

Choice of materials

● Use of recycled materials.

● Use of compatible plastics in the same partif its components are not easily separated.

● Use of recycled materials and/or materialsoriginating from renewable sources.

● Reduction of volatile components, includ-ing odour, in plastic materials.

● Use of CFC-free coolants.

Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptionsdictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexa-valent chromium.

Manufacturing methods

● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in theprotective wax for cavities.

● Use of plastic film as protection during ve-hicle transport.

● Use of solvent-free adhesives.

● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-tems.

● Recycling and energy recovery from resi-dues (RDF).

● Improvement in the quality of waste water.

● Use of systems for the recovery of residualheat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,etc.).

● Use of water-soluble paints.

Catalytic converter

To maintain the useful life of the catalyticconverter

– Use only unleaded petrol with petrol en-gines, as lead damages the catalytic con-verter.

– Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank.

– For engine oil changes, do not replenishwith too much engine oil ››› page 168, Top-ping up engine oil .

– Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jumpleads if necessary ››› page 189.

If you notice misfiring, uneven running orloss of power when the vehicle is moving, re-duce speed immediately and have the vehi-cle inspected at the nearest specialisedworkshop. In general, the exhaust warninglamp will light up when any of the describedsymptoms occur ››› page 35. If this happens,unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust systemand escape into the environment. The cata-lytic converter can also be damaged by over-heating.

WARNING

The catalytic converter reaches very hightemperatures! Risk of fire!

● Never park where the catalytic convertercould come into contact with dry grass orflammable materials under the vehicle. »

131

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

● Do not apply additional underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, cata-lytic converter or the heat shields on the ex-haust system. These materials could catchfire when the vehicle is being driven.

CAUTION

Never run the fuel tank completely dry be-cause the irregularity of the fuel supply maycause ignition problems. This allows unburntfuel to enter the exhaust system, which couldcause overheating and damage the catalyticconverter.


Even when the emission control system isworking perfectly, there may be a smell ofsulphur from the exhaust gas under someconditions. This depends on the sulphur con-tent of the fuel used. Quite often the problemcan be solved by changing to another brandof fuel.

Diesel engine particulate filter*

Fig. 130 Vehicle data sticker on back cover ofthe Maintenance Programme.

Your vehicle is fitted with a DPF (Diesel partic-ulate filter) if the vehicle data sticker (backcover of the “Maintenance Programme)” liststhe PR code 7GG or 7MG ››› Fig. 130.

The diesel engine particulate filter eliminatesmost of the soot from the exhaust gas sys-tem. Under normal driving conditions, the fil-ter cleans itself. If this is not possible (for ex-ample, multiple short trips) the filter will beobstructed by soot and the diesel engineparticulate filter warning lamp will light up.This does not represent a fault, it is a warningthat indicates that the filter has not beenable to regenerate automatically and that youmust perform a cleaning cycle, as indicatedin ››› page 41.

WARNING

● The diesel engine particulate filter mayreach extremely high temperatures; the vehi-cle should be parked so that the exhaust pipedoes not come into contact with flammablematerials underneath the vehicle. Otherwisethere is a risk of fire.

CAUTION

● Your vehicle is not designed to use biodie-sel fuel. Never, under any circumstances re-fuel with biodiesel. The use of biodiesel fuelcould damage the engine and the fuel sys-tem. The addition of biodiesel to diesel bythe diesel producer in accordance with stand-ard EN 590 is authorised and will not causedamage to the engine or the fuel system.

● Using diesel fuel with a high sulphur con-tent may significantly reduce the useful life ofthe diesel particulate filter. Your TechnicalService will be able to tell you which coun-tries have diesel with a high sulphur content.

Economical and environmentallyfriendly driving

Fuel consumption, environmental pollutionand wear to the engine, brakes and tyres de-pends in large part on your driving style. Byadopting an economical driving style and an-ticipating the traffic situation ahead, you caneasily reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%.

132

Driving

Some tips on how to help you reduce pollu-tion while saving money are listed below.

Drive anticipating the traffic situation

A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating.When you anticipate situations, you have tobrake less often and, thus, accelerate less. Ifit is possible, let the vehicle roll with a gearengaged, for example, if you see a red lightahead. The braking effect achieved in thisway helps to reduce the wear of brakes andtyres; emissions and fuel consumption arereduced to zero (disconnection due to iner-tia).

Change gear early to save energy

An effective way of saving fuel is to changeup quickly through the gears. Running theengine at high rpm in the lower gears usesan unnecessary amount of fuel.

Manual gearbox: shift up from first to secondgear as soon as possible. We recommendthat, whenever possible, you change to ahigher gear upon reaching 2000 rpm. Followthe “recommended gear” indication that ap-pears on the instrument panel ››› page 47.

Avoid driving at high speed

We advise you not to drive at the top speedpermitted by the vehicle. Fuel consumption,exhaust emissions and noise levels all in-

crease very rapidly at higher speeds. Drivingat moderate speeds will help to save fuel.

Avoid idling

It is worthwhile switching off the enginewhen waiting in a traffic jam, at level cross-ings or at traffic lights with a long red phase.The fuel saved after only 30 - 40 seconds isgreater than the amount of fuel needed to re-start the engine.

The engine takes a long time to warm upwhen it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu-tant emissions are also especially high dur-ing this initial warm-up phase. It is thereforebest to drive off immediately after startingthe engine. Avoid running the engine at highspeed.

Periodic maintenance

Periodic maintenance work guarantees that,before beginning a journey, you will not con-sume more than the required amount of fuel.A well-serviced engine gives you the benefitof improved fuel efficiency as well as maxi-mum reliability and an enhanced resale val-ue.

A badly serviced engine can consume up to10% more fuel than necessary.

Avoid short journeys

To reduce the consumption and emission ofpolluting exhaust gases, the engine and the

exhaust gas filtration systems should reachthe optimum operating temperature.

With the engine cold, fuel consumption isproportionally higher. The engine does notwarm up and fuel consumption does not nor-malise until having driven approximately fourkilometres. This is why we recommend avoid-ing short trips whenever possible.

Maintain the correct tyre pressures

Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an ad-equate pressure saves fuel. If the tyre pres-sure is just one bar (14.5 psi / 100 kPa) toolow, fuel consumption can increase by asmuch as 5%. Due to the greater rolling resist-ance, under-inflation also increases tyre wearand impairs handling.

The tyre pressures should always be checkedwhen the tyres are cold.

Do not use winter tyres all year round as theyincrease fuel consumption by up to 10%.

Avoid unnecessary weight

Given that every kilo of extra weight will in-crease the fuel consumption, it is advisableto always check the luggage compartment tomake sure that no unnecessary loads are be-ing transported.

A roof rack is often left in place for the sakeof convenience, even when it is no longerneeded. At a speed of 100 km/h (62 mph) »

133

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

and 120 km/h (75 mph) your vehicle will useabout 12% more fuel as a result of the extrawind resistance caused by the roof rack evenwhen it is not in use.

Save electricity

The engine activates the alternator, whichproduces electricity. With the need for elec-tricity, fuel consumption is also increased.Because of this, always turn off electrical de-vices when you do not need them. Examplesof devices that use a lot of electricity are: thefan at high speeds, the rear window heatingor the seat heaters*.

Note

● If you vehicle has Start-Stop, it is not rec-ommended to switch this function off.

● It is recommended to close the windowswhen driving at more than 60 km/h

● Do not drive with your foot resting on theclutch pedal,, as the pressure can make theplate spin, more fuel will be used and it canburn the clutch plate lining, causing a seriousfault.

● Do not hold the vehicle on a hill with theclutch, use the foot brake or hand brake, us-ing the latter to start. The fuel consumptionwill be lower and you will prevent the clutchplate from being damaged.

● On descents, use the engine brake, chang-ing to the gear that is more suitable for the

slope. Fuel consumption will be “zero” andthe brakes will not suffer.

Driver assistance systems

Braking and stability systems

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)*

Fig. 131 Detailed view of the centre console:ESC switch.

This Electronic Stability System reduces therisk of skidding and improves the vehicle'sstability and ability to hold the road.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) includes theelectronic differential lock (EDL), the tractioncontrol system (TCS), the brake assist system(BAS) and the trailer stabilisation programme(TSP). The ESC works together with the ABS.Both control lamps will light up if the ESC orABS systems are faulty.

The ESC system is started automaticallywhen the engine is started.

134


The ESC system is always active and cannotbe switched off. The ESC switch only switchesthe ASR off.

The ASR can be deactivated when wheel spinis desirable.

For example:

● When driving with snow chains.

● When driving in deep snow or on loose sur-faces.

● When the vehicle is stuck, to rock it back-wards and forwards.

Press the button to switch the ASR back onwhen you no longer need wheel spin.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)*

The ESC reduces the risk of skidding by brak-ing the wheels individually.

The system uses the steering wheel angleand road speed to calculate the changes ofdirection desired by the driver, and constant-ly compares them with the actual behaviourof the vehicle. When irregularities occur, forexample, if the vehicle begins to skid, theESC brakes the appropriate wheel automati-cally.

The forces acting on the braked wheel bringthe vehicle back to a stable condition. If thevehicle tends to oversteer (the rear endslides out), the system will act on the frontwheel on the outside of the turn.

Steering manoeuvre recommendations

This is a complementary safety function in-cluded in the ESC. This function aids the driv-er to better stabilize the vehicle in a criticalsituation. For example, in case of suddenbraking on a surface with varied adherence,the vehicle will tend to destabilise its trajec-tory to the right or to the left. In this case, theESC recognises the situation and assists thedriver with a counter steering manoeuvrefrom the power steering.

This function simply provides the driver witha recommended manoeuvre in critical situa-tions.

The vehicle does not steer itself with thisfunction, the driver has full control of the ve-hicle at all times.

WARNING

● Remember that not even the ESC can defythe laws of physics. This should be kept inmind, particularly on slippery and wet roadsand when towing a trailer.

● Always adapt your driving style to suit thecondition of the roads and the traffic situa-tion. The greater safety provided by the ESCshould not encourage you to run any risks.

CAUTION

● To ensure that the ESC works correctly, allfour wheels must be fitted with the sametyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of

the tyres can cause the system to reduce en-gine power when this is not desired.

● Any modifications made to the vehicle (forexample, to the engine, brake system, run-ning gear or to the combination of wheelsand tyres) may affect the operation of theABS, EDL, ESC and ASR.

Electronic differential lock (EDL)*

EDL helps the vehicle to start moving, accel-erate and climb a gradient in slippery condi-tions where this may otherwise be difficult oreven impossible.

It uses the ABS sensors to monitor the speedof the driven wheels. In case of an EDL fault,the warning light for ABS lights up››› page 41.

At speeds of up to approximately 80 km/h(50 mph), it is able to balance out differencesin the speed of the driven wheels of approxi-mately 100 rpm/min caused by a partiallyslippery road surface. It does this by brakingthe wheel which has lost traction and distrib-uting more driving force to the other drivenwheel via the differential.

To prevent the disc brake of the brakingwheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out au-tomatically if subjected to excessive loads.The vehicle will continue to function normally »

135

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

without EDL. For this reason, the driver is notinformed that the EDL has been switched off.

The EDL will switch on again automaticallywhen the brake has cooled down.

WARNING

● When accelerating on a slippery surface,for example on ice and snow, press the accel-erator carefully. Despite EDL, the drivenwheels may start to spin. This could impairthe vehicle's stability.

● Always adapt your driving style to suit roadconditions and the traffic situation. Do not letthe extra safety afforded by EDL tempt you in-to taking any risks when driving, this cancause accidents.

CAUTION

Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the en-gine, the brake system, running gear or anycomponents affecting the wheels and tyres)could affect the efficiency of the EDL››› page 147.

Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)*

The function (Hydraulic Brake Assist HBA) isonly included in vehicles with ESC.

In an emergency, most drivers brake in time,but not with maximum force. This results inunnecessarily long braking distances.

This is when the brake assist system comesinto action. When pressing the brake pedalrapidly, the assistant interprets it as an emer-gency. It very quickly builds up the full brakepressure so that the ABS can be activatedmore quickly and efficiently, thus reducingbraking distance.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake ped-al, since the brake assist system switches offautomatically as soon as you release thebrake.

Emergency braking warning

If the vehicle is braked suddenly and continu-ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h, thebrake light flashes several times per secondto warn vehicles driving behind. If you contin-ue braking, the hazard warning lights willcome on automatically when the vehiclecomes to a standstill. They switch off auto-matically when the vehicle starts to moveagain.

WARNING

● The risk of accident is higher if you drivetoo fast, if you do not keep your distance fromthe vehicle in front, and when the road sur-face is slippery or wet. The increased acci-dent risk cannot be reduced by the brake as-sist system.

● The brake assist system cannot defy thelaws of physics. Slippery and wet roads aredangerous even with the brake assist system!

Therefore, it is essential that you adjust yourspeed to suit the road and traffic conditions.Do not let the extra safety features tempt youinto taking any risks when driving.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

The anti-lock brake (ABS) system preventsthe wheels from locking during braking andis an important part of the vehicle's activesafety system.

How the ABS works

If one of the wheels turns too slowly in rela-tion to the vehicle's speed, and is close tolocking, the system will reduce the brakingpressure to this wheel. The driver is madeaware of this control process by a pulsatingof the brake pedal and audible noise. This isa deliberate warning to the driver that one ormore of the wheels is tending to lock and theABS control function has intervened. In thissituation it is important to keep the brakepedal fully depressed so the ABS can regu-late the brake application. Do not “pump”.

If you brake hard on a slippery road surface,the best possible control is retained as thewheels do not lock.

However, ABS will not necessarily guaranteeshorter braking distances in all conditions.Braking distance could even be further if you

136


brake on gravel or on fresh snow on aslippery surface.

WARNING

● The anti-lock brake system cannot defy thelaws of physics. Slippery and wet roads aredangerous even with ABS! If you notice thatthe ABS is working (to counteract lockedwheels under braking), you should reducespeed immediately to suit the road and trafficconditions. Do not let the extra safety fea-tures tempt you into taking any risks whendriving.

● The effectiveness of ABS is also determinedby the tyres fitted ››› page 175.

● If the running gear or brake system is modi-fied, the effectiveness of the ABS could be se-verely limited.

Drive wheel traction control system(ASR)

The traction control system prevents the driv-en wheels from spinning when the vehicle isaccelerating.

Description and operation of the tractioncontrol system during acceleration (ASR

On front-wheel drive vehicles, the ASR sys-tem intervenes, reducing engine power andpreventing the driven wheels from slippingduring acceleration. The system works in the

entire speed range in conjunction with ABS.If a failure occurs in the ABS, the ASR will al-so stop working.

TCS helps the car to start moving, accelerateand climb a gradient in slippery conditionswhere this may otherwise be difficult or evenimpossible.

The ASR automatically switches on when theengine is started. If necessary, it may beturned on or off by briefly pushing the buttonon the centre console.

When the ASR is switched off, the OFF

warning lamp will light up. The ASR shouldnormally be left on. Only in exceptional cir-cumstances, when slipping of the wheels isdesired, should it be disconnected.

● With compact temporary spare wheel.

● When using the snow chains.

● When driving in deep snow or on soft ter-rain.

● When the vehicle is bogged-down, to free itby “rocking.”

The ASR should be switched on again assoon as possible.

WARNING

● Remember that not even the ASR can defythe laws of physics. This should be kept inmind, particularly on slippery and wet roadsand when towing a trailer.

● Always adapt your driving style to suit thecondition of the roads and the traffic situa-tion. The greater safety provided by the ASRshould not encourage you to run any risks.

CAUTION

● To ensure that the ASR works correctly,identical tyres should be fitted on all fourwheels. Any differences in the rolling radiusof the tyres can cause the system to reduceengine power when this is not desired.

● Any modifications made to the vehicle (forexample, to the engine, brake system, run-ning gear or to the combination of wheelsand tyres) may affect the operation of theABS and ASR.

XDS*

When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen-tial mechanism allows the outer wheel to turnat a higher speed than the inner wheel. Inthis way, the wheel that is turning faster (out-er wheel) receives less drive torque than theinner wheel. This may mean that in certainsituations the torque delivered to the innerwheel is too high, causing the wheels tospin. On the other hand, the outer wheel isreceiving a lower drive torque than it couldtransmit. This causes an overall loss of lateralgrip on the front axle, resulting in understeeror “lengthening” of the trajectory. »

137

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

The XDS system can detect and correct thiseffect via the sensors and signals of the ESC.

Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the insidewheel and counter the excess driving torqueof that wheel. This means that the driver'sdesired trajectory is much more precise,

The XDS system works in combination withthe ESC and is always active, even when ASRtraction control is disconnected.

Brake servo

The brake servo increases the pressure youapply to the brake pedal. It works only whenthe engine is running.

If the brake servo is not functioning, e.g. dueto a malfunction, or if the vehicle is beingtowed, you will have to press the brake pedalconsiderably harder to make up for the lackof servo assistance.

WARNING

The braking distance can also be affected byexternal factors.

● Never let the vehicle coast with the engineswitched off. Failure to follow this instructioncould result in an accident. The braking dis-tance is increased considerably when thebrake servo is not active.

● If the brake servo is not working, for exam-ple when the vehicle is being towed, you will

have to press the brake pedal considerablyharder than normal.

Start-Stop System*

Description and operation

The Start-Stop function stops the enginewhen the vehicle is stopped and starts it au-tomatically when required.

– When the vehicle is stopped, put it in neu-tral and release the clutch pedal. The en-gine will stop.

– When the clutch pedal is pressed, the en-gine starts again.

– The instrument panel display shows infor-mation about the status of the Start-Stopfunction ››› Fig. 133.

Start-Stop function conditions

● The driver seat belt must be buckled.

● The bonnet must be closed.

● The engine must be at operating tempera-ture.

● The steering wheel must be straight.

● The vehicle must not be on a steep gradi-ent.

● The vehicle must not be in reverse.

● A trailer must not be connected.

● The temperature of the passenger compart-ment must be within comfort limits (buttonA/C 11 ››› Fig. 120 should be selected).

● The windscreen de-mist function must beoff.

● If not, it requires an increase in airflow 10

››› Fig. 120 for more than three presses.

● The temperature must not be set to HI orLO.

● The driver door must be closed.

● The diesel particulate filter must not be inregeneration mode, for diesel engines.

● The battery charge must not be low for thenext start.

● Battery temperature must be between -1 °C(+30 °F) and +55 °C (+131 °F).

● The Parking aid system (Park Assist*) mustnot be activated.

Start-Stop function interruption

In the following situations, the Start-Stopfunction will be interrupted and the enginewill automatically start:

● The vehicle starts moving.

● The brake pedal is pressed several times ina row.

● The battery has been discharged excessive-ly.

● The Start-Stop System is manually deacti-vated.

138


● The windscreen de-mist function is turnedon.

● The temperature of the passenger compart-ment exceeds comfort limits (button A/C 11

››› Fig. 120 should be selected).

● If in an increase in airflow 10 ››› Fig. 120 isrequired for more than three presses.

● Temperature setting HI or LO is selected.

● The engine coolant temperature is insuffi-cient.

● The alternator is faulty, for example the V-belt has ruptured.

● If any of the conditions described in theprevious section are not fulfilled.

WARNING

Never allow the vehicle to move with the en-gine off for any reason. You could lose controlof your vehicle. This could cause an accidentand serious injury.

● Power steering does not work when the en-gine is not running. That is why it is muchmore difficult to turn the steering wheel.

● Turn off the Start-Stop system when drivingthrough water (fording streams, etc.).

Note

● For vehicles with the Start-Stop functionand a manual gearbox, when the engine isstarted, the clutch must be pressed.

● When the conditions for the Start-Stopfunction are not fulfilled, the instrument pan-el displays the Start-Stop indicator dimmed.

● If the steering wheel is turned more than270°, Stop will not function; however, the an-gle of steering wheel turn does not affectstarting the vehicle.

Activating and deactivating the Start-Stop function

Fig. 132 The Start-Stop function button.

Every time the ignition is switched on, theStart-Stop function is automatically activa-ted.

Manually deactivating the Start-Stopfunction

– Press the A ››› Fig. 132 located in the cen-tre console. When the Start-Stop function is

deactivated, the pushbutton indicatorlights.

– If the Start-Stop function is operating thenthe engine starts immediately.

Switching the Start-Stop function onmanually

– Press the A ››› Fig. 132 located in the cen-tre console. The indicator on the button willgo out.

Driver messages

Fig. 133 Display on the instrument panel dur-ing Start-Stop function operation.

When the engine is turned off by the Start-Stop function, this is displayed on the instru-ment panel. »

139

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

Note

There are different versions of the dash pan-el; the display of indications on the screenmay differ.

Parking aid acoustic system*

General notes

Various parking aid systems are available tohelp you when parking or manoeuvring intight spaces, depending on the equipmentfitted on your vehicle.

The SEAT Parking System* gives an audiblewarning if there are any obstacles behindyour vehicle.

When you are parking, the SEAT Parking Sys-tem Plus* warns you acoustically and optical-ly1) about obstacles “in front of” and “be-hind” the vehicle.

Note

To ensure the acoustic parking aid worksproperly, the sensors must be kept clean andfree of snow and ice.

SEAT Parking System: description

The Parking System is an acoustic parkingaid.

Sensors are located in the rear bumper.When the sensors detect an obstacle, you arealerted by audible warnings. The measuringrange of the sensors starts at approximately:

RearSide 0.60

Centre 1.60

The audible warnings sound with increasingfrequency as you approach the obstacle.When the vehicle is less than 0.30 m awayfrom the obstacle, the warning tone willsound continuously. Do not drive on!

The volume of the warning beeps will gradu-ally decrease after about 4 seconds if the ve-hicle remains at a constant distance from adetected obstacle (it does not affect the per-manent acoustic signal).

The parking aid is switched on automaticallywhen reverse gear is engaged. You will hear abrief confirmation tone.

WARNING

● The parking aid is not a replacement fordriver awareness. The driver is personally re-

sponsible for safe parking and other manoeu-vres.

● The sensors have blind spots in which ob-stacles are not registered. Always look out forsmall children and animals because the sys-tem will not always detect them. Always payattention when reversing to avoid accidents.

● Always keep a close eye on the area aroundthe vehicle and make full use of the rear vi-sion mirrors.

CAUTION

Please note that low obstacles detected bythe system may no longer be registered bythe sensors as the car moves closer, so thesystem will not give any further warning. Cer-tain kinds of obstacles (such as wire fences,chains, thin painted posts or trailer drawbars, etc) may not always be detected by thesystem, so take care not to damage the vehi-cle in such cases.

Note

Please refer to the notes on towing››› page 141.

1) Vehicles with a navigation system.140


SEAT Parking System Plus*:description

The Parking System Plus is an acoustic andoptical parking aid.

Sensors are located in the front and rearbumpers. When the sensors detect an obsta-cle, you are alerted by audible and opticalwarnings. The measuring range of the sen-sors starts at approximately:

FrontSide 0.90

Centre 1.20

RearSide 0.60

Centre 1.60

The audible warnings sound with increasingfrequency as you approach the obstacle.When the vehicle is less than 0.30 m awayfrom the obstacle, the warning tone willsound continuously. Stop moving immediate-ly!

The volume of the warning beeps will gradu-ally decrease after about 4 seconds if the ve-hicle remains at a constant distance from adetected obstacle (it does not affect the per-manent acoustic signal).

Activating/deactivating

Fig. 134 Centre console: Switch for parkingaid.

Activate

– Connects the radio navigator.

– Press the switch on the centre console››› Fig. 134 or on the gear indicator. You willhear a brief confirmation tone and the LEDon the switch will light up.

Deactivating

– Drive forward faster than 10 km/h (6 mph),or

– Press the switch or


Segments in the optical display

Some colour segments in front and behindand an audible warning enable the driver toassess the distance with respect to an obsta-

cle. The amber colour segments combinedwith a discontinuous beep indicate the pres-ence of an obstacle. As the vehicle gets clos-er to the obstacle, the colour of the segmentchanges to red and the acoustic signal beepscontinuously. When the penultimate segmentis displayed, this means that the vehicle hasreached the collision zone. Stop moving im-mediately! ››› in SEAT Parking System: de-scription on page 140.

Note

● Please refer to the notes on towing››› page 141.

● There is a slight delay in the picture dis-play.

Towing bracket

In towing mode, the rear parking aid sensorsare not enabled when you select reverse gearor press the switch . This function may notbe guaranteed on towing brackets that arenot factory fitted. This results in the followingrestrictions:

SEAT Parking System*

No warning is given.

SEAT Parking System Plus*

There is no rear distance warning. The systemwill still give a warning when obstacles are »

141

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

detected while driving forward. The opticaldisplay changes to towing mode.

Fault messages

If you hear a long beep for a few seconds andthe LED on the switch * starts flashingwhen you switch on the parking aid, a systemfault has occurred. Contact a SEAT officialservice or specialised workshop.

Note

If the fault is not corrected before you switchoff the ignition, it will only be indicated bythe flashing LED on the switch the nexttime you switch on the parking aid.

Cruise speed* (cruise controlsystem - CCS)

Description

The CCS is able to maintain the set speed inthe range from approx. 30 km/h (19 mph) to180 km/h (112 mph).

Once the speed setting has been saved, youmay take your foot off the accelerator.

WARNING

It could be dangerous to use the cruise con-trol system if it is not possible to drive at con-stant speed.

● Do not use the cruise control system whendriving in dense traffic, on roads with lots ofbends or on roads with poor conditions (withice, slippery surfaces, loose grit or gravel), asthis could cause an accident.

● Always switch the cruise control system offafter using it in order to avoid involuntaryuse.

● It is dangerous to use a set speed which istoo high for the current road, traffic or weath-er conditions. Risk of accident.

Note

The cruise control cannot maintain a constantspeed when descending downhill. It will in-crease due to its own weight. Use the footbrake to slow the vehicle.

Switching the cruise control systemon and off

Fig. 135 Turn signal and main beam head-light lever: switch and rocker switch for thecruise control.

Switching on the cruise control system

– Push the switch ››› Fig. 135 B to the left toON.

Switching off the cruise control system

– Either push the switch B to the right toOFF or turn the ignition off when the vehicleis stationary.

When cruise control is on and a speed is pro-grammed, the indicator on the dash panelis lit.1)

If the cruise control system is switched off,the symbol is switched off. The system will



also be switched off fully when the 1st gearis engaged.*

Setting speed*


– Press the lower part SET/- of the rockerswitch ››› Fig. 136 A once briefly when youhave reached the speed you wish to set.

When you release the rocker switch, the cur-rent speed is set and held constant.

Adjusting set speed*

The speed can be altered without touchingthe accelerator or the brake.

Setting a higher speed

– Press the upper part RES/+ of the rockerswitch ››› Fig. 136 A to increase the speed.The vehicle will continue to accelerate aslong as you keep the rocker switch pressed.When you release the switch, the newspeed is stored.

Setting a lower speed

– Press the lower part SET/– ››› Fig. 136 A ofthe rocker switch to reduce the speed. Thevehicle will automatically reduce its speedfor as long as you keep the switch pressed.When you release the switch, the newspeed is stored.

When you increase speed with the accelera-tor and then release the pedal, the systemwill automatically restore the set speed. Thiswill not be the case, however, if the vehiclespeed exceeds the stored speed by morethan 10 km/h (6 mph) for longer than 5 mi-nutes. The speed will have to be storedagain.

Cruise control is switched off if you reducespeed by depressing the brake pedal. Youcan reactivate the control by pressing onceon the upper part of the rocker switch RES/+››› Fig. 136 A .

Switching off cruise controltemporarily*


The cruise control system will be switched offin the following situations:

● if the brake pedal is depressed,

● if the clutch pedal is depressed,

● if the vehicle is accelerated to over180 km/h (112 mph),

● when the ESC or ASR is used.

● when the lever B is moved to the positionCANCEL without reaching the OFF position.Once the CANCEL operation is complete,when the lever is released it returns to its ini-tial position.

To resume cruise control, release the brake orclutch pedal or reduce the vehicle speed toless than 180 km/h (112 mph) and press »

143

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

once on the upper part of the rocker switchRES/+ ››› Fig. 137 A .

Complete system deactivation*

Vehicles with a manual gearbox

The system is completely turned off by mov-ing the control B ››› Fig. 137 all the way tothe right (OFF engaged), or when the vehicleis stationary, by switching off the ignition.

Vehicles with automatic gearbox/DSGautomatic gearbox

To completely disengage the system, the se-lector lever must be placed in one of the fol-lowing positions: P, N, R or 1 or with the vehi-cle stopped and the ignition turned off.

Towing bracket device

Trailer towing

Instructions to follow

Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailerwhen fitted with the correct equipment.

If the car is supplied with a factory-fitted tow-ing bracket it will already have the necessarytechnical modifications and meet the statuto-ry requirements for towing a trailer. If youwish to retrofit a towing bracket, consult››› page 146.

Connectors

Your vehicle is fitted with a 12-pin connectorfor the electrical connection between thetrailer and the vehicle.

If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need touse an adapter cable. It is available at anyTechnical Service.

Trailer weight/drawbar load

Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. Ifyou do not load the trailer up to the maxi-mum permitted trailer weight, you can thenclimb correspondingly steeper slopes.

The maximum trailer weights listed are onlyapplicable for altitudes up to 1000 m abovesea level. With increasing altitude the engine

power and therefore the vehicle climbingability are impaired because of the reducedair density. The maximum trailer weight hasto be reduced accordingly. The weight of thevehicle and trailer combination must be re-duced by 10% for every further 1000 m (orpart thereof). The gross combination weightis the actual weight of the laden vehicle plusthe actual weight of the laden trailer. Whenpossible, operate the trailer with the maxi-mum permitted drawbar load on the ball jointof the towing bracket, but do not exceed thespecified limit.

The figures for trailer weights and drawbarloads that are given on the data plate of thetowing bracket are for certification purposesonly. The correct figures for your specificmodel, which may be lower than these fig-ures for the towing bracket, are given in thevehicle documentation or in ››› chapter Tech-nical Data.

Distributing the load

Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavyobjects are as near to the axle as possible.Loads carried in the trailer must be securedto prevent them moving.

144

Towing bracket device

Tyre pressure

Set tyre pressure to the maximum permissi-ble pressure shown on the sticker on the in-side of the fuel tank flap. Set the tyre pres-sure of the trailer tyres in accordance with thetrailer manufacturer's recommendations.

Exterior mirrors

Check whether you can see enough of theroad behind the trailer with the standard rearvision mirrors. If this is not the case, youshould have additional exterior mirrors fitted.Both exterior mirrors should be mounted onhinged extension brackets. Adjust the mirrorsto give sufficient vision to the rear.

WARNING

Never transport people in a trailer. This couldresult in fatal accidents.

Note

● Towing a trailer places additional demandson the vehicle. We recommend additionalservices between the normal inspection inter-vals if the vehicle is used frequently for tow-ing a trailer.

● Find out whether special regulations applyto towing a trailer in your country.

Ball coupling of towing bracket*

Depending on the model version, the spheri-cal head on the trailer hook may be stored inthe tool box.

The ball coupling is provided with instruc-tions on fitting and removing the ball cou-pling of the towing bracket.

WARNING

The towing bracket ball coupling must bestored securely in the luggage compartmentto prevent them being flung through the vehi-cle and causing injury.

Note

● By law, the ball coupling must be removedif a trailer is not being towed if it obscuresthe number plate.

Driving tips

Driving with a trailer always requires extracare.

Weight distribution

The weight distribution of a loaded trailerwith an unladen vehicle is very unfavourable.However, if this cannot be avoided, drive ex-tra slowly to allow for the unbalanced weightdistribution.

Speed

The stability of the vehicle and trailer is re-duced with increasing speed. For this reason,it is advisable not to drive at the maximumpermissible speed in an unfavourable road,weather or wind conditions. This applies es-pecially when driving downhill.

You should always reduce speed immediatelyif the trailer shows the slightest sign of snak-ing. Never try to stop the “snaking” by in-creasing speed.

Always brake in due course. If the trailer hasan overrun brake, apply the brakes gently atfirst and then, firmly. This will prevent thejerking that can be caused by locking of trail-er wheels. Select a low gear in due coursebefore going down a steep downhill. This en-ables you to use the engine braking to slowdown the vehicle.

Reheating

At very high temperatures and during pro-longed slopes, driving in a low gear and highengine speed, always monitor the coolanttemperature gauge ››› page 31.

Electronic Stability Control*

The ESC* system helps to stabilise the trailerin case of skidding or rocking.

145

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Operation

Fitting a towing bracket*

Fig. 138 Attachment points for towing brack-et.

If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the ve-hicle is purchased, this must be completedaccording to the instructions of the towingbracket manufacturer.

The attachment points for the towing bracketA are on the lower part of the vehicle.

The distance between the centre of the ballcoupling and the ground should never belower than the indicated value, even with afully loaded vehicle and including the maxi-mum drawbar load.

Elevation values for securing the towingbracket:

ALTEA ALTEA XLALTEA FREE-

TRACK

B 65 mm (minimum)

C 350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)

D 357 mm 344 mm

E 569 mm 531 mm

F 875 mm 1,044 mm

G 1040 mm

Fitting a towing bracket

● Driving with a trailer involves an extra effortfor the vehicle. Therefore, before fitting atowing bracket, please contact a TechnicalService to check whether your cooling systemneeds modification.

● The legal requirements in your countrymust be observed (e.g. the fitting of a sepa-rate control lamp).

● Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rearbumper, must be removed and reinstalled.The towing bracket securing bolts must betightened using a torque wrench, and a pow-er socket must be connected to the vehicleelectrical system. This requires specialisedknowledge and tools.

● Figures in the illustration show the eleva-tion value and the attachment points whichmust be considered if you are retrofitting atowing bracket.

WARNING

The towing brackets should be fitted at a spe-cialised workshop.

● If the towing bracket is incorrectly instal-led, there is a serious danger of accident.

● For your own safety, please observe the towbracket manufacturer's instructions.

CAUTION

● If the power socket is incorrectly installed,this could cause damage to the vehicle elec-trical system.

Note

For the sports model (Altea FR), fitting of atrailer bracket is not recommended due to thedesign of the bumpers.

146

Care and maintenance

Advice


Accessories and technicalmodifications

Accessories, modifications and spareparts

Your vehicle is designed to offer a highstandard of active and passive safety.

Before purchasing accessories and parts,and before making technical changes to yourvehicle, we recommend that you consult yourTechnical Service.

SEAT dealerships will be happy to provideyou with the latest information about theuse, legal requirements and recommenda-tions from the manufacturer regarding acces-sories and spare parts.

We recommend you use only SEAT ApprovedAccessories® and SEAT Approved SpareParts®. This way, SEAT can guarantee thatthe product in question is suitable, reliableand safe. SEAT Technical Services have thenecessary experience and facilities to ensurethat parts are correctly and professionally in-stalled.

Despite a continuous observation of the mar-ket, SEAT is not able to assess the reliability,safety and suitability of parts that SEAT hasnot approved. For this reason, SEAT cannotassume responsibility for any non-genuineparts used, even if these parts have been ap-proved by an official testing agency or arecovered by an official approval certificate.

Any retro-fitted equipment which has a directeffect on the vehicle and/or the way it is driv-en, such as a cruise control system or elec-tronically-controlled suspension), must beSEAT-approved for use in your vehicle andbear the e mark (the European Union's au-thorisation symbol).

If any additional electrical devices are fittedwhich do not serve to control the vehicle it-self (e.g. refrigerator box, laptop or ventilatorfan), these must bear the CE mark (EuropeanUnion manufacturer conformity declaration).

WARNING

Accessories, for example telephone holdersor cup holders, should never be fitted on thecovers or within the working range of the air-bags. Otherwise, there is a danger of injury ifthe airbag is triggered in an accident.

Technical modifications

Modifications must always be carried out ac-cording to our specifications.

Unauthorised modifications to the electroniccomponents or software in the vehicle maycause malfunctions. Due to the way the elec-tronic components are linked together in net-works, other indirect systems may be affec-ted by the faults. This can seriously impairsafety, lead to excessive wear of compo-nents, and also invalidate your vehicle regis-tration documents.

SEAT Technical Services cannot be held liablefor any damage caused by modificationsand/or work incorrectly performed.

For this reason, we recommend having allwork performed by a SEAT Technical Serviceusing SEAT® Original Spare Parts.

WARNING

Any type of work or modification performedincorrectly on your vehicle can lead to mal-functions and can cause accidents.

Roof aerial*

The vehicle may be fitted with a foldable*and anti-theft* aerial that may be positionedparallel to the roof.

To fold down

Unscrew the rod, position parallel to the roofand tighten once again. »

147

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice

To return to working position

Continue in the reverse order to the previousinstruction.

CAUTION

If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, be-fore entering the tunnel, put the aerial downparallel to the roof and do not tighten toavoid damage.

Mobile phones and two-way radios

First consult your Technical Service if youwish to use a mobile telephone or a two-wayradio with a transmitting power output in ex-cess of 10 watts. Here you will receive infor-mation concerning the technical possibilitiesfor retrofitting this equipment.

Mobile telephones and two-way radiosshould be only fitted by a specialised work-shop, for example a SEAT dealership.

WARNING

● Always concentrate primarily on driving. Ifyou are distracted while driving you couldhave an accident.

● Never attach the telephone mountings tothe surfaces covering the airbag units orwithin the range of the airbags. There is ahigh danger of injury if the airbag is trig-gered.

Note

Please observe the operating instructions ofyour mobile telephone/two-way radio.

Care and cleaning

General information

Vehicle maintenance

Regular care and washing help to maintainthe value of the vehicle. This may also be oneof the requirements for acknowledging war-ranty claims in the event of bodywork corro-sion or paint defects.

The best way to protect your vehicle againstthe harmful effects of the environment isthrough correct maintenance and frequentwashing. The longer substances such as in-sect remains, bird droppings, resinous treesap, road dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot orroad salt and other aggressive materials re-main on the vehicle, the more damage theydo to the paintwork. High temperatures, forinstance in strong sunlight, further intensifythe corrosive effect.

After winter, a period when salt is put on theroads, it is important to have the undersideof the vehicle washed thoroughly.

Products for vehicle maintenance

Car-care products are available in your Tech-nical Services. Keep the product instructionsuntil you have used them up.

WARNING

● Car-care products can be toxic. Because ofthis, they must always be kept closed in theiroriginal container. Keep them out of the reachof children. Failure to comply could result inpoisoning.

● Always read and observe the instructionsand warnings on the package before usingcar-care products. Improper use could causehealth problems or damage the vehicle. Theuse of certain products may produce noxiousvapours; they should be used in well ventila-ted areas.

● Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nailvarnish remover or other volatile fluids.These are toxic and highly flammable. Risk offire and explosion.

● Before washing your vehicle, or carryingout any maintenance, switch the engine off,apply the handbrake firmly and remove thekey from the ignition.

CAUTION

Never attempt to remove dirt, mud or dust ifthe surface of the vehicle is dry. Never use adry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes.This could damage the paintwork or the win-dows of your vehicle. Soak dirt, mud or dustwith plenty of water.

148



● When purchasing products for your vehiclemaintenance, select the ones which are notharmful to the environment.

● The waste from car-care products shouldnot be disposed of with ordinary householdwaste. Observe the disposal information onthe package.

Care of the vehicle exterior

Automatic car wash tunnel

The vehicle paintwork is so durable that thevehicle can normally be washed withoutproblems in an automatic car wash tunnel.However, the paintwork wear depends to alarge extent on the kind of the car wash tun-nel, the brushes used, its water filtering andthe type of cleaning and preservative prod-ucts.

Before going through a vehicle wash, be sureto take the usual precautions such as closingthe windows and sunroof.

If the vehicle has special accessories such asspoilers or a roof rack or two-way radio aerial,etc., it is advisable to consult the car washtunnel operator.

After washing, the brakes could take sometime to respond as the brake discs and pads

could be wet, or even frozen in winter. “Dry”the brakes by braking several times.

WARNING

Water, ice and salt on the brake system canreduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci-dent.

CAUTION

Before putting the vehicle through the carwash, do not tighten the aerial if it is foldedbecause it can be damaged.

Washing by hand

Vehicle washing

– First soften the dirt and rinse it off with wa-ter.

– Clean your vehicle from top to bottom witha soft sponge, a glove or a brush. Use verylight pressure.

– Rinse the sponge or glove often with cleanwater.

– Special car shampoo should only be usedfor very stubborn dirt.

– Leave the wheels, sill panels etc. until last,using a different sponge or glove.

– Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with water.

– Dry the vehicle surface gently with a cha-mois leather.

– In cold temperature, dry the rubber sealsand their surfaces to prevent them fromfreezing. Apply silicone spray to the rubberseals.

After washing the vehicle

– After washing, avoid sudden and sharpbraking. “Dry” the brakes by braking sever-al times ››› page 123, Braking capacity anddistance.

WARNING

● Wash your vehicle with the ignition switch-ed off.

● Protect your hands and arms from cuts onsharp metal edges when cleaning the under-body, the inside of the wheel housings etc.Risk of injury.

● Water, ice and salt on the brake system canreduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci-dent.

CAUTION

● Never remove dirt, mud or dust if the vehi-cle surface is dry. Never use a dry cloth orsponge for cleaning purposes. This couldscratch the paintwork or glass on your vehi-cle. »

149

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice

● Washing the vehicle in low temperatures:when washing the vehicle with a hose, do notdirect water into the lock cylinders or thegaps around the doors, rear lid, or sunroof.Risk of freezing.


To protect the environment, the vehicleshould be washed only in specially providedwash bays, to prevent toxic, oil-laden wastewater from entering the sewer system. Insome places, washing vehicles outside washbays is prohibited.

Note

Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.

Washing the vehicle with a highpressure cleaner

Be particularly careful when using a highpressure cleaner!

– Always observe the instructions for thehigh-pressure cleaner, particularly thoseconcerning the pressure and the sprayingdistance.

– Increase the spraying distance for soft ma-terials and painted bumpers.

– Do not use a high pressure cleaner to re-move ice or snow from windows››› page 151.

– Never use concentrated jet nozzles (“rotat-ing jets”) ››› .

– After washing, avoid sudden and sharpbraking. “Dry” the brakes by braking sever-al times ››› page 123.

WARNING

● Never wash tyres with a concentrated jet(“rotating nozzle”). Even at large sprayingdistances and short cleaning times, damagecan occur to the tyres. This may cause an ac-cident.

● Water, ice and salt on the brake system canreduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci-dent.

CAUTION

● Do not use water hotter than +60 °C(+140 °F). This could damage the vehicle.

● To avoid damage to the vehicle, keep a suf-ficient distance from sensitive materials suchas flexible hoses, plastic, soundproofing ma-terial, etc. This also applies to bumpers pain-ted in the colour of the bodywork. The closerthe nozzle is to the surface, the greater thewear on the material.

Vehicle paint maintenance

Regular waxing protects the paintwork.

You need to apply wax to your vehicle if waterdoes not form small drops and run off thepaintwork when it is clean.

Good quality hard wax products are availableat your Technical Service.

Regular wax applications help to protects thepaintwork from environmental contaminants.››› page 148. It also protects against minorscratches.

Even if a wax solution is used regularly in thevehicle washing tunnel, it is advisable to pro-tect the paint with a hard wax coating at leasttwice a year.

Polishing the paintwork

Polishing is only necessary if the paint haslost its shine, and the gloss cannot bebrought back by applying wax. Polishingproducts can be purchased in your TechnicalService.

The vehicle must be waxed after polishing ifthe polish used does not contain wax com-pounds to seal the paint ››› page 150, Vehiclepaint maintenance.

150


CAUTION

To prevent damage to the paintwork:

● Do not use polishes and hard wax on pain-ted parts with a matt finish or on plasticparts.

● Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy ordusty environment.

Caring for plastic parts

If normal washing fails to clean plastic parts,clean them with approved solvent-free plas-tic cleaning and care products.

CAUTION

● The use of liquid air freshener directly overthe air vents of the vehicle may damage plas-tic parts if the liquid is accidentally spilled.

● Cleaning products which contain solventswill damage the material.

Cleaning windows and exteriormirrors

Cleaning windows

– Moisten the windows with commerciallyavailable, alcohol based glass cleaner.

– Dry the windows with a clean chamoisleather or a lint-free cloth.

Removing snow

– Use a small brush to remove snow from thewindows and mirrors.

Removing ice

– Use a de-icer spray.

Use a clean cloth or chamois leather to drythe windows. The chamois leathers used onpainted surfaces are not suitable to cleanwindows because they are soiled with waxdeposits which could smear the windows.

If possible, use a de-icing spray to removeice. If you use an ice scraper, push it in onedirection only without swinging it.

Use window cleaner or a silicone remover toclean rubber, oil, grease and silicone depos-its off.

Wax deposits can only be removed with aspecial cleaner available at your TechnicalService. Wax deposits on the windscreencould cause the wiper blades to judder. Add-ing a window cleaner that dissolves wax tothe windscreen washer fluid prevents wiperblades from juddering, but wax deposits arenot removed.

CAUTION

● Never use warm or hot water to removesnow and ice from windows and mirrors. Thiscould cause the glass to crack!

● The heating element for the rear window islocated on the inner side of the window. Toprevent damage, do not put stickers over theheating elements on the inside of the win-dow.

Cleaning windscreen wiper blades

Clean wiper blades improve visibility.

1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirtfrom the windscreen wiper blades.

2. Use window cleaner to clean the wind-screen wiper blades. Use a sponge or acloth to remove stubborn dirt.

Care of rubber seals

If rubber seals are well looked after, they willnot freeze so quickly.

1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirtfrom the rubber seals.

2. Apply a specialist care product to the rub-ber seals.

The rubber strips on the doors, windows, etc.will remain pliable and last longer if they aretreated with a suitable rubber care productfrom time to time (for example siliconespray). »

151

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice

Caring for rubber seals will also prevent pre-mature ageing and leaks. The doors will beeasier to open. If rubber seals are well lookedafter, they will not freeze so quickly in winter.

Door lock cylinder

The door lock cylinders can freeze up in win-ter.

To de-ice the lock cylinders you should onlyuse spray with lubricating and anti-corrosiveproperties.

Cleaning chrome parts

1. Clean chrome parts with a damp cloth.

2. Polish chrome parts with a soft, dry cloth.

If this does not provide satisfying results, usea specialist chrome cleaning product.Chrome cleaning products will remove stainsfrom the surface.

CAUTION

To prevent scratching chrome surfaces:

● Never use an abrasive cleaning product onchrome.

● Do not clean or polish chrome parts in asandy or dusty environment.

Steel wheel rims

– Clean steel wheel rims regularly using aseparate sponge.

Use an industrial cleaner to remove brakedust. Any damage to the paint on steel wheelrims should be repaired before starting torust.

WARNING

● Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Evenat large spraying distances and short clean-ing times, damage can occur to the tyres.This may cause an accident.

● Water, ice and salt on the brake system canreduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci-dent. Directly after washing, avoid suddenand sharp braking. “Dry” the brakes by brak-ing several times ››› page 123.

Alloy wheel rims

Every two weeks

– Wash salt and brake dust from alloywheels.

– Use an acid free detergent to clean thewheel rims.

Every 3 months

– Apply a hard wax compound to the wheels.

Alloy wheels require regular attention to pre-serve their appearance. If road salt and brakedust are not often removed, the aluminiumfinish will be impaired.

Always use an acid-free detergent for alloywheel rims.

Car polish or other abrasive agents shouldnot be used for maintaining the rims. If theprotective coating is damaged, e.g. by flyingstones, the damaged area should be re-paired immediately.

WARNING

● Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Evenat large spraying distances and short clean-ing times, damage can occur to the tyres.This may cause an accident.

● Water, ice and salt on the brake system canreduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci-dent. Directly after washing, avoid suddenand sharp braking. “Dry” the brakes by brak-ing several times ››› page 123.

Underbody protection

The vehicle underbody is coated to protect itfrom chemical and mechanical damage.

The protective coating can be damaged whendriving. We recommend that you check theprotective coating under the body and on the

152


running gear, and retouch it if necessary,before and after the winter season.

We recommend that you go to your TechnicalService to carry out repair work and addition-al anti-corrosion work.

WARNING

Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosioncoatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic con-verter or the heat shields on the exhaust sys-tem. The heat of the exhaust system or theengine could cause them to ignite. Risk offire.

Cleaning the engine compartment

Take special care when cleaning the enginecompartment.

Anti-corrosion treatment

The engine compartment and the surface ofthe power unit are given anti-corrosion treat-ment at the factory.

Good corrosion protection is particularly im-portant in winter when the vehicle is fre-quently driven on salted roads. To preventthe salt corroding the vehicle, the entire en-gine compartment should be thoroughlycleaned before and after winter.

Technical Services have the proper productsfor cleaning and preservation as well as the

necessary workshop equipment. For this rea-son, we recommend having this work per-formed by them.

The anti-corrosion protection is usually re-moved if the engine compartment is cleanedwith grease removing solutions, or if youhave the engine cleaned. On commissioningthis work, ensure that all surfaces, seams,joints and components in the engine com-partment are given anti-corrosion treatment.

WARNING

● When working in the engine compartment,always observe the safety warnings››› page 163.

● Before opening the bonnet, switch the en-gine off, apply the handbrake firmly and al-ways remove the key from the ignition.

● Allow the engine to cool before you cleanthe engine compartment.

● Do not clean, for example, the vehicle un-derbody, wheel arches or wheel trims withoutprotecting your hands and arms. You may cutyourself on sharp-edged metal parts. Failureto comply could result in injury.

● Moisture, ice and salt on the brake systemmay affect braking effectiveness. Risk of acci-dent. Directly after washing, avoid suddenand sharp braking.

● Never touch the radiator fan. It is tempera-ture-controlled and could start automatically,even when the key is removed from the igni-tion!


Fuel, grease and oil deposits can be removedwhen the engine is washed. The polluted wa-ter must be cleaned in an oil separator. Forthis reason, engine washing should be car-ried out only by a specialised workshop or apetrol station.

Caring for the vehicle interior

Introduction

The dye used in many modern garments, forexample dark jeans, is not always sufficientlycolour-fast. Seat upholstery (material andleather), especially when light-coloured, mayvisibly discolour if the dye comes out ofclothing (even when used correctly). This isnot an upholstery defect but indicates thatthe dye in the item of clothing is not suffi-ciently colour-fast.

The longer stains or dirt remain on the vehi-cle surfaces, especially the fabrics coveringthe padded upholstery, the more difficult itbecomes to clean and maintain them. Ifstains and dirt are left for a long time, it maybe that they are impossible to remove.

WARNING

Car-care products may be toxic and hazard-ous. Using unsuitable car-care products or, »

153

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice

using them in the wrong way, may cause acci-dents, serious injury, burns or intoxication.

● Keep your car-care products in their origi-nal containers.

● Read the instructions.

● Never keep car-care products in empty foodcontainers, bottles or other similar contain-ers. Other people may confuse them.

● Keep all car-care products out of the reachof children.

● Some products may give off harmful va-pours during use. Therefore, they should beused outdoors in well-ventilated places.

● Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail-varnish remover or any other volatile productfor washing, maintenance or cleaning. Theseare toxic and highly flammable.

WARNING

Unsuitable maintenance and cleaning of vehi-cle components may impair proper operationof safety equipment and cause serious injury.

● Maintain and clean vehicle components ac-cording to the manufacturer's instructions.

● Only use approved or recommended clean-ing products.

CAUTION

● Cleaning products which contain solventshave a corrosive effect and may damage thematerial irreparably.

● Stains and dirt containing aggressive sub-stances or solvents attack the material andmay damage it irreparably, even when theyare cleaned quickly.

● Dirt and stains should not be allowed to dryand should be cleaned as quickly as possible.

● In the case of stubborn stains, take the ve-hicle to a specialised workshop to avoid dam-age.

Treating your upholstery

To treat and maintain your seat upholstery,keep the following in mind ››› :

Before entering the vehicle, close any Velcrofasteners that might snag on the upholsteryor trim fabric. Any open Velcro fasteners maydamage the trim or upholstery fabrics.

To prevent damage, avoid direct contact be-tween sharp decorative objects and the up-holstery and trim fabrics. Decorative objectsinclude zips, rivets and rhinestones on cloth-ing and belts.

From time to time, clean the dust that gath-ers in the perforations, folds and seams sothat the surfaces of the seats are not dam-aged by its abrasive effect.

Make sure clothes are colour-fast to avoidthem running and staining the upholstery.This is especially important if the upholsteryis light in colour.

CAUTION

If you ignore this checklist, which is impor-tant for maintaining your seat upholstery, thefabric may be damaged or stained.

● Consult the checklist and carry out the op-erations it describes.

Note

SEAT recommends you take the vehicle to aspecialised workshop to treat any stains onthe upholstery caused by the discolourationof clothing.

How to clean the upholstery, trimfabrics and Alcantara®

Cleaning the fabric on heated seats andelectrically adjustable seats or seats withairbag components

There may be important airbag componentsand electrical connections inside the driverseat, passenger seat and possibly the outerrear seats. If these seats and seat backrestsare damaged, or are cleaned and are treatedincorrectly, or if they get wet, the vehicleelectric system may be destroyed and the air-bag system damaged ››› .

Electric and heated seats contain compo-nents and electrical connections that may bedamaged if the seats are cleaned or incor-rectly treated ››› . Similarly, damage may be

154


caused at other points in the vehicle's electri-cal system.

For this reason, bear the following indica-tions in mind for cleaning:

● Do not use high-pressure or steam cleaningequipment or cold aerosols.

● Do not use cream detergents or detergent-based solutions for delicate garments.

● Prevent the fabric from getting wet at alltimes.

● Only use cleaning products approved bySEAT.

● If in doubt, take the vehicle to a professio-nal cleaning company.

Cleaning the fabric on unheated seats, non-electrically adjustable seats and seatswithout airbag components

● Before using any cleaning products, con-sult and keep in mind the instructions of use,indications and warnings on the container.

● Use a vacuum cleaner (with the brush at-tachment) on the trim and seat fabrics, theAlcantara® upholstery of the seats and thecarpet.

● Do not use high-pressure or steam cleaningequipment or cold aerosols.

● For general cleaning, use a soft sponge oran ordinary lint-free microfibre cloth ››› .

● Clean Alcantara® surfaces with a slightlydamp cotton or woollen cloth, or a standardlint-free microfibre cloth ››› .

If the dirt on the trim and upholstery fabricsis only superficial, you can use a standardfoam cleaner.

If the upholstery and trim are very dirty, be-fore cleaning them we recommend you findout about the most suitable cleaning optionsfrom a professional cleaning company. If nec-essary, cleaning should be done by a special-ised firm.

Stain removal

When removing stains, it may be necessaryto clean the whole surface and not just thestain itself. Especially if the surface has beendirtied through normal use. If you only cleanthe stained area, that part may then looklighter than the rest. If in doubt, take the ve-hicle to a professional cleaning company.

WARNING

If there is a fault in the airbag system, it islikely that the airbag will not deploy correct-ly, not deploy at all, or do so unexpectedly,which could cause serious or fatal injuries.

● Have the system checked immediately by aspecialised workshop.

CAUTION

If the upholstery on electrically operatedseats or seats with airbag components getssoaked, the vehicle's electric system and cer-tain other components may be damaged.

● If the seat gets soaked, take the vehicle im-mediately to a specialised workshop to bedried and for the system components to beinspected.

● Do not use steam cleaning equipment asthe dirt becomes more encrusted and fixed inthe material.

● High-pressure cleaning equipment and coldaerosols may damage the upholstery.

CAUTION

● Brushes should only be used to clean themats and floor mat! Other fabrics may bedamaged if cleaned with a brush.

● If cream detergents or detergents for deli-cate garments are applied with a damp clothor sponge, they may, for example, leave ringswhen dry because of the surfactant compo-nents they contain. Generally, such rings arevery difficult or almost impossible to remove.

CAUTION

● Do not let water soak into Alcantara® car-pet under any circumstances.

● Do not use leather cleaning products, sol-vents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain remov-ers or similar products on Alcantara®. »

155

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice

● Never use brushes for cleaning damp mate-rial as they could damage the surface.

Cleaning and maintenance of naturalleather upholstery

Consult a professional cleaning workshop ifyou have any doubts on cleaning and main-taining the leather equipment in your vehicle.

Maintenance and treatment

Nappa natural leather is delicate because ithas no additional protective layer.

● After cleaning, regularly apply a condition-er with sun-screen and impregnating action.These products nourish the leather, soften itand make it more breathable, as well as re-hydrating it. They also provide it with a pro-tective film.

● Clean the leather every two or three monthsand remove stains as they appear.

● Treat the leather regularly (about twice ayear) with a suitable maintenance product.

● Apply as few cleaning and maintenanceproducts as possible, always using a dry, lint-free cotton or woollen cloth. Do not applycleaning and maintenance products directlyto the leather.

● Remove recent ball-point pen and inkstains, lipstick, shoe cream and similarstains as soon as possible.

● Maintain the colour of the leather. To dothis, use a special cream especially colouredfor leather to achieve the same overall colour,if necessary.

● Afterwards, go over it with a soft cloth.

Cleaning the vehicle

SEAT recommends using a slightly damp cot-ton or woollen cloth for general cleaning pur-poses.

Generally, the leather should never besoaked at any point, nor should water pene-trate the seams.

Before cleaning the leather upholstery, bearin mind the following recommendations››› page 154, Cleaning the fabric on heatedseats and electrically adjustable seats orseats with airbag components.

CAUTION

● On no account use solvents, wax polish,shoe cream, stain removers or similar materi-als on leather.

● If the stain remains on the leather for long,it will soak in and be impossible to remove.

● In the event of spilt liquids, dry immediate-ly with an absorbent cloth to prevent the liq-uid penetrating through the leather or seams.

● If the vehicle is left standing in the sun forlong periods, the leather should be protectedagainst direct sunlight to prevent it from fad-ing.

Note

The leather will usually change colour slight-ly with use.

Cleaning synthetic leather upholstery

Before cleaning synthetic leather upholstery,bear in mind the following recommendations››› page 154, Cleaning the fabric on heatedseats and electrically adjustable seats orseats with airbag components

Only use water and neutral cleaning productsto clean synthetic leather upholstery.

CAUTION

Do not use solvents, floor wax, shoe cream,stain removers or similar products on syn-thetic leather. These will stiffen the material,causing it to crack prematurely.

Cleaning plastic parts and theinstrument panel

– Use a clean, damp cloth to clean plasticparts and the dash panel.

156


– If this does not provide satisfactory results,use a special solvent-free plastic cleaningproduct.

WARNING

Never clean the dash panel and the airbagmodule surface with cleaners containing sol-vents. Solvents cause the surface to becomeporous. If the airbag triggered, plastic partscould become detached and cause injuries.

CAUTION

Cleaning products which contain solvents willdamage the material.

Wooden trim cleaning*

– Clean the wooden trim with a water-mois-tened clean cloth.

– If this does not provide satisfactory results,use a gentle soap solution.

CAUTION

Cleaning products which contain solvents willdamage the material.

Cleaning the radio and climatecontrols

To clean the radio and/or climate controls,use a soft damp cloth. For more resistant dirt,a neutral soap solution may be used.

Seat belts cleaning

A dirty belt may not work properly. Check allseat belts regularly and keep them clean.

Seat belts cleaning

– Pull the dirty seat belt right out and unrollit.

– Clean dirty seat belts with a gentle soapsolution.

– Allow it to dry.

– Do not roll the seat belt up until it is dry.

If large stains form on the belts, the automat-ic belt retractor will not work correctly.

WARNING

● Do not use chemical cleaning agents on theseat belts, as this can impair the strength ofthe webbing. Ensure that seat belts do notcome into contact with corrosive fluids.

● Check the condition of the seat belts at reg-ular intervals. If you notice that the belt web-bing, fittings, retractor mechanism or buckle

of any of the belts is damaged, the belt mustbe replaced by a specialised workshop.

● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seatbelt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-moved or modified in any way.

CAUTION

After cleaning, allow seat belts to dry com-pletely before rolling them up. Otherwise, thebelt retractors could become damaged.

157

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice

Checking and refilling levels

Fuel

Refuelling

Fig. 139 Tank flap open.

The tank flap is released manually and is lo-cated at the rear of the vehicle on the right.

The tank holds approximately 55 litres. Forall-wheel drive vehicles, the tank capacity isapproximately 60 litres.

Vehicles using LPG have two fuel tanks: onefor LPG and another for petrol ››› page 160.

Opening the fuel tank cap

– Lift the lid.

– Hold the cap firmly with one hand, then in-sert the key into the lock and rotate 180° tothe left.

– Unscrew the cap, turning it anticlockwise.

Closing the fuel tank cap

– Screw the tank cap to the right until it“clicks”.

– Turn the key in the lock, without releasingthe cap, clockwise through 180°.

– Remove the key and close the flap until itclicks into place. The tank cap is securedwith an anti-loss attachment

If the automatic filler nozzle is operated cor-rectly, it will switch itself off as soon as thetank is full. Never attempt to fill beyond thispoint, as this will fill the expansion chamber.Fuel may leak out if ambient conditions arewarm.

The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv-en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tankflap. Here you will find further information onfuel.

WARNING

● Fuel is highly flammable and can cause se-rious burns and other injuries.

– Never smoke or come into contact withsparks when filling the fuel tank of thevehicle or a spare fuel canister with fuel.This is an explosion hazard.

– Follow legal requirements for the use ofspare fuel canisters.

– For safety reasons we do not recommendcarrying a spare fuel canister in the vehi-cle. The canister could be damaged in anaccident and leak.

● If, in exceptional circumstances, you haveto carry a spare fuel canister, please observethe following:

– Never fill the spare fuel canister insidethe vehicle or on it. An electrostaticcharge could build up during filling, caus-ing the fuel fumes to ignite. This couldcause an explosion. Always place thecanister on the ground to fill it.

– Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth ofthe canister as far as possible.

– If the spare fuel canister is made of met-al, the filling nozzle must be in contactwith the canister during filling. Thishelps prevent an electrostatic chargebuilding up.

– Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in theluggage compartment. Fuel vapours areexplosive. Danger of death.

CAUTION

● Fuel spills should be removed from thepaintwork immediately.

● Never run the tank completely dry. Irregularfuel supply can cause misfiring. As a result,unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic convert-er and cause damage.

158


● When filling the fuel tank after having run itcompletely dry on a vehicle with a diesel en-gine the ignition must be switched on for atleast 30 seconds before starting the engine.Subsequently, when you start the engine itmay take longer than normal to start firing(up to one minute). This is due to the fact thatthe fuel system has to purge itself of air be-fore starting.


Do not try to put in more fuel after the auto-matic filler nozzle has switched off; this maycause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.

Petrol

Petrol types

The recommended fuel types are listed on asticker inside the fuel tank flap.

Only unleaded petrol conforming to standardDIN EN 228 may be used for vehicles withcatalytic converters (EN = “European Stand-ard”).

Petrol types are categorised according totheir octane number, e.g. 91, 95, 98 RON(RON = “research octane number”). You mayuse petrol with a higher octane number thanthe one recommended for your engine. How-

ever, this has no advantage in terms of fuelconsumption and engine power.

CAUTION

● Petrol with standard EN 228 may be mixedwith small quantities of ethanol. However,the so-called “bioethanol fuels” available atcommercial establishments with referenceE50 or E85, which contain a high percentageof ethanol, may not be used, as they willdamage the fuel system.

● Even one tankful of leaded fuel would per-manently impair the efficiency of the catalyt-ic converter.

● High engine speed and full throttle candamage the engine when using petrol with anoctane rating lower than the correct grade forthe engine.


Just one full tank of leaded fuel would seri-ously impair the efficiency of the catalyticconverter.

Petrol additives

The quality of the fuel influences the behav-iour, power and service life of the engine.

This is why the petrol you use should carrysuitable additives already included by thepetrol industry, free of metals. These addi-tives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the

fuel system clean and prevent deposits frombuilding up in the engine.

If good-quality petrol with metal-free addi-tives is not available or engine problemsarise, the necessary additives must be addedwhen refuelling.

Not all petrol additives have been shown tobe effective. The use of unsuitable petrol ad-ditives may cause significant damage to theengine and the catalytic converter. Metal ad-ditives should never be used. Metal additivesmay also be contained in petrol additives forimproving anti-detonation ratings or octaneratings.

SEAT recommends “genuine VolkswagenGroup fuel additives for petrol engines”.These additives can be bought at SEAT Au-thorised Services, where information on howto use them can also be obtained.

CAUTION

Do not refuel if the filler indicates that thefuel contains metal. LRP (lead replacementpetrol) fuels contain high concentrations ofmetal additives. Using them may damage theengine!

159

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice

Diesel

Diesel*

Diesel fuel must conform to DIN EN 590 (EN =“European Standard”). It must have a cetanenumber (CN) of at least 51. The cetane num-ber indicates the ignition quality of the dieselfuel.

Notes on refuelling ››› page 158.

Biodiesel*

CAUTION

● Your vehicle is not designed to use biodie-sel fuel. Never, under any circumstances re-fuel with biodiesel. The use of biodiesel fuelcould damage the engine and the fuel sys-tem. The addition of biodiesel to diesel fuelby the diesel manufacturer in accordancewith standard EN 590 or DIN 51628 is author-ised and will not cause damage to the engineor the fuel system.

● The diesel engine has been designed to beused exclusively with diesel fuel conformingto standard EN 590. Never refuel or use pet-rol, kerosene, fuel oil or any other type offuel. If you accidentally fill up the vehiclewith the wrong type of fuel, do not start theengine. Seek assistance from specialised per-sonnel. The composition of these fuels mayseverely damage the fuel system and the en-gine.

Winter operation

Winter-grade diesel

When using “summer-grade diesel fuel”, dif-ficulties may be experienced at temperaturesbelow 0 °C (+32 °F) because the fuel thickensdue to wax separation. For this reason, “win-ter-grade diesel fuel” is available in somecountries during the cold months. It can beused at temperatures as low as -22 °C (-8 °F).

In countries with different climatic conditionsthe diesel fuel generally sold has differenttemperature characteristics. Check with theTechnical Services or filling stations in thecountry concerned regarding the type of die-sel fuels available.

Filter pre-heater

Your vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter glowplug system, making it well equipped for op-eration in winter. This ensures that the fuelsystem remains operational to approx. -24 °C(-11 °F), provided you use winter-grade dieselwhich is safe to -15 °C (+5 °F).

However, if the fuel has waxed to such an ex-tent that the engine will not start at tempera-tures of under -24 °C (-11 °F), simply leavethe vehicle in a heated area for a while.

CAUTION

Do not mix fuel additives, the so-called “thin-ners”, or similar additives with diesel fuel.

LPG system (Liquefiedpetroleum gas)*

Refuelling with LPG3 Applies to the model: ALTEA / ALTEA XL

Fig. 140 Fuel tank open with LPG filler neckand adapter

160


Fig. 141 LPG tank in spare wheel well

Before refuelling, turn off the engine andswitch off the ignition and mobile telephone››› .

Read carefully the instructions on how to usethe LPG pump.

Opening the fuel tank cap

The LPG filler neck is behind the fuel cap,next to the petrol filler neck.

● The tank flap is located on the rear right-hand side of the vehicle.

● Open the fuel tank flap.

Refuelling

● Remove the plug from the gas filler mouth››› Fig. 140 1 .

● Screw the required adapter 2 onto theLPG gas filler neck.

● Refuel as indicated in the pump instruc-tions.

● The fuel tank will be full when the pumpcompressor automatically cuts the supply.

● If you wish to finish refuelling sooner, re-lease the button on the pump to stop theflow.

Closing the fuel tank cap

● Unscrew the adapter from the gas fillerneck 2 .

● Screw the cap onto the gas filler neck 1 .

● Close the fuel tank flap. The cover shouldbe flush with the bodywork.

WARNING

Incorrect handling of LPG can cause explo-sions, fire, serious burns and other injuries.

● LPG is a highly explosive and inflammablesubstance.

● Small quantities of LPG may leak out afterrefuelling. If LPG comes into contact with theskin there is a risk of freezing.

Note

● The vehicle includes one adapter for thecountry in question, the most common one.We generally recommend that you carry allthe adapters in your vehicle, as some coun-tries use more than one type of filling sys-tem.

● If the outside temperature is very high, theprotection against overheating for the LPGpump may disconnect automatically.

● If the outside temperature is very high, thepressure of the LPG tank may be equal to orgreater than that of the gas tank of the LPGpump. In this case, refuelling will be physi-cally impossible.

● The filling nozzles of LPG pumps can differin the way they are operated. If you do notknow, ask a qualified employee at the petrolstation to do the refuelling.

● Noises heard when refuelling are normaland do not indicate the presence of a fault inthe system.

161

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice

Adapter for the

Fig. 142 General table of LPG filler neckadapters

An adapter is required due to the existence ofa range of pumps with different nozzles.

ACME adapter (adapter for Europe)

Dish Coupling Adapter (adapter for Italy)

Bayonet adapter

EURO adapter (adapter for Spain)

The supply includes the adapter for the coun-try in question, the ACME 1 , the Dish Cou-

1

2

3

4

pling 2 , the bayonet 3 or the EURO adapt-er 4 .

The filler systems and corresponding adapt-ers vary according to country. As petrol sta-tions abroad do not always have the neces-sary adapters for your LPG system, we recom-mend you purchase the appropriate adapterbefore travelling abroad. Check that theadapters are suited to your filling system.

Note

The four most common types of adapter in Eu-rope are the ACME adapter 1 , the Dish Cou-pling adapter 2 , the bayonet adapter 3 andthe EURO adapter 4 . We generally recom-mend that you carry all four adapters in yourvehicle, as some countries use more than onetype of filling system. The introduction of asingle system (Euronozzle) throughout Eu-rope is being studied.

Fixed adapter3 Applies to the market: Spanish

Fig. 143 Fuel tank flap open with EURO-typeconnector.

The end of the filling tube has a EURO-typeconnector so that you can refill LPG withouthaving to use an additional adapter››› Fig. 143.

LPG fuel

LPG is an alternative vehicle fuel and is ablend of propane and butane.

The success of LPG is due to the strict regula-tions concerning exhaust gas emissions.Compared to other fossil fuels, LPG is charac-terised by its reduced emissions.

162


LPG quality and consumption

Quality requirements for LPG are regulatedfor all Europe in DIN EN 589 and permit theuse of LPG throughout Europe.

A difference is drawn between winter gas andsummer gas. Winter gas has a higher propor-tion of propane gas. As a result, the drivingrange of winter gas may be lower (due to in-creased consumption) than that of summergas.

LPG supplier network

The number of LPG pumps is constantly in-creasing.

Lists of existing LPG pumps may be found onInternet.

LPG safety

A series of collision tests performed on thisvehicle while running with LPG have con-firmed its high level of safety.

The safety of the LPG system guarantees op-eration without risk. The following safetymeasures have been adopted:

● The LPG tank has a solenoid valve whichcloses automatically when the engine isswitched off (ignition off) or when running onpetrol.

● A solenoid type main valve disconnects thesupply of gas to the engine compartmentwhen the engine is switched off or runningon petrol.

● A safety valve in the LPG tank with pipes tothe outside prevents the gas from enteringthe vehicle interior.

● All anchorage points and materials havebeen designed to ensure the maximum pos-sible levels of safety.

The condition of the LPG system should bechecked regularly to guarantee safe drivingconditions ››› . These checks are includedin the Maintenance Programme.

WARNING

● If there is a smell of gas or a suspectedleak, stop the vehicle immediately and switchoff the ignition. Open the doors to ventilatethe vehicle. Do not carry on driving! Take thevehicle to a specialised workshop and havethe fault repaired.

● Immediately extinguish any cigarettes andremove from the vehicle any objects whichmight produce a spark or cause a fire, andswitch off immediately if gas is smelt or aleak is detected.

● LPG tanks are subject to pressure and mustbe checked regularly. The owner of the vehi-cle must check that these services are per-formed correctly.

● When parking the vehicle in a closed area(e.g. in a garage), make sure that there is ad-equate ventilation, either natural or mechani-cal, to neutralise the LPG in the event of aleak.

Note

For any fault in the LPG system, please referto the SEAT web page, which lists the work-shops authorised to repair these faults.

Working in the enginecompartment

Safety instructions on working in theengine compartment

Before starting any work on the engine or inthe engine compartment:

1. Switch off the engine and remove the keyfrom the ignition.

2. Apply the handbrake.

3. Move the gear lever to neutral or the selec-tor lever to position P.

4. Wait for the engine to cool down.

5. Keep children away from the vehicle.

6. Raise the bonnet ››› page 165. »

163

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice

You should not do any work in the enginecompartment unless you know exactly how tocarry out the jobs and have the correct tools!Have the work carried out by a specialisedworkshop if you are uncertain.

All service fluids and consumables, e.g. cool-ant, engine oil, spark plugs and batteries,are under constant development. SEAT pro-vides a constant flow of information to Tech-nical Services concerning modifications. Forthis reason, we recommend you have servicefluids and consumables replaced by a Techni-cal Service. Please observe the relevant in-structions ››› page 147. The engine compart-ment of the vehicle is a hazardous area.››› .

WARNING

All work on the engine or in the engine com-partment, e.g. checking and refilling fluids,involves the danger of injury and burns, acci-dents and even fire.

● Never open the bonnet if you see steam,smoke or coolant escaping from the enginecompartment. Otherwise, there is a risk ofsustaining burns. Wait until no more steam orcoolant is emitted, then allow the engine tocool before carefully opening the bonnet.

● Switch off the engine and remove the keyfrom the ignition.

● Apply the handbrake and move the gearlever to neutral or selector lever to position P.

● Keep children away from the vehicle.

● Never touch hot engine parts. There is arisk of burns.

● Never spill liquids on a hot engine or on ahot exhaust gas system. This is a fire hazard.

● Avoid causing short-circuits in the electri-cal system, particularly at the points wherethe jump leads are attached ››› page 190. Thebattery could explode.

● Never touch the radiator fan. It is tempera-ture controlled and could start automatically,even when the engine has been switched offand the key removed from the ignition!

● Never cover the engine with additional in-sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk offire!

● Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant ex-pansion tank when the engine is hot. If thecoolant is hot, the cooling system will bepressurised!

● Protect face, hands and arms by coveringthe cap with a large, thick cloth to protectagainst escaping coolant and steam.

● Always make sure you have not left any ob-jects, such as cleaning cloths or tools, in theengine compartment.

● If you have to work underneath the vehicle,you must use suitable stands additionally tosupport the vehicle, there is a risk of acci-dent!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for se-curing the vehicle and there is a risk of injury.

● If any work has to be performed when theengine is started or with the engine running,there is an additional, potentially fatal, safetyrisk from the rotating parts, such as the drive

belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and fromthe high-voltage ignition system. You shouldalso observe the following:

– Never touch the electrical wiring of theignition system.

– Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing andlong hair do not get trapped in rotatingengine parts. Danger of death. Beforestarting any work remove jewellery, tieback and cover hair, and wear tight-fit-ting clothes.

– Never accelerate with a gear engagedwithout taking the necessary precau-tions. The vehicle could move, even if thehandbrake is applied. Danger of death.

● If work has to be carried out on the fuelsystem or on electrical components, youmust observe the following safety notes inaddition to the above warnings:

– Always disconnect the battery from theon-board network. The vehicle must beunlocked when this is done, otherwisethe alarm will be triggered.

– Do not smoke.

– Never work near naked flames.

– Always have a fire extinguisher on hand.

CAUTION

When topping up service fluids, make surenot to mistake them. Using the wrong fluidscould cause serious malfunctions and enginedamage!

164



Service fluids leaks are harmful to the envi-ronment. For this reason you should makeregular checks on the ground underneathyour vehicle. If you find spots of oil or otherfluids, have your vehicle inspected in a speci-alised workshop.

Opening the bonnet

Fig. 144 Detail of footwell area on driver side:lever for unlocking the bonnet

Fig. 145 Handle for releasing the bonnet.

The bonnet is released from inside the vehi-cle.

Before opening the bonnet ensure that thewindscreen wipers are in rest position.

– To release the bonnet, pull the lever underthe dash panel ››› Fig. 144 in the directionindicated (arrow). The bonnet will be re-leased by a spring action ››› .

– Lift the bonnet using the release lever (ar-row) and open the bonnet.

– Release the bonnet stay and secure it inthe fixture designed for this in the bonnet.

WARNING

Hot coolant can scald!

● Never open the bonnet if you see steam,smoke or coolant escaping from the enginecompartment.

● Wait until no more steam, smoke or coolantis emitted from the bonnet, then carefullyopen the bonnet.


Closing the bonnet

– Slightly lift the bonnet.

– Release the bonnet stay and replace it in itssupport.

– At a height of approximately 30 cm let it fallso it locks.

If the bonnet does not close, do not pressdownwards. Open it once more and let it fallas before.

WARNING

If the bonnet is not closed properly, it couldopen while you are driving and completelyobscure your view of the road. Risk of acci-dent.

● After closing the bonnet, always check thatit is properly secured. The bonnet must beflush with the surrounding body panels.

● If you notice that the bonnet latch is not se-cured when the vehicle is moving, stop thevehicle immediately and close the bonnetproperly. Risk of accident.

165

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice

Checking fluid levels

Fig. 146 Diagram for the location of the vari-ous elements.

From time to time, the levels of the differentfluids in the vehicle must be checked. Neverfill with incorrect fluids, otherwise seriousdamage to the engine may be caused.

Coolant expansion tank

Windscreen washer reservoir

Engine oil filler cap

Engine oil dipstick

Brake fluid reservoir

Vehicle battery (underneath the cover)

The checking and refilling of service fluidsare carried out on the components men-tioned above. These operations are descri-bed in the ››› page 163.

1

2

3

4

5

6

Overview

You will find further explanations, instruc-tions and restrictions on the technical speci-fications as of ››› page 207.

Engine oil

General notes

The engine comes with a special, multi-gradeoil that can be used all year round.

Because the use of high-quality oil is essen-tial for the correct operation of the engineand its long useful life, when topping up orchanging oil, use only those oils that complywith VW standards.

The specifications (VW standards) set out onthe following page should appear on the con-tainer of the service oil; when the containerdisplays the specific standards for petrol anddiesel engines together, it means that the oilcan be used for both types of engines.

We recommend that the oil change indicatedin the Maintenance Programme be performedby a technical service or a specialised work-shop.

The correct oil specifications for your engineare listed in the ››› page 167, Oil properties.

Service intervals

Service intervals can be flexible (LongLifeservice) or fixed (dependent on time/dis-tance travelled).

If the PR code that appears on the back of theMaintenance Programme booklet is PR QI6,this means that your vehicle is programmedwith the LongLife service. If it lists the codesQI1, QI2, QI3, QI4 or QI7, the interval serviceis dependent on time/distance travelled.

Flexible service intervals (LongLife serviceintervals*)

Special oils and processes have been devel-oped which, depending on characteristicsand individual driving profiles, allow forgreater intervals between oil change services(LongLife service intervals).

Because this oil is essential for extending theservice intervals, it must only be used ob-serving the following indications:

● Avoid mixing it with oil for fixed service in-tervals.

● Only in exceptional circumstances, if theengine oil level is too low ››› page 167 andLongLife oil is not available, it is permitted totop up (once) with oil for fixed service inter-vals ››› page 167 (up to a maximum of 0.5 li-tres).

166


Fixed service intervals*

If your vehicle does not have the “LongLifeservice interval” or it has been disabled (byrequest), you may use oils for fixed serviceintervals, which also appear in ››› page 167,Oil properties. In this case, your vehicle mustbe serviced after a fixed interval of 1year/15 000 km (10 000 miles)(whatevercomes first) ››› Booklet Maintenance Pro-gramme.

● In exceptional circumstances, if the engineoil level is too low ››› page 167 and you can-not obtain the oil specified for your vehicle,you can put in a small quantity of oil con-forming to the specification ACEA A2 orACEA A3 (petrol engines) or ACEA B3 orACEA B4 (diesel engines) (up to 0.5 l).

Vehicles with a diesel particulate filter*

The Maintenance Programme states whetheryour vehicle is fitted with a diesel particulatefilter.

Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ashformation, may be used in diesel enginesequipped with particulate filter. Using othertypes of oil will cause a higher soot concen-tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There-fore:

● Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.

● Only in exceptional circumstances, if theengine oil level is too low ››› page 167 and

you cannot obtain the oil specified for yourvehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil(once) conforming to the VW 506 00,VW 506 01, VW 505 00, VW 505 01 orACEA B3/ACEA B4 specification. (up to 0.5 l).

Oil properties

Engine type Specification

Petrol without flexibleservice interval

VW 502 00/VW 504 00

Petrol with flexible serv-ice interval (LongLife)

VW 504 00

Diesel. Engines withoutParticulate filter (DPF)

VW 505 01/VW 506 01/VW507 00

Diesel. Particulate FilterEngines (DPF).With or without flexibleservice interval (withand without LongLife)a)

VW 507 00

a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage theengine.

Engine oil additives

No type of additive should be mixed with theengine oil. The deterioration caused by theseadditives is not covered by the warranty.

Note

Before a long trip, we recommend finding anengine oil that conforms to the correspond-ing VW specifications and recommend keep-ing it in the vehicle. This way, the correct en-gine oil will always be available for a top-up ifneeded.

Checking the engine oil level

Fig. 147 Engine oil dipstick.

The engine oil dipstick indicates the level ofthe oil.

Checking oil level

– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

– Briefly run the engine at idle speed untilthe operating temperature is reached andthen stop.

– Wait for about two minutes. »167

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice

– Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick witha clean cloth and insert it again, pushing itin as far as it will go.

– Then pull it out once more and check the oillevel ››› Fig. 147. Top up with engine oil ifnecessary.

Oil level in area A

Do not add oil ››› .

Oil level in area B

You can add oil, but keep the level inthis zone.

Oil level in area C

Oil must be added. Afterwards, the oillevel should be in the lined area B .

Depending on how you drive and the condi-tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con-sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oilconsumption is likely to be higher for the first5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil levelmust be checked at regular intervals, prefera-bly when filling the tank and before a jour-ney.

WARNING

Any work carried out in the engine compart-ment or on the engine must be carried outcautiously.

–

–

–


CAUTION

If the oil level is above the area A do notstart the engine. This could result in damageto the engine and catalytic converter. Contacta Technical Service.

Topping up engine oil

Fig. 148 In the engine compartment: Engineoil filler cap

Before opening the bonnet, read and observethe warnings ››› in Safety instructions onworking in the engine compartment onpage 163.

– Unscrew cap from engine oil filler opening››› Fig. 148.

– Top-up oil in small amounts, using the cor-rect oil.

– To avoid over-filling with engine oil, youshould top-up using small quantities, waita while and check the oil level before add-ing any more oil.

– As soon as the oil level is in area B , care-fully close the cap.

The position of the oil filler opening is shownin the corresponding engine compartment il-lustration ››› page 166.

Engine oil specification ››› page 166.

WARNING

Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oilcomes into contact with hot engine compo-nents when topping up.

CAUTION

If the oil level is above the area A do notstart the engine. This could result in damageto the engine and catalytic converter. Contacta specialised workshop.


The oil level must never be above area A .Otherwise oil can be drawn in through thecrankcase breather and escape into the at-mosphere via the exhaust system.

168


Changing engine oil

The engine oil must be changed at the inter-vals given in the service schedule.

We recommend that you have the engine oilchanged by a Technical Service.

The oil change intervals are shown in theMaintenance Programme.

WARNING

Only change the engine oil yourself if youhave the specialist knowledge required!

● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-serve the warnings ››› page 163, Safety in-structions on working in the engine compart-ment.

● Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oilmay cause burn injuries.

● Wear eye protection to avoid injuries, suchas acid burns, caused by splashes of oil.

● When removing the oil drain plug with yourfingers, keep your arm horizontal to help pre-vent oil from running down your arm.

● Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes intocontact with engine oil.

● Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must bestored in a safe place out of the reach of chil-dren.

CAUTION

No additives should be used with engine oil.This could result in engine damage. Any dam-age caused by the use of such additiveswould not be covered by the factory warranty.


● Because of disposal problems and the spe-cial tools and specialist knowledge required,we recommend that you have the engine oiland filter changed by a Technical Service.

● Never pour oil down drains or into theground.

● Use a suitable container when draining theused oil. It must be large enough to hold allthe engine oil.

Cooling system

Engine coolant specifications

The engine cooling system is supplied fromthe factory with a specially treated mixture ofwater and, at least, 40 % of the additive G 13(TLVW 774 J). The engine coolant additive isrecognisable by its purple colour. This mix-ture of water and additive gives the necessa-ry frost protection down to -25°C (-13 F) andprotects the light alloy parts of the coolingsystem against corrosion. It also prevents

scaling and considerably raises the boilingpoint of the coolant.

To protect the engine cooling system, thepercentage of additive must always be atleast 40 %, even in warm climates where an-ti-freeze protection is not required.

If greater frost protection is required in verycold climates, the proportion of additive canbe increased. However, the percentage of ad-ditive should not exceed 60%, as this wouldreduce frost protection and, in turn, decreasecooling capacity.

When the coolant is topped up, use a mixtureof distilled water and, at least, 40 % of the G13 or G 12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive(both are purple) to obtain an optimum anti-corrosion protection ››› . The mixture of G13 with G 12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G 12 (red) orG 11 (green-blue) engine coolants will signifi-cantly reduce the anticorrosion protectionand should, therefore be avoided ››› .

WARNING

If there is not enough anti-freeze in the cool-ant system, the engine may fail leading to se-rious damage.

● Please make sure that the percentage ofadditive is correct with respect to the lowestexpected ambient temperature in the zonewhere the vehicle is to be used.

● When the outside temperature is very low,the coolant could freeze and the vehicle »

169

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice

would be immobilised. In this case, the heat-ing would not work either and inadequatelydressed passengers could die of cold.

CAUTION

The original additives should never be mixedwith coolants which are not approved bySEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk of causingsevere damage to the engine and the enginecooling system.

● If the fluid in the expansion tank is not pur-ple but is, for example, brown, this indicatesthat the G 13 additive has been mixed withan inadequate coolant. The coolant must bechanged as soon as possible if this is thecase! This could result in serious faults andengine damage.


Coolants and additives can contaminate theenvironment. If any fluids are spilled, theyshould be collected and correctly disposedof, with respect to the environment.

Checking the coolant level andtopping up

Fig. 149 Engine compartment: coolant expan-sion tank cap.

Top up coolant when the level is below theMIN (minimum) mark.

Before opening the bonnet, read and observethe warnings ››› in Safety instructions onworking in the engine compartment onpage 163.

Opening the coolant expansion tank

– Switch off the engine and allow it to cool.

– To prevent scalding, cover the cap on thecoolant expansion tank with a thick clothand carefully unscrew the cap ››› .

Checking coolant level

– Look into the open coolant expansion tankand read off the coolant level.

– If the level is below the “MIN” mark, top upwith coolant.

Topping up coolant

– Only use new coolant liquid.

– Do not fill above the “MAX” mark.

Closing the coolant expansion tank

– Screw the cap on again tightly.

The position of the coolant expansion reser-voir is shown in the corresponding enginecompartment illustration ››› page 166.

Make sure that the coolant meets the re-quired specifications ››› page 169. Do not usea different type of additive if additive G12+ isnot available. In this case use only water andbring the coolant concentration back up tothe correct level as soon as possible by put-ting in the specified additive ››› page 169.

Always top up with new coolant.

Do not fill above the “MAX” mark. Otherwisethe excess coolant will be forced out of thecooling system when the engine is hot.

The coolant additive G12+ (dyed purple) maybe mixed with G12 (dyed red) and also with G11.

170


WARNING



● When the engine is warm or hot, the cool-ing system is pressurised! Do not unscrewthe cap on the coolant expansion tank whenthe engine is hot. This is a burn injury risk.

CAUTION

● When mixed with other additives the colourof G12 will change to brown. If this occursyou should have the coolant changed imme-diately. Failure to do so will result in enginedamage!

● If a lot of coolant fluid has been lost, waitfor the engine to cool. This avoids damagingthe engine. Large coolant losses are an indi-cation of leaks in the cooling system. See aspecialised workshop immediately and havethe cooling system checked. Otherwise, thereis a risk of engine damage.

Windscreen washer reservoir

Topping up washer fluid

Fig. 150 In the engine compartment: Cap ofwindscreen washer fluid reservoir

The windscreen washer and the headlightwashers are supplied with fluid from thewindscreen washer fluid container in the en-gine compartment. The container holds ap-prox. 3 litres; in vehicles with headlightwashers* it holds approx. 5.5 litres.

The reservoir is located on the right-handside of the engine compartment.

Plain water is not enough to clean the wind-screen and headlights. We recommend thatyou always add a product to the windscreenwasher fluid. Approved windscreen cleaningproducts exist on the market with high deter-gent and anti-freeze properties, these may beadded all-year-round. Please follow the dilu-tion instructions on the packaging.

WARNING



CAUTION

● Never put radiator anti-freeze or other addi-tives into the windscreen washer fluid.

● Always use approved windscreen cleansingproducts diluted as per instructions. If youuse other washer fluids or soap solutions,the tiny holes in the fan-shaped nozzlescould become blocked.

171

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice

Brake fluid

Checking the brake fluid level

Fig. 151 Engine compartment: brake fluidreservoir cap

– Read off the fluid level at the transparentbrake fluid reservoir. It should always bebetween the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.

The position of the brake fluid reservoir isshown in the corresponding engine compart-ment illustration ››› page 166. The brake fluidreservoir has a black and yellow cap.

The brake fluid level drops slightly when thevehicle is being used as the brake pads areautomatically adjusted as they wear.

However, if the level goes down noticeably ina short time, or drops below the “MIN” mark,there may be a leak in the brake system. Adisplay on the instrument panel will warn youif the brake fluid level is too low ››› page 35.

WARNING

Before opening the bonnet to check the brakefluid level, read and observe the warnings››› page 163.

Changing the brake fluid

The Maintenance Programme indicates brakefluid change intervals.

We recommend that you have the brake fluidchanged by a Technical Service.

Before opening the bonnet, please read andfollow the warnings ››› in Safety instruc-tions on working in the engine compartmenton page 163 in section “Safety notes forworking in the engine compartment”.

In the course of time, brake fluid becomeshygroscopic and absorbs water from the am-bient air. If the water content in the brake flu-id is too high, the brake system could cor-rode. This also considerably reduces the boil-ing point of the brake fluid. Heavy use of thebrakes may then cause a vapour lock whichcould impair the braking effect.

Be sure to always use the correct brake fluid.Only use brake fluid that expressly meets theVW 501 14 standard.

You can buy VW 501 14 standard brake fluidat a SEAT dealership or a SEAT Official Serv-ice. If none is available, use only high-quality

brake fluid that meets DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4standards, or USA Standards FMVSS 116 DOT4.

Using any other kind of brake fluid or onethat is not of a high quality may affect opera-tion of the brake system and reduce its effec-tiveness. Never use a brake fluid if the con-tainer does not state that it complies with VW501 14, DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, orUSA standards FMVSS 116 DOT 4.

WARNING

Brake fluid is poisonous. Old brake fluid im-pairs the braking effect.

● Before opening the bonnet to check thebrake fluid level, read and observe the warn-ings ››› page 163.

● Brake fluid should be stored in the closedoriginal container in a safe place out of reachof children. There is a toxic risk.

● Perform the brake fluid change according tothe Maintenance Programme. Heavy use ofthe brakes may cause a vapour lock if thebrake fluid is left in the brake system for toolong. This would seriously affect the effec-tiveness of the brakes and the safety of thevehicle. This may cause an accident.

CAUTION

Brake fluid damages the vehicle paintwork.Wipe off any brake fluid from the paintworkimmediately.

172



The brake pads and brake fluid must be col-lected and disposed of according the applica-ble regulations. The SEAT Technical Servicenetwork has the necessary equipment andqualified personnel for collecting and dispos-ing of this waste material.

Vehicle battery

Warnings on handling the battery

Wear eye protection

Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear pro-tective gloves and eye protection!

Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking areprohibited!

A highly explosive mixture of gases is releasedwhen the battery is under charge.

Keep children away from acid and batteries!

WARNING

Always be aware of the danger of injury andchemical burns as well as the risk of accidentor fire when working on the battery and theelectrical system:

● Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes,skin and clothing from acid and particles con-taining lead.

● Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wearprotective gloves and eye protection. Do nottilt the batteries. This could spill acid throughthe vents. Rinse battery acid from eyes imme-diately for several minutes with clear water.Then seek medical care immediately. Neutral-ise any acid splashes on the skin or clothingwith a soapy solution, and rinse off with plen-ty of water. If acid is swallowed by mistake,consult a doctor immediately.

● Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking areprohibited. When handling cables and electri-cal equipment, avoid causing sparks andelectrostatic charge. Never short the batteryterminals. High-energy sparks can cause in-jury.

● A highly explosive mixture of gases is re-leased when the battery is under charge. Thebatteries should be charged in a well-ventila-ted room only.

● Keep children away from acid and batteries.

● Before working on the electrical system,you must switch off the engine, the ignitionand all electrical devices. The negative cableon the battery must be disconnected. When alight bulb is changed, you need only switchoff the light.

● Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlock-ing the vehicle before you disconnect the bat-tery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered.

● When disconnecting the battery from thevehicle on-board network, disconnect firstthe negative cable and then the positive ca-ble.

● Switch off all electrical devices before re-connecting the battery. Reconnect first thepositive cable and then the negative cable.Never reverse the polarity of the connections.This could cause an electrical fire.

● Never charge a frozen battery, or one whichhas thawed. This could result in explosionsand chemical burns. Always replace a batterywhich has frozen. A flat battery can alsofreeze at temperatures close to 0 °C (+32 °F).

● Ensure that the vent hose is always connec-ted to the battery.

● Never use a defective battery. This couldcause an explosion. Replace a damaged bat-tery immediately.

CAUTION

● Never disconnect the battery if the ignitionis switched on or if the engine is running.This could damage the electrical system orelectronic components.

● Do not expose the battery to direct sunlightover a long period of time, as the intense ul-traviolet radiation can damage the batteryhousing.

● If the vehicle is left standing in cold condi-tions for a long period, protect the batteryfrom “freezing”. If it freezes it will be dam-aged.

173

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice

Checking the electrolyte level

The electrolyte level should be checked regu-larly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot coun-tries and in older batteries.

– Open the bonnet and open the battery cov-er at the front ››› in Safety instructionson working in the engine compartment onpage 164 ››› in Warnings on handlingthe battery on page 173.

– Check the colour display in the "magic eye"on the top of the battery.

– If there are air bubbles in the window, tapthe window gently until they disperse.

The position of the battery is shown in thecorresponding engine compartment diagram››› page 166.

The “magic eye” indicator, located on the topof the battery changes colour, depending onthe charge state and electrolyte level of thebattery.

There are two different colours:

● Black: correct charge status.

● Transparent/clear yellow: the battery mustbe replaced. Contact a specialised workshop.

Charging and changing the vehiclebattery

The battery is maintenance-free and ischecked during the inspection service. Allwork on the vehicle battery requires special-ist knowledge.

If you often drive short distances or if the ve-hicle is not driven for long periods, the bat-tery should be checked by a specialisedworkshop between the scheduled services.

If the battery has discharged and you haveproblems starting the vehicle, the batterymight be damaged. If this happens, we rec-ommend you have the vehicle batterychecked by a Technical Service where it willbe re-charged or replaced.

Charging the battery

The vehicle battery should be charged by aspecialised workshop only, as batteries us-ing special technology have been installedand they must be charged in a controlled en-vironment.

Replacing a vehicle battery

The battery has been developed to suit theconditions of its location and has specialsafety features.

Genuine SEAT batteries meet the mainte-nance, performance and safety specificationsof your vehicle.

WARNING

● We recommend you use only maintenance-free or cycle free leak-proof batteries whichcomply with standards T 825 06 andVW 7 50 73. This standard applies as of2001.

● Before starting any work on the batteries,you must read and observe the warnings››› in Warnings on handling the battery onpage 173.


Batteries contain toxic substances such assulphuric acid and lead. They must be dis-posed of appropriately and must not be dis-posed of with ordinary household waste.

174

Wheels

Wheels

Wheels and tyres

General notes

Avoiding damage

– If you have to drive over a kerb or similarobstacle, drive very slowly and at a rightangle.

– Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

– Inspect the tyres regularly for damage(cuts, cracks or blisters, etc.). Remove anyforeign objects embedded in the treads.

Storing tyres

– When you remove the tyres, mark them inorder to maintain the same direction of ro-tation when they are installed again.

– When removed, the wheels and/or tyresshould be stored in a cool, dry and prefera-bly dark location.

– Store tyres in a vertical position if they arenot fitted on wheel rims.

New tyres

New tyres must be run in ››› page 130.

The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac-cording to the type and make of tyre and thetread pattern.

Concealed damage

Damage to tyres and rims is often not readilyvisible. If you notice unusual vibrations or thevehicle pulling to one side, this may indicatethat one of the tyres is damaged. Theyshould be checked immediately by a Techni-cal Service.

Tyres with directional tread pattern

An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di-rection of rotation on tyres with directionaltread. Always observe the direction of rota-tion indicated when fitting the wheel. Thisguarantees optimum grip and helps to avoidaquaplaning, excessive noise and wear.

WARNING

● New tyres do not have maximum grip dur-ing the first 500 km (300 miles). Drive partic-ularly carefully to avoid possible accidents.

● Never drive with damaged tyres. This maycause an accident.

● If you notice unusual vibrations or if the ve-hicle pulls to one side when driving, stop thevehicle immediately and check the tyres fordamage.

Checking tyre pressure

The correct tyre pressure can be seen on thesticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap.

1. Read the required tyre inflation pressurefrom the sticker. The values refer to Sum-mer tyres. For winter tyres, you must add0.2 bar (2.9 psi / 20 kPa) to the valuesgiven for summer tyres.

2. The tyre pressures should only be checkedwhen the tyres are cold. The slightly raisedpressures of warm tyres must not be re-duced.

3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load youare carrying.

Tyre pressure

The correct tyre pressure is especially impor-tant at high speeds. The pressure shouldtherefore be checked at least once a monthand before starting a journey.

The sticker with the tyre pressure values canbe found on the inside of the fuel tank flap.The tyre pressure values given are for coldtyres. Do not reduce the slightly raised pres-sures of warm tyres ››› .

WARNING

● Check the tyre pressure at least once permonth. Checking the tyre pressure is very im-portant. If the tyre pressure is too high or toolow, there is an increased danger of accidents- particularly at high speeds.

● A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is toolow, causing an accident! »

175

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice

● At continuously high speeds, a tyre with in-sufficient pressure flexes more. In this way itbecomes too hot, and this can cause treadseparation and tyre blow-out. Always observethe recommended tyre pressures.

● If the tyre pressure is too low or too high,the tyres will wear prematurely and the vehi-cle will not handle well. Risk of accident!


Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-sumption.

Tyre pressure monitoring

The tyre pressure monitoring system con-stantly checks the pressure of the tyres.

The system uses the speed sensors of theABS wheels. It operates by analysing thespeed and frequency spectrum of eachwheel.

For optimum performance, use genuine SEATtyres. In addition, check and adjust tyre pres-sures regularly.

Whenever the tyre pressure is are changed orone or more tyres are changed, the systemshould be reset by pressing the SET buttonon the centre console.

The system warns the driver in the event of aloss of pressure by means of symbols and

messages in the instrument panel display.The system operates via the ESC ››› page 134.

Note that tyre pressure also depends on tyretemperature. Said pressure increases around0.1 bar (2.9 psi/10 kPa) for each +10 °C(+50 °F) in tyre temperature increase. The tyreheats up while the vehicle is being drivenand the tyre pressure will rise accordingly.Therefore, you should only adjust the tyrepressure when they are cold (i.e. approxi-mately at ambient temperature).

To ensure that the tyre pressure monitoringsystem works reliably, you should check and,if necessary, adjust the tyre pressures at reg-ular intervals and store the correct pressures(reference values) in the system.

A tyre pressure information label is attachedto the inside of the fuel tank flap.

WARNING

● Never adjust tyre pressure when the tyresare hot. This may damage or even burst thetyres. Risk of accident!

● An insufficiently inflated tyre flexes a lotmore at high speeds and causes significantheating of the tyre. Under these conditions,the tyre bead may be released or the tyre mayburst. Risk of accident!


Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuelconsumption and tyre wear.

Significant tyre pressure loss

The tyre symbol is displayed and indicatesthat the tyre pressure of at least one tyre isinsufficient.

– Stop the vehicle.


– Check the tyre(s).

– Change the wheel if necessary.

176

Wheels

Tyre useful life

Fig. 152 Tyre tread wear indicators.

Fig. 153 Diagram for changing wheels

The useful life of tyres is dependent on tyrepressure, driving style and fitting.

Wear indicators

The original tyres on your vehicle have1.6 mm high “tread wear indicators”››› Fig. 152, running across the tread. De-

pending on the make, there will be 6 to 8 ofthem evenly spaced around the tyre. Mark-ings on the tyre sidewall (for instance the let-ters “TWI” or other symbols) indicate the po-sitions of the tread wear indicators. The mini-mum tread depth required by law is 1.6 mm(measured in the tread grooves next to thetread wear indicators). Worn tyres must be re-placed. Different figures may apply in exportcountries ››› .

Tyre pressure

Incorrect tyre pressure causes prematurewear and could cause tyre blow-out. For thisreason, the tyre pressure should be checkedat least once per month ››› page 175.

Driving style

Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hardbraking all increase tyre wear.

Changing wheels around

If the front tyres are worn considerably morethan the rear ones it is advisable to changethem around as shown ››› Fig. 153. The use-ful life of all the tyres will then be about thesame time.

Wheel balance

The wheels on new vehicles are balanced.However, various factors encountered in nor-mal driving can cause them to become unbal-anced, which results in steering vibration.

Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, asthey otherwise cause excessive wear onsteering, suspension and tyres. A wheel mustalso be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted.

Incorrect wheel alignment

Incorrect wheel alignment causes excessivetyre wear, impairing the safety of the vehicle.If tyres show excessive wear, you shouldhave the wheel alignment checked by a Tech-nical Service.

WARNING

There is a serious danger of accidents if a tyrebursts during driving!

● The tyres must be replaced at the latestwhen the tread wear indicators are worn››› page 177. Failure to follow this instructioncould result in an accident. Worn tyres do notgrip well at high speeds on wet roads. Thereis also a greater risk of “aquaplaning”.

● At continuously high speeds, a tyre with in-sufficient pressure flexes more. This causes itto overheat. This can cause tread separationand tyre blow-out. Risk of accident. Alwaysobserve the recommended tyre pressures.

● If tyres show excessive wear, you shouldhave the running gear checked by a TechnicalService.

● Keep chemicals such as oil, fuel and brakefluid away from tyres.

● Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-placed immediately! »

177

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice


Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-sumption.

Run-flat tyres

Run-flat tyres allow you to continue drivingeven with a punctured tyre, in the majority ofcases.

In vehicles that are factory-fitted with run-flattyres1) the loss of tyre pressure is indicatedon the instrument panel.

Driving with run-flat tyres (emergencyrunning)

– Leave the ESC/ASR on (Electronic StabilityControl), or switch it on ››› page 137.

– Continue driving carefully and slowly(80 km/h [50 mph] maximum).

– Avoid sudden manoeuvres and sharp turns.

– Avoid driving over obstacles (e.g. kerbs) orpotholes.

– Pay attention if the ESC/ASR activates of-ten, if smoke comes from the tyres or thereis a smell of rubber, the vehicle vibrates orthere are clattering noises. If any of theseoccur, stop the vehicle.

The run-flat tyres have a tag on the side ofthe tyre, with the description: “DSST”, “Eufo-nia”, “RFT”, “ROF”, “RSC”, “SSR” or “ZP”.

The sides of this type of tyre are reinforced.When the tyres lose air they are supported onthe sides (emergency driving).

The loss of pressure in the tyre is shown onthe instrument panel. You can then drive amaximum of 80 km (50 miles) and if the cir-cumstances are favourable (e.g. low load),even more.

The damaged tyre should be changed assoon as possible. The rim should be checkedin a specialised workshop to detect possibledamage and replace it if necessary. We rec-ommend you contact your technical service.If more than one tyre is being used underemergency conditions, this reduces the dis-tance that can be travelled.

Starting driving in emergency conditions

When loss in tyre pressure is displayed onthe instrument panel, this means that at leastone tyre is being driven in emergency condi-tions ››› .

End of emergency operation

Do not drive on if:

● smoke is coming from one of the tyres,

● there is a smell of rubber,

● the vehicle vibrates,

● there is a rattling noise.

When is it no longer possible to continuedriving even using run-flat tyres?

● If one of the tyres has been severely dam-aged in an accident, etc. If a tyre has beenbadly damaged there is a risk that parts ofthe tread can be thrown off and cause dam-age to the fuel lines, brake pipes or fuel filler.

● It is also advisable to stop driving if severevibrations occur, or if the wheel starts over-heating and gives off smoke.

WARNING

When driving in emergency conditions, thedriving quality of the vehicle is considerablyimpaired.

● The maximum permitted speed of 80 km/h(50 mph) is subject to road and weather con-ditions. Please observe related legal require-ments.

● Avoid sharp turns and rapid manoeuvres,and brake earlier than usual.

● Avoid driving over obstacles (e.g. kerbs) orpotholes.

● If one or more tyres are being driven inemergency conditions, the driving quality of

1) Depending upon version and country.178

Wheels

the vehicle is impaired and there is a risk ofaccident.

Note

● The run-flat tyres do not “deflate” on losingpressure because they are supported on thereinforced sides. Therefore defects in the tyrecannot be detected with a visual inspection.

● Snow chains must not be used on fronttyres used in emergency conditions.

New tyres and wheels

New tyres and wheels have to be run in.

The tyres and wheel rims are an essentialpart of the vehicle's design. Those approvedby SEAT are specially matched to the charac-teristics of the vehicle and make a major con-tribution to good road-holding and safe han-dling ››› .

Note for Italy: A SEAT Service Centre shouldbe consulted whether different sized wheelsor tyres to those originally fitted by SEAT maybe fitted, as well as the combinations al-lowed between the front axle (axle 1) andback axle (axle 2).

Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs andnot individually (i.e. both front tyres or bothrear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre des-ignations makes it easier to choose the cor-

rect tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designa-tions marked on the sidewall, for example:

195/65 R15 91T

This contains the following information:

Tyre width in mm

Height/width ratio in %

Tyre construction: Radial

Rim diameter in inches

Load rating code

Speed rating

The tyres could also have the following infor-mation:

● A direction of rotation symbol

● “Reinforced” denotes heavy-duty tyres.

The manufacturing date is also indicated onthe tyre sidewall (possibly only on the innerside of the wheel).

“DOT... 1103...” means, for example, that thetyre was produced in the 11th week of 2003.

We recommend that work on tyres andwheels be carried out by a Technical Service.They are familiar with the procedure andhave the necessary special tools and spareparts as well as the proper facilities for dis-posing of the old tyres.

195

65

R

15

91

T

Any technical service has full information onthe technical requirements when installing orchanging tyres, wheels or wheel trims.

On vehicles with all-wheel drive, all four tyresmust always be fitted with tyres of the sametype, make and tread pattern, as otherwisethe driveline can be damaged by continuousdifferences in the wheel speeds. For this rea-son, the spare wheel should have the samewheel dimensions as the normal wheels sothat it will fit if there is a puncture. You mayalso use the factory-supplied compact tem-porary spare wheel.

WARNING

● We recommend that you use only wheelsand tyres which have been approved by SEATfor your model. Failure to do so could impairvehicle handling. Risk of accident.

● Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that aremore than 6 years old. If you have no alterna-tive, you should drive slowly and with extracare at all times.

● Never use old tyres or those with an un-known “history of use”.

● If wheel trims are retrofitted, you must en-sure that the flow of air to the brakes is notrestricted. This could cause the brake systemto overheat.

● All four wheels must be fitted with radialtyres of the same type, size (rolling circumfer-ence) and the same tread pattern. »

179

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice


Old tyres must be disposed of according tothe laws in the country concerned.

Note

● For technical reasons, it is not generallypossible to use the wheels from other vehi-cles. This can also apply to wheels of thesame model. The use of wheels or tyreswhich have not been approved by SEAT foruse with your model may invalidate the vehi-cle's type approval for use on public roads.

● If the spare tyre is not the same as thetyres that are mounted on the vehicle (e.g.winter tyres) you should only use the sparetyre for a short period of time and drive withextra care. Refit the normal road wheel assoon as possible.

Wheel bolts

The design of wheel bolts is matched to therims. If different wheel rims are fitted, thecorrect wheel bolts with the right length andcorrectly shaped bolt heads must be used.This ensures that wheels are fitted securelyand that the brake system functions correctly.

In certain circumstances, you should not usewheel bolts from a different vehicle, even if itis the same model ››› page 147.

After the wheels have been changed, thetightening torque of the wheel bolts shouldbe checked as soon as possible with a torquewrench ››› . The tightening torque for steeland alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

WARNING

If the wheel bolts are not tightened correctly,the wheel could become loose while driving.Risk of accident.

● The wheel bolts must be clean and turneasily. Never apply grease or oil to them.

● Use only wheel bolts which belong to thewheel.

● If the tightening torque of the wheel boltsis too low, they could loosen whilst the vehi-cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tight-ening torque is too high, the wheel bolts andthreads can be damaged.

CAUTION

The prescribed tightening torque for wheelbolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

Winter service

Winter tyres

In winter conditions winter tyres will consid-erably improve the vehicle's handling. Sum-

mer tyres (width, rubber compound, treadpattern) provide less grip on ice and snow.

Winter tyres must be inflated to a pressure of0.2 bar (2.9 psi/20 kPa) higher than the pres-sures specified for summer tyres (see stickeron fuel tank flap).

Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels.

Information on permitted winter tyre sizescan be found in the vehicle's registrationdocumentation. Use only radial winter tyres.All tyre sizes listed in the vehicle documenta-tion also apply to winter tyres.

Winter tyres lose their effectiveness when thetread is worn down to a depth of 4 mm.

The speed rating code ››› page 179, Newtyres and wheels determines the followingspeed limits for winter tyres: ›››

max. 160 km/h

max. 180 km/h

max. 190 km/h

max. 210 km/h

In some countries, vehicles which can exceedthe speed rating of the fitted tyre must havean appropriate sticker in the driver's field ofview. These stickers are available from yourtechnical service. The legal requirements ofeach country must be followed.

Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessa-rily long periods. Vehicles with summer tyres

Q

S

T

H

180

Emergencies

handle better when the roads are free ofsnow and ice.

If you have a flat tyre, please refer to thenotes on the spare wheel ››› page 179, Newtyres and wheels.

WARNING

The maximum speed for the winter tyres mustnot be exceeded. Otherwise, this could leadto damage and risk of accident.


Fit your summer tyres again as soon as possi-ble. They are quieter, do not wear so quicklyand reduce fuel consumption.

Snow chains

Snow chains are only permitted on frontwheels and only for tyres 195/65R15 and205/55R16. These tyres may only be fittedwith fine-pitch link chains which do not pro-trude more than 15 mm ››› page 210.

Other tyres may use fine-pitch links which donot protrude more than 9 mm, including ten-sion device.

Remove wheel hub covers and trim rings be-fore fitting snow chains. For safety reasons,cover caps, available at any technical service,must then be fitted over the wheel bolts.

All-wheel drive: where snow chains are com-pulsory, this normally also applies to all-wheel drive vehicles. Snow chains may onlybe fitted to the front wheels (also on vehicleswith all-wheel drive).

WARNING

Snow chains should be correctly tightened inaccordance with the manufacturer's instruc-tions. This will prevent the chains coming in-to contact with the wheel housing.

CAUTION

Remove the snow chains to drive on roadswithout snow. Otherwise they will impairhandling, damage the tyres and wear out veryquickly.

Note

● In some countries, the maximum permittedspeed with snow chains is 50 km/h (31 mph).The legal requirements of each country mustbe followed.

● We recommend that you ask your technicalservice for information about appropriatewheel, tyre and snow chain size.

Emergencies

Vehicle tools, spare wheel

Vehicle Tools

The vehicle tools are located under the floorpanel in the luggage compartment.

– Lift the cover of the luggage compartment,by pulling it up with a finger in the fitting.

– Take the vehicle tools out of the vehicle.

The vehicle tool kit includes:

● Jack.*

● Hook for removing wheel covers* or wheeltrims*

● Box spanner for wheel bolts.*

● Towing ring.

● Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*

Some of the items listed are only provided incertain model versions, or are optional ex-tras.

WARNING

● The factory-supplied jack is only designedfor changing wheels on this model. On no ac-count attempt to use it for lifting heavier ve-hicles or other loads. Risk of injury.

● Use the jack only on a firm, level ground. »

181

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice

● Never start the engine when the vehicle ison the jack. Risk of accident.

● If work is to be carried out underneath thevehicle, this must be secured by suitablestands. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury.

Note

The jack does not generally require any main-tenance. If required, it should be greased us-ing universal-type grease.

Compact spare wheel* (temporaryspare wheel)

Fig. 154 Luggage compartment. Accessingthe spare wheel.

The compact spare wheel (temporary sparewheel for vehicles without the anti-puncturekit) should only be used when strictly neces-sary.

The temporary spare wheel is stored underthe floor panel in the luggage compartmentand is attached by a thumbnut.

How to use the temporary spare wheel

Should you ever have a punctured tyre, thecompact temporary spare wheel is only inten-ded for temporary use until you can reach aworkshop. The standard-size road wheelshould be replaced as soon as possible.

Please note the following restrictions whenusing the temporary spare wheel. This tem-porary spare wheel has been specially de-signed for your vehicle, thus, it cannot be re-placed by a temporary spare wheel from an-other vehicle.

No other type of tyre (normal summer or win-ter tyre) may be fitted on the compact tempo-rary spare wheel rim.

Snow chains

For technical reasons, snow chains must notbe used on the compact temporary sparewheel.

If you have a puncture on one of the frontwheels when using snow chains, fit the com-pact temporary spare wheel in place of one ofthe rear wheels. You can then attach thesnow chains to the wheel taken from the rearand use this wheel to replace the puncturedfront wheel.

WARNING

● The tyre pressures must be checked andcorrected as soon as possible after fitting thetemporary spare wheel. The pressure of thespare wheel sized 125/70R16 125/70R18135/90R16 should be 4.2 bar(61 psi/420 kPa). For other sizes, check thelabel on the fuel cap. Failure to follow this in-struction could result in an accident.

● Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph),since higher speeds can cause an accident.

● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking andfast cornering. Risk of accident.

● Never use more than one temporary sparewheel at the same time, risk of accident.

● No other type of tyre (normal summer orwinter tyre) may be fitted on the compacttemporary spare wheel rim.

Wheel change

Preparation work

– If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park thevehicle as far away from the flow of trafficas possible. Choose a location that is aslevel as possible.

– All vehicle occupants should leave the ve-hicle. They should wait in a safe area (forinstance behind the roadside crash barri-er).

182

Emergencies

– Switch off the engine. Switch on the hazardwarning lights.

– Apply the handbrake firmly.

– Engage the first gear, or put the selectorlever to position P for those vehicles withan automatic gearbox.

– If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it fromyour vehicle.

– Take the vehicle tools and the spare wheelout of the luggage compartment.

WARNING

Put the hazard warning lights on and placethe warning triangle in position. This is foryour own safety and also warns other roadusers.

CAUTION

If you have to change the tyre on a gradient,block the wheel opposite the wheel beingchanged by placing a stone or similar objectunder it to prevent the vehicle from rollingaway.

Note

Please observe related legal requirements.

Changing a wheel

Change the wheel as described below:

– Remove the wheel cover. Also refer to››› Fig. 155.

– Slacken the wheel bolts.

– Raise the vehicle with the jack at the corre-sponding area.

– Remove the wheel and put on the spareone.

– Lower the vehicle.

– Tighten the wheel bolts firmly with the boxspanner.

– Replace the hub cap.

After changing a wheel

– Put the tools back in their storage location.

– Place the wheel with the defective tyre inthe luggage compartment and secure it.

– Check the tyre pressure of the newly fittedtyre as soon as possible.

– Have the tightening torque of the wheelbolts checked as soon as possible with atorque wrench. The prescribed torque mustbe 120 Nm.

Note

● If you notice that the wheel bolts are corro-ded and difficult to turn when changing a

wheel, they must be replaced before havingthe wheel bolt tightening torque checked.

● For safety reasons, drive at moderatespeeds until the wheel bolt tightening torquehas been checked.

Wheel trims

Fig. 155 Changing a wheel: remove the wheeltrim.

The wheel trims must be removed to gain ac-cess to the wheel bolts.

Removing

– Insert the extraction hook from the tools in-to the designated ring, located in one ofthe bolt hole covers of the wheel cover››› Fig. 155. »

183

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice

– Pull off the hub cap.

Wheel covers*

Fig. 156 Changing a wheel: remove the wheelcover.

The wheel covers must be removed for accessto the wheel bolts.

Removing

– Remove the wheel cover using the wirehook ››› Fig. 156.

– Hook this into one of the cut-outs of thewheel cover.

Fitting

– Fit the wheel cover onto the wheel rim bypressing it firmly. Put pressure initially onthe point of the cut-out for the valve. Thenpress the wheel cover onto the steel rim sothat it engages all round.

Loosening the wheel bolts

Fig. 157 Changing a wheel: loosen the wheelbolts.

The wheel bolts must be loosened beforeraising the vehicle.

Loosening

– Fit the box spanner as far as it will go overthe wheel bolt.

– Grasp the box spanner by the end turn itabout one full turn to the left ››› Fig. 157.

Tightening

– Fit the box spanner as far as it will go overthe wheel bolt.

– Grasp the box spanner close to the end andturn the bolt to the right until it is secured.

– An adapter is required to unscrew or tight-en the anti-theft wheel bolts.

WARNING

Loosen the wheel bolts (only about one turn)before raising the vehicle with the jack, oth-erwise there is a risk of accident.

Note

● If the wheel bolt is very tight, you may beable to loosen it by pushing down the end ofthe spanner carefully with your foot. Hold onto the vehicle for support and take care not toslip.

184

Emergencies

Lifting the vehicle

Fig. 158 Jack position points

Fig. 159 Fitting the jack.

In order to remove the wheel, the vehiclemust be raised with a jack.

– Locate the jacking point under the door sillclosest to the punctured wheel ››› Fig. 158.

– Place the jack under the jacking point andturn the crank until the arm of the jack is di-

rectly below the vertical rib under the doorsill.

– Align the jack so that the arm of the jackfits around the rib under the door sill andthe movable base plate of the jack is flat onthe ground ››› Fig. 159.

– Raise the vehicle until the defective wheelis just clear of the ground.

Recesses at the front and rear of the doorsills mark the jacking points ››› Fig. 158.There is only one jacking point for eachwheel. Do not fit the jack anywhere else.

An unstable surface under the jack maycause the vehicle to slip off the jack. There-fore, it must be fitted on solid ground offer-ing good support. Use a large and stablebase, if necessary. On a hard, slippery sur-face (such as tile) use a rubber mat or similarto prevent the jack from slipping.

WARNING

● Take all precautions so that the base of thejack does not slip. Failure to follow this in-struction could result in an accident.

● The vehicle can be damaged if the jack isnot applied at the correct jacking points.There is also a risk of injury since the jack canslip off suddenly if it is not properly engaged.

Jack position points for vehicles withsill panel trim*

Fig. 160 Plastic sill panel trim with jack an-chor cover.

Vehicles with plastic sill panel trim, withcover*

– Remove the cap A to access the anchorpoint for the vehicle jack ››› Fig. 160.

– Pull on the cover and remove it from its al-lotment in the direction of the arrow››› Fig. 160.

– Once the cover has been released, it will re-main connected to its strap so that is notlost.

185

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice

Removing and fitting the wheel

Change the wheel as described below afterloosening the wheel bolts and raising the ve-hicle with the jack.

Removing a wheel

– Unscrew the wheel bolts using the boxspanner and place them on a clean surface.

Fitting a wheel

– Screw on the wheel bolts in position andtighten them loosely with a box spanner.

The wheel bolts should be clean and easilyscrewed. Before fitting the spare wheel, in-spect the wheel condition and hub mountingsurfaces. These surfaces must be clean be-fore fitting the wheel.

If tyres with a specific direction of rotationare fitted, note the direction of rotation.

Anti-theft wheel bolts*

Fig. 161 Anti-theft wheel bolt.

A special adapter is required to turn the anti-theft wheel bolts.

– Insert the adapter onto the wheel bolt andpush it on as far as it will go ››› Fig. 161.

– Fit the box spanner as far as it will go overthe adapter.

– Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt as appro-priate.

Code

The code number of the anti-theft wheel boltis stamped onto the front part of the adaptor.

The code number should be noted and keptin a safe place, as it is only by using the codenumber that a duplicate adaptor can be ob-tained from the SEAT Official Services.

Tyres with directional tread pattern

A directional tread pattern can be identifiedby arrows on the sidewall that point in the di-rection of rotation. Always note the directionof rotation indicated when fitting the wheel.This is important so that these tyres can pro-vide maximum grip and avoid excessivenoise, tread wear and aquaplaning.

If, in an emergency, you have to mount thespare wheel so it rotates in the wrong direc-tion, you must drive extremely carefully. Thetyre will not give optimum performance. Thisis particularly important when driving on wetroads.

To benefit from the advantages of tyres withthis type of tread pattern, the defective tyreshould be replaced as soon as possible sothat all tyres again rotate in the correct direc-tion.

Tyre repair

TMS (Tyre Mobility System)*

The Anti-puncture Kit* (Tyre Mobility System)will reliably seal punctures caused by thepenetration of a foreign body of up to about4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign ob-jects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.

186

Emergencies

After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre,you must again check the tyre pressure about10 minutes after starting the engine.

You should only use the tire mobility set ifthe vehicle is parked in a safe place, you arefamiliar with the procedure and you have thenecessary tire mobility set! Otherwise, youshould seek professional assistance.

The tyre sealant must not be used in thefollowing cases:

● If the wheel rim has been damaged.

● In outside temperatures below -20 °C(-4 °F).

● In the event of cuts or perforations in thetyre greater than 4 mm.

● If you have been driving with very low pres-sure or a completely flat tyre.

● If the sealant bottle has passed its use bydate.

WARNING

Using the tyre mobility system can be dan-gerous, especially when filling the tyre at theroadside. Please observe the following rulesto minimise the risk of injury:

● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.Park it at a safe distance from surroundingtraffic to fill the tyre.

● Ensure the ground on which you park is flatand solid.

● All passengers and particularly childrenmust keep a safe distance from the work area.

● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warnother road users.

● Use the tyre mobility system only if you arefamiliar with the necessary procedures. Oth-erwise, you should seek professional assis-tance.

● The tyre mobility set is intended for tempo-rary emergency use only until you can reachthe nearest specialised workshop.

● Replace the repaired tyre with the tire mo-bility set as soon as possible.

● The sealant is a health hazard and must becleaned immediately if it comes into contactwith the skin.

● Always keep the tire mobility set out of thereach of small children.

● Never use an equivalent jack, even if it hasbeen approved for your vehicle.

● Always stop the engine, apply the hand-brake lever firmly and engage gear if using amanual gearbox, in order to reduce the risk ofvehicle involuntary movement.

WARNING

A tyre filled with sealant does not have thesame performance properties as a conven-tional tyre.

● Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).

● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking andfast cornering.

● Drive only during 10 minutes at a maximumspeed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and subsequentlycheck the tyre.


Dispose of used or expired sealant observingany legal requirements.

Note

● A new bottle of sealant can be purchased atSEAT dealerships.

● Take into account the separate instructionmanual from the tyre mobility set* manufac-turer.

Contents of the tyre mobility system*

Fig. 162 Standard representation: contents ofthe tyre mobility system. »

187

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice

The tyre mobility set is located underneaththe floor covering in the boot. It includes thefollowing components ››› Fig. 162:

Tyre valve remover

Sticker indicating maximum speed “max.80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”

Filler tube with cap

Air compressor

Tube for inflating tyres

Warning provided by tyre pressure moni-toring system1)

Air bleed screw2)

ON/OFF switch

12 volt connector

Bottle of sealant

Spare tyre valve

The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at thelower end for a valve insert. The valve insertcan only be screwed or unscrewed in thisway. This also applies to its replacement part11 .

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

Sealing and inflating a tyre

Sealing a tyre

● Unscrew the tyre valve cap.

● Use the enclosed extractor to unscrew thevalve insert ››› Fig. 162 1 and place thevalve insert on a clean surface.

● Vigorously shake the sealant bottle››› Fig. 162 10 for several seconds.

● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 162 3 se-curely into the sealant bottle in a clockwisedirection. The seal on the mouth of the bottlemoves automatically.

● Remove the lid from the filling tube››› Fig. 162 3 and screw the open end of thetube into the tyre valve.

● Hold the tyre sealant can upside down andfill the complete contents of the can into thetyre.

● Remove the tyre sealant bottle from thevalve.

● Screw the valve insert into the tyre valveagain with the corresponding tool ››› Fig. 162

1 .

Inflating the tyre

● Securely screw the tyre inflator tube››› Fig. 162 5 of the compressor into the tyrevalve.

● Check whether the air bleed screw››› Fig. 162 7 is closed.

● Start the vehicle engine and leave it run-ning.

● Attach the connector ››› Fig. 162 9 to oneof the vehicle's 12 volt sockets ››› page 99.

● Connect the air compressor with theON/OFF switch ››› Fig. 162 8 .

● Keep the air compressor running until itreaches 2.0 to 2.5 bar (29-36 psi /200-250 kPa) ››› . Maximum operation time8 minutes ››› .

● Disconnect the air compressor.

● If it is not possible to achieve an air pres-sure of 2.0 to 2.5 bar (29-36 psi /200-250 kPa), unscrew the tyre inflator tubefrom the tyre valve.

● Move the vehicle some 10 metres forwardor backward so that the sealant is evenly dis-tributed in the tyre interior.

● Securely screw the compressor tyre inflatortube into the tyre valve and repeat the infla-tion process.

1) It can also be integrated in the compressor.2) In its place, the compressor may have a button.

188

Emergencies

● If the indicated pressure still cannot bereached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Thetyre cannot be sealed with the anti-puncturekit. Do not continue driving. You should ob-tain professional assistance ››› .

● Disconnect the air compressor and unscrewthe flexible inflator tube from the tyre valve.

● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and2.0 bars, immediately continue driving with-out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).

● After 10 minutes, Check the pressure again››› page 189.

WARNING

When inflating the wheel, the air compressorand the inflator tube may become hot.

● Protect hands and skin from hot parts.

● Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube orhot air compressor on flammable material.

● Allow them to cool before storing the de-vice.

● If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to atleast 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre istoo badly damaged. The sealant is not in agood condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.

CAUTION

Switch off the air compressor after a maxi-mum of 8 operational minutes to prevent itfrom overheating! Before switching on the air

compressor again, let it cool for several mi-nutes.

Check after 10 minutes of driving

Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 162 5 againand check the pressure on the gauge 6 .

1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower:

● Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be sealedsufficiently with the tyre mobility set.

● You should obtain professional assistance››› .

1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher:

● Set the tyre pressure to the correct valueagain.

● Carefully resume your journey until youreach the nearest specialised workshop with-out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).

● Have the damaged tyre replaced.

WARNING

Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerousand can cause accidents and serious injury.

● Do not continue driving if the tyre pressureis 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower.

● Seek specialist assistance.

Jump-starting

Jump leads

The jump lead must have a sufficient wirecross section.

If the engine fails to start because of a dis-charged battery, the battery can be connec-ted to the battery of another vehicle to startthe engine.

Jump leads

Jump leads must comply with standard DIN72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc-tions). The wire cross section must be at least25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least35 mm2 for diesel engines.

Note

● The vehicles must not touch each other,otherwise electricity could flow as soon asthe positive terminals are connected.

● The discharged battery must be properlyconnected to the on-board network.

189

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice

How to jump start: description

Fig. 163 Diagram of connections for vehicleswithout Start-Stop system.

Fig. 164 Diagram of connections for vehicleswith Start-Stop system.

Jump lead terminal connections

1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles››› .

2. Connect one end of the red jump lead tothe positive + terminal of the vehiclewith the flat battery A ››› Fig. 163.

3. Connect the other end of the red jumplead to the positive terminal + in the ve-hicle providing assistance B .

4. For vehicles without Start-Stop system:connect one end of the black jump lead tothe negative terminal – in the vehicleproviding assistance B ››› Fig. 163.

– For vehicles with Start-Stop system: Con-nect one end of the black jump lead X to asuitable ground terminal, a solid piece ofmetal in the engine block, or to the engineblock itself ››› Fig. 164.

5. Connect the other end of the black jumplead X to a solid metal component boltedto the engine block or to the engine blockitself of the vehicle with the flat battery.Do not connect it to a point near the bat-tery A .

6. Position the leads in such a way that theycannot come into contact with any movingparts in the engine compartment.

Starting

7. Start the vehicle's engine with the boost-ing battery and let it run at idling speed.

8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the flatbattery and wait 2 or 3 minutes until theengine is “running”.

Removing the jump leads

9. Before you remove the jump leads, switchoff the dipped beam headlights (if theyare switched on).

10.Turn on the heater blower and heated rearwindow in the vehicle with the flat battery.This helps minimise voltage peaks whichare generated when the leads are discon-nected.

11.When the engine is running, disconnectthe leads in reverse order to the detailsgiven above.

Connect the battery clamps so they havegood metal-to-metal contact with the batteryterminals.

If the engine fails to start, switch off the start-er after about 10 seconds and try again afterabout a minute.

WARNING

● Please note the safety warnings referring toworking in the engine compartment››› page 163, Working in the engine compart-ment.

● The battery providing assistance must havethe same voltage as the flat battery (12 V)and approximately the same capacity (seeimprint on battery). Failure to comply couldresult in an explosion.

● Never use jump leads when one of the bat-teries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even

190

Emergencies

after the battery has thawed, battery acidcould leak and cause chemical burns. If a bat-tery freezes, it should be replaced.

● Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettesaway from batteries, danger of explosion.Failure to comply could result in an explo-sion.

● Observe the instructions provided by themanufacturer of the jump leads.

● Do not connect the negative cable from theother vehicle directly to the negative terminalof the flat battery. The gas emitted from thebattery could be ignited by sparks. Danger ofexplosion.

● Do not attach the negative cable from theother vehicle to parts of the fuel system or tothe brake line.

● The non-insulated parts of the batteryclamps must not be allowed to touch. Thejump lead attached to the positive batteryterminal must not touch metal parts of the ve-hicle, this can cause a short circuit.

● Position the leads in such a way that theycannot come into contact with any movingparts in the engine compartment.

● Do not lean on the batteries. This could re-sult in chemical burns.

Note

The vehicles must not touch each other, oth-erwise electricity could flow as soon as thepositive terminals are connected.

Towing and tow-starting

Tow-starting

We recommend that you do not tow-start yourvehicle. Jump-starting is preferable››› page 189.

However, if your vehicle has to be tow-started:

– Engage 2nd or 3rd gear.

– Keep the clutch pressed down.


– Once both vehicles are moving, release theclutch.

– As soon as the engine starts, press theclutch and move the gear lever into neutral.This helps to prevent driving into the tow-ing vehicle.

WARNING

The risk of accidents is high when tow-start-ing. The vehicle being towed can easily col-lide with the towing vehicle.

CAUTION

When tow-starting, fuel could enter the cata-lytic converter and damage it.

General notes

Please observe the following points if youuse a tow rope:

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle

– Drive slowly at first until the tow rope istaut. Then accelerate gradually.

– Begin and change gears cautiously. If youare driving an automatic vehicle, accelerategently.

– Remember that the brake servo and powersteering are not working in the vehicle youare towing. Brake sooner than normal andpressing the pedal gently.

Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle

– Ensure that the tow rope remains taut at alltimes when towing.

Tow rope or tow bar

It is easier and safer for the vehicle to be tow-ed using a tow bar. You should only use atow-rope if you do not have a tow-bar.

A tow rope should be slightly elastic to re-duce the loading on both vehicles. It is advis-able to use a tow rope made of synthetic fi-bre or similarly elastic material.

Attach the tow rope or the tow bar only to thetowline anchorages provided or a towingbracket. »

191

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice

Driving style

Towing requires some experience, especiallywhen using a tow rope. Both drivers shouldbe familiar with the technique required fortowing. Inexperienced drivers should not at-tempt to tow.

Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicleand take care to avoid jerking the tow rope.When towing on an unpaved road, there is al-ways a risk of overloading and damaging theanchorage points.

The ignition of the vehicle being towed mustbe switched on to prevent the steering wheelfrom locking and also to allow the use of theturn signals, horn, windscreen wipers andwashers.

The brake servo only works when the engineis running. When not running, you must ap-ply considerably more pressure to the brakepedal.

As the power assisted steering does not workif the engine is not running, you will needmore strength to steer than you normallywould.

● The vehicle must not be towed faster than50 km/h (31 mph).

Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox

● Put the selector lever into position “N”.

● Do not drive faster than 50 km/h (31 mph).

● Do not tow further than 50 km.

● If a breakdown vehicle is used, the vehiclemust be towed with the front wheels raised.

Note

● Observe legal requirements when towing ortow-starting.

● Switch on the hazard warning lights of bothvehicles. However, observe any regulationsto the contrary.

● For technical reasons, vehicles with an au-tomatic gearbox must not be tow-started.

● If there is no lubricant in the gearbox as theresult of a fault, you must raise the drivenwheels while the vehicle is being towed.

● If the vehicle has to be towed more than50 km, the front wheels should be raised dur-ing towing, and towing should be carried outby a qualified person.

● The steering wheel is locked when the vehi-cle has no electrical power. The vehicle mustthen be towed with the front wheels raised.Towing should be carried out by a qualifiedperson.

● The towline anchorage should always bekept in the vehicle. Please refer to the noteson ››› page 191, Tow-starting.

Towline anchorages

Fig. 165 Fitting the front towline anchorageto the front right section of the vehicle.

Fig. 166 Fitting the towline anchorage to therear of the vehicle.

Front towline anchorage

– Take the towline anchorage from the on-board tool set.

– Remove the cover by pressing down on itsleft-hand side.

192

Emergencies

– Bolt the anchorage to its limit to the left, inthe direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 165.

Rear towline anchorage

– Take the towline anchorage from the on-board tool set.

– Remove the cover by pressing down on itsright-hand side.

– Bolt the anchorage to its limit to the left, inthe direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 166.

After use, unscrew the towline anchorageand put it back in the vehicle tool kit. Replacethe cover on the bumper. The towline anchor-age should always be kept in the vehicle.

Emergency locking andunlocking

Emergency manual locking

Fig. 167 Emergency door locking.

This permits mechanical locking of the doorsin case of central locking system failure.

Locking the driver door manually

Insert the key in the door lock cylinder androtate in a clockwise direction for the lefthand side door and anticlockwise for theright hand side door.

Once the door has been closed it can no lon-ger be opened from the outside.

Manual (emergency) locking of theremaining doors

Open the door and remove the cap A

››› Fig. 167 printed with a lock image. This

will expose a circular element with a groovein the centre. Insert the key into the grooveand rotate the element clockwise for the righthand side doors and anticlockwise for theleft hand side doors.

Replace the cap and close the door. Once thedoor has been locked it can no longer beopened from the outside.

Unlocking the manually (emergency) lockeddriver door

Insert the key in the door lock cylinder androtate anticlockwise for the left hand sidedoors and clockwise for the right hand sidedoors.

The door lock is released and the door maybe opened using the exterior door handle.

Unlocking the remaining manually(emergency) locked doors

First the driver door must be unlocked to gainentry to the vehicle. Operate the internal doorhandle for the required door. If the childprooflock is activated on the rear doors, when theinterior door release lever is operated thedoor is unlocked but does not open. The doormust be opened from the outside.

Note

Once the vehicle is open, if you wish to lock itmanually, repeat the previous instructions.

193

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice

Emergency boot hatch opening

Fig. 168 Rear lid: emergency opening.

This allows the vehicle to be opened if thecentral locking does not work (for example, ifthe battery is flat)

There is a groove in the luggage compart-ment allowing access to the emergencyopening mechanism.

Opening the rear lid from inside the luggagecompartment

– Insert the key in the groove and unlock thelocking system, turning the key from rightto left, as shown by the arrow ››› Fig. 168.

Changing the wiper blades

Changing windscreen wiper blades

Fig. 169 Windscreen wipers in the service po-sition.

Fig. 170 Changing the windscreen wiperblades

Perfect wiper blade condition is essential forclear vision. Damaged wiper blades shouldbe replaced immediately.

To change the blades it is necessary to movethe wipers from the rest position into theservice position.

Service position (for changing wiper blades)

– Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.

– Turn the ignition on and off and then (with-in approximately 8 seconds), push thewindscreen wiper lever out of the shortwipe position. The windscreen wipers willmove to the service position.

Changing the windscreen wiper blades

– Lift the wiper arm away from the wind-screen.

– Push the side buttons, free the blade andpull in the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 170

Fitting the wiper blade

– Insert a blade of identical length and de-sign into the wiper arm.

– Slide the blade until it clicks into position.

– Push the wiper arms back against the wind-screen.

The windscreen wiper arms return to theiroriginal position when the ignition is turnedon and the windscreen wiper lever is operat-ed, or when driving faster than 6 km/h.

194

Emergencies

If the windscreen wipers scratch, they shouldbe replaced if they are damaged, or cleanedif they are soiled.

If this does not produce the desired results,the setting angle of the windscreen wiperarms might be incorrect. They should bechecked by a specialised workshop and cor-rected if necessary.

WARNING

Do not drive unless you have good visibilitythrough all windows!

● Clean the windscreen wiper blades and allwindows regularly.

● The wiper blades should be changed onceor twice a year.

CAUTION

● Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers couldscratch the windscreen.

● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paintthinner or similar products to clean the win-dows. This could damage the windscreenwiper blades.

● Never move the windscreen wiper or wind-screen wiper arm manually. This could causedamage.

● To prevent damage to the bonnet and thewindscreen wiper arms, the latter should onlybe lifted off the windscreen when in serviceposition.

Note

● The windscreen wiper arms can be movedto the service position only when the bonnetis properly closed.

Changing the rear wiper blade3 Applies to the model: ALTEA

Fig. 171 Changing the rear window wiperblade.

Perfect rear wiper blade condition is essentialfor clear rear vision. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced immediately.

Removing the wiper blade

– Lift the wiper arm away from the glass

– Slide the blade adapter in the direction ofthe arrow and remove the blade ››› Fig. 171A.


– With one hand, hold the top end of the wip-er arm.

– Place the blade as shown in ››› Fig. 171 Band slide the adapter along until it engag-es.

Check the condition of the wiper blade regu-larly. Change as required.

If the windscreen wiper scrapes, it should bereplaced if damaged, or cleaned if soiled.

If this is not sufficient, refer to a specialisedworkshop.

WARNING




CAUTION

● A damaged or dirty window wiper couldscratch the rear window.

● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paintthinner or similar products to clean the win-dow as they may damage the blades.

● Never move the windscreen wiper by hand.This could cause damage.

195

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice

Changing the rear wiper blade3 Applies to the model: ALTEA XL/ALTEA FREETRACK

Fig. 172 Changing the rear window wiperblade.

Perfect rear wiper blade condition is essentialfor clear rear vision. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced immediately.

Removing the wiper blade

– Lift the rear wiper arm.

– Release the blade 1 by pulling it in the di-rection of the arrow 2 .


– Insert the wiper blade onto the windscreenwiper arm until it clicks into place.

Check the condition of the wiper blade regu-larly. Change as required.

If the windscreen wiper scrapes, it should bereplaced if damaged, or cleaned if soiled.

If this is not sufficient, refer to a specialisedworkshop.

WARNING




CAUTION

● A damaged or dirty window wiper couldscratch the rear window.

● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paintthinner or similar products to clean the win-dow as they may damage the blades.

● Never move the windscreen wiper by hand.This could cause damage.

Fuses and bulbs

Fuses

Introduction

Due to the constant updating of vehicles,fuse assignments based on equipment andthe use of the same fuse for various electricalcomponents, it is not possible to provide anup-to-date summary of the fuse positions forthe electrical components at the time thismanual was printed. For detailed informationabout the fuse positions, please consult atechnical service.

In general, a fuse can be assigned to variouselectrical components. Likewise, an electricalcomponent can be protected by severalfuses.

Only replace fuses when the cause of theproblem has been solved. If a newly insertedfuse blows after a short time, you must havethe electrical system checked by a special-ised workshop as soon as possible.

Additional information and warnings:

● Working in the engine compartment››› page 163.

196

Fuses and bulbs

WARNING

The high voltages in the electrical system cangive serious electrical shocks, causing burnsand even death!

● Never touch the electrical wiring of the igni-tion system.

● Take care not to cause short circuits in theelectrical system.

WARNING

Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses orbridging a current circuit without fuses cancause a fire and serious injury.

● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Onlyreplace fuses with a fuse of the same amper-age (same colour and markings) and size.

● Never repair a fuse.

● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, stapleor similar.

CAUTION

● To prevent damage to the vehicle's electricsystem, before replacing a fuse turn off theignition, the lights and all electrical elementsand remove the key from the ignition.

● If you replace a fuse with higher-ratingfuse, you could cause damage to another partof the electrical system.

● Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre-vent the entry of dust or humidity as they candamage the electrical system.

Note

● One component may have more than onefuse.

● Several components may run on a singlefuse.

Vehicle fuses

Fig. 173 Left side of dash panel fuse box cov-er

Fig. 174 In the engine compartment: fuse boxcover

Only replace fuses with a fuse of the sameamperage (same colour and markings) andsize.

Identifying fuses situated below the driver-side dash panel by colours

Colour Amp rating

Purple 3

Light brown 5

Brown 7.5

Red 10

Blue 15

Yellow 20

White or trans-parent

25

Green 30 »197

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice

Colour Amp rating

Orange 40

Opening and closing the fuse box situatedbelow the dash panel

● Opening: fold the cover down ››› Fig. 173.

● Closing: push back the cover it in until itclicks into place.

To open the engine compartment fuse box

● Open the bonnet ››› page 163.

● Press the locking tabs in the direction indi-cated by the arrows to release the fuse boxcover ››› Fig. 174.

● Then lift the cover out.

● To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box.Push the locking tabs down, in the oppositedirection to that indicated by the arrows, un-til you hear them click into place.

CAUTION

● Always carefully remove the fuse box cov-ers and refit them correctly to avoid problemswith your vehicle.

● Protect the fuse boxes when open to avoidthe entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and humid-ity inside fuse boxes can cause damage tothe electrical system.

Note

In the vehicle, there are more fuses thanthose indicated in this chapter. These shouldonly be changed by a specialised workshop.

Replacing a blown fuse

Fig. 175 Image of a blown fuse

Preparation

● Switch off the ignition, lights and all elec-trical equipment.

● Open the corresponding fuse box››› page 197.

Identifying a blown fuse

A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured››› Fig. 175.

Point a lamp at the fuse. This will make iteasier to see if the fuse is blown.

To replace a fuse

● Remove the fuse.

● Replace the blown fuse by one with anidentical amperage rating (same colour andmarkings) and identical size ››› .

● Replace the cover again or close the fusebox lid.

CAUTION

If you replace a fuse with higher-rating fuse,you could cause damage to another part ofthe electrical system.

Changing the lights

General notes

Before changing any bulb, first turn off thefailed device.

Do not touch the glass part of the bulb withyour bare hands. The fingerprints left on theglass will vaporise as a result of the heat gen-erated by the bulb, reducing bulb life andcausing condensation on the reflector sur-face, thus reducing effectiveness.

A bulb must only be replaced by one of thesame type. The type is indicated on the bulb,either on the glass part or on the base.

It is highly recommended to keep a box ofspare bulbs in the vehicle. At the very least,

198

Fuses and bulbs

the following spare bulbs, which are essen-tial for road safety, should be kept in the ve-hicle.

Main headlights

- H7

- H1

- W5W

- PY21W

Xenon headlights1) /adaptive*

- D1S2)

- P21W SLL

- W5W

- PY21W

Front fog light

- H3

Dipped beam

Main beam

Position

Turn signal

Dipped and full beam

Daylight

Position

Turn signals

Front fog light

Upper tail light (ALTEA)

- P21W3)

- R10W

Lower tail light (ALTEA)

- P21W

- P21W

Fixed tail light (ALTEA XL / ALTEA FREETRACK)

- P21W3)

- P21W

Mobile tail light (ALTEA XL / ALTEAFREETRACK)

- P21W

- P21W

- W5W

Stop/Position

Turn signal

Fog light

Reverse light

Stop/Position

Turn signal

Fog light (driver side)

Reverse (passenger side)

Position

Side turn signal

- W5W

Number plate light

- C5W

Note

● Depending on weather conditions (cold orwet), the headlights, the fog lights, the taillights and the turn signals may be temporari-ly misted. This has no influence on the usefullife of the lighting system. By switching onthe lights, the area through which the beamof light is projected will quickly be demisted.However, the edges may continue to be mis-ted.

● Please check at regular intervals that alllighting (especially the exterior lighting) onyour vehicle is functioning properly. This is »

Side turn signal

Number plate light

1) On this type of headlight, the bulb changes mustbe made by the technical service, given that complexelements must be removed from the vehicle and theincorporated automatic control system must be re-set.2) The Xenon bulbs discharge 2.5 times the light fluxand have an average lifespan of 5 times more thanthat of halogen bulbs, this means that, except due tounusual circumstances, there is no need to changethe bulbs for the whole life of the vehicle.3) Electronically controlled single filament bulb forStop/side bulbs. If the bulb blows it will not work ineither position or Stop.

199

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice

not only in the interest of your own safety,but also that of all other road users.

● Due to difficulty of access to some of thebulbs, any replacement work should be doneby a technical service. However, the followingis a description of how to change the lampsexcept for the fog lights* and interior lamps.

Main headlight bulbs

Fig. 176 Main headlight bulbs.

Turn signal

Dipped beam headlights

Main beam headlights

Side light

A

B

C

D

Turn signal bulbs

Fig. 177 Turn signal bulb.

– Raise the bonnet.

– Rotate the bulb holder ››› Fig. 177 A to theleft and pull.

– Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulbholder and turn it anti-clockwise at thesame time.

– Installation involves all of the above stepsin reverse sequence.

Dipped lights

Fig. 178 Dipped beam headlights.

Fig. 179 Dipped beam headlights.


– Move the loops ››› Fig. 178 1 in the direc-tion of the arrow and remove the cover.

– Remove connector ››› Fig. 179 2 from thebulb.

200

Fuses and bulbs

– Unclip the retainer spring ››› Fig. 179 3

pressing inwards to the right.

– Extract the bulb and fit the replacement sothat the lug on the base fits into the recesson the reflector.

Main beam lights

Fig. 180 Main beam headlight.

Fig. 181 Main beam headlight.


– Remove the cover ››› Fig. 180 C by pullingon this.

– Remove connector ››› Fig. 181 1 from thebulb.

– Press the spring ››› Fig. 181 2 inwards andto the right.

– Extract the bulb and fit the replacement sothat it sits correctly into the cut-out on thereflector.


Side lights

Fig. 182 Side light.



– Remove the cover ››› Fig. 182 D by pullingon this.

– Extract the bulb holder ››› Fig. 183 1 out-wards.

– Replace the bulb by pulling it out and in-serting the replacement.

– Installation is done in the reverse order.

201

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice

Side lights/ brake lights3 Applies to the model: ALTEA

Fig. 184 Side lights and brake lights.

Fig. 185 Side lights and brake lights.

– Open the rear lid.

– Remove the bolts ››› Fig. 184 A .

– Remove the cover of the luggage compart-ment lateral panel.

– Unscrew the plastic fitting ››› Fig. 185 B

securing the tail light. Inserting a screw-driver under the plastic fitting may help toloosen it.

– Partially remove the tail light from its cas-ing taking care not to pull on the cable.

– Remove the bulb holder connector.

– Unscrew the bolts ››› Fig. 186 C from thebulb holder and pull on this.

– Press on the bulb and rotate to the left thenfit the replacement.

– To refit follow the steps in reverse order,taking special care when fitting the bulbholder. The metal contacts of the bulb hold-er ends should be correctly fitted with re-spect to the rear light contacts.

Turn signal light3 Applies to the model: ALTEA

Fig. 186 Turn signal light.

Fig. 187 Turn signal light.

– Remove the lamp from its housing››› page 202.

– Unscrew the bolts ››› Fig. 186 C from thebulb holder and pull on this.

202

Fuses and bulbs

– Pull out the turn signal bulb holder using ascrew driver in the direction of the arrow››› Fig. 187.

– Fit the replacement bulb by pressing itdown and rotating to the left.


Reverse light/rear fog light3 Applies to the model: ALTEA

Fig. 188 Lamp on interior side of bumper.

– Rotate the bulb holder to the left and re-move it in the direction of the arrow››› Fig. 188.

– Replace the bulb by pressing on it and ro-tating at the same time to the left

Turn signal, side and brake lights onthe body

3 Applies to the model: ALTEA XL/ALTEA FREETRACK

Fig. 189 Lights on the vehicle body.

Fig. 190 Lights on the vehicle body.

– Open the cover of the luggage compart-ment side panel ››› Fig. 189.

– Turn the bulb holder to the left ››› Fig. 190.

– Remove the blown bulb and change it for anew one.

– To refit follow the steps in reverse order,taking special care when fitting the bulbholder.

203

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice

Position light, fog light and reverselight on the rear lid

3 Applies to the model: ALTEA XL/ALTEA FREETRACK

Fig. 191 Lights on the boot.


Side light A


– Pull the cover off.

– Take the lampholder out pressing on thesecuring pins and extract it outwards.

– Remove the blown bulb and replace it withanother.

– To refit follow the steps in reverse order,taking special care when fitting the bulbholder.

Fog light and reverse lights B


– Pull the cover off.

– Turn the bulb holder to the left.

– Remove the blown bulb and replace it withanother.


Side turn signals

Fig. 193 Side turn signal.

– Press the turn signal to the left or to theright to remove the bulb.

– Remove the bulb holder from the turn sig-nal.

– Remove the failed glass bulb and replacewith a new bulb.

– Insert the bulb holder in the turn signalguide until it clicks into place.

– First place the turn signal in the opening inthe bodywork, fixing the tabs ››› Fig. 193,arrow 1 .

– Insert the bulb as shown by the arrow 2

››› Fig. 193.

204

Fuses and bulbs

Luggage compartment lights

Fig. 194 Boot light.

Fig. 195 Boot light.

– Extract the bulb by pressing on its insideedge -arrow- using the flat side of a screw-driver ››› Fig. 194.

– Press the bulb sideways and remove it fromits housing ››› Fig. 195.

Registration light3 Applies to the model: ALTEA

Fig. 196 Number plate light.


– Remove the bulb, carefully using the flatside of a screwdriver as a lever inserted inthe crack as shown by the arrow››› Fig. 196.

– Remove the bulb, moving it outward and inthe direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 197.

Registration light3 Applies to the model: ALTEA XL/ALTEA FREETRACK



– Unscrew the screws to remove the bulb››› Fig. 198.



205

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Advice

Sun visor light

Fig. 200 Removing the sun visor light.

Fig. 201 Removing the sun visor light.

– Carefully remove the lamp, using the flatside of a screwdriver, as shown in the fig-ure ››› Fig. 201.


206

Technical features

Technical specifications

Technical features

Important information

Important

The information in the vehicle documentationalways takes precedence over the informa-tion in this Instruction Manual.

All technical specifications provided in thisdocumentation are valid for the standardmodel in Spain. The vehicle data card inclu-ded in the Maintenance Programme or thevehicle registration documents shows whichengine is installed in the vehicle.

The figures may be different dependingwhether additional equipment is fitted, fordifferent models, for special vehicles and forother countries.

Abbreviations used in the TechnicalSpecifications section

Ab-brevia-

tion

Meaning

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

PSPferdestärke (horsepower), formerly used todenote engine power.

Ab-brevia-

tion

Meaning

rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

litresper

100 km

Fuel consumption in litres per 100 km (70miles).

g/kmCarbon dioxide emissions in grams per km(mile) travelled.

CO2 Carbon dioxide

CNCetane number, indication of the diesel com-bustion power.

RONResearch octane number, indication of theknock resistance of petrol.

207

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety


Vehicle identification data

Fig. 202 Vehicle data sticker (boot).

Fig. 203 Chassis number.

Vehicles for certain export countries do nothave an identification plate.

Identification plate

The identification plate is located on the leftrib inside the engine compartment.

Vehicle data

The data sticker is placed on the inside of thespare wheel well, in the boot and on the rearcover of the Maintenance Programme.

The following information is provided on thevehicle data sticker: ››› Fig. 202

Vehicle identification number (chassisnumber)

Vehicle type, model, displacement, en-gine type, finish, engine power and gear-box type

Engine code, gearbox code, externalpaint code and internal equipment code

Optional extras and PR numbers

Consumption values (l/100 km) and CO2

emissions (g/km)

A Urban cycle consumption

B Out-of-town consumption

C Combined consumption and CO2

emissions

1

2

3

4

5

Chassis number

The chassis number can be read from outsidethe vehicle through a viewer in the wind-screen ››› Fig. 203. This is located on the left-hand side of the vehicle in the lower cornerof the windscreen. It is also located on theright hand side of the engine compartment.

Information on fuelconsumption

Fuel consumption

The consumption and emission detailsshown on the vehicle data sticker differ fromone vehicle to another.

Vehicle fuel consumption and CO2 emissionscan be consulted on the vehicle data stickerin the spare wheel well, inside the boot andon the rear cover of the Maintenance Pro-gramme.

The fuel consumption and CO2 emission val-ues refer to the weight category assigned toyour vehicle according to the engine andgearbox combination, as well as the specificequipment fitted, and is only used to com-pare between the different models.

The fuel consumption and CO2 emissions donot depend only on the performance of the

208

Technical features

vehicle, they can also differ from the estab-lished values depending on other factorssuch as driving style, road conditions, trafficconditions, environmental conditions, loadand number of passengers.

Calculation of fuel consumption

The consumption values have been calcula-ted based on measurements performed orsupervised by certified CE laboratories ac-cording to the latest version of directives715/2007/EC and 80/1268/CEE (for more in-formation consult the European Union Publi-cations Office at EUR-Lex: © European Union,http://eur-lex.europa.eu/en/index.htm) andare valid for the kerb weight indicated for thevehicle.

Note

In practice, and considering all the factorsmentioned here, consumption values can dif-fer from those calculated in the current Euro-pean regulations.

Weights

Kerb weight refers to the basic model with afuel tank filled to 90% capacity and withoutoptional extras. The figure quoted includes75 kg to allow for the weight of the driver.

For special versions and optional equipmentfittings or for the addition of accessories, theweight of the vehicle will increase ››› .

WARNING

● Please note that the centre of gravity mayshift when transporting heavy objects; thismay affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac-cident. Always adjust your speed and drivingstyle to suit road conditions and require-ments.

● Never exceed the gross axle weight ratingor the gross vehicle weight rating. If the per-missible axle load or the permissible totalweight is exceeded, the driving characteris-tics of the vehicle may change, leading to ac-cidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.

Towing a trailer

Trailer weights

Trailer weight

The trailer weights and drawbar loads ap-proved are selected in intensive trials accord-ing to precisely defined criteria. The ap-proved trailer weights are valid for vehicles inthe EU and generally, for maximum speeds of80 km/h (50 mph) (in certain circumstancesup to 100 km/h (62 mph)). The figures maybe different in other countries. All data in the

official vehicle documentation takes prece-dence over these data at all times ››› .

Drawbar loads

The maximum permitted drawbar load on theball joint of the towing bracket must not ex-ceed 75 kg.

In the interest of road safety, we recommendthat you always tow approaching the maxi-mum drawbar load. The response of the trail-er on the road will be poor if the drawbar loadis too small.

If the maximum permissible drawbar loadcannot be met (e.g. with small, empty andlight-weight single axle trailers or tandemaxle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailerweight is legally required for the drawbarload.

WARNING

● For safety reasons, you should not drive atspeeds above 80 km/h (50 mph) when towinga trailer. This also applies in countries wherehigher speeds are permitted.

● Never exceed the maximum trailer weightsor the drawbar load. If the permissible axleload or the permissible total weight is excee-ded, the driving characteristics of the vehiclemay change, leading to accidents, injuriesand damage to the vehicle.

209

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety


Wheels

Tyre pressure, snow chains, wheelbolts

Tyre pressures

The sticker with the tyre pressure values canbe found on the inside of the fuel tank flap.The tyre pressure values given there are forcold tyres. Do not reduce the slightly raisedpressures of warm tyres ››› .

Snow chains

Snow chains may be fitted only to the frontwheels.

Consult the section “wheels” of this manual.

Wheel bolts

After the wheels have been changed, thetightening torque of the wheel bolts shouldbe checked as soon as possible with a torquewrench ››› . The tightening torque for steeland alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

WARNING

● Check the tyre pressure at least once permonth. Checking the tyre pressure is very im-portant. If the tyre pressure is too high or toolow, there is an increased danger of accidents- particularly at high speeds.

● If the tightening torque of the wheel boltsis too low, they could loosen while the vehi-cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tight-ening torque is too high, the wheel bolts andthreads can be damaged.

Note

We recommend that you ask your TechnicalService for information about appropriatewheel, tyre and snow chain size.

210

Technical features

Engine specifications

Petrol engine 1.6 75 kW (102 PS)


Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm)No. of cylinders/dis-

placement (cm3)Fuel

LPG Petrol LPG Petrol4/1,595 LPG

Super 95RONa)/Normal 91

RONb)72 (98)/5,600 75 (102)/5,600 144/3,800 148/3,800

a) Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.b) Slight power loss.

PerformanceALTEA(LPG)

ALTEA(Petrol)

ALTEA XL(LPG)

ALTEA XL(Petrol)

Top speed (km/h) 178 181 178 181

Acceleration 0-80 km/h (seconds) 9.2 8.9 9.3 9.0

Acceleration 0-100 km/h (seconds) 13.8 13.2 14 13.4

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1,951 1,951 2,039 2,039

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,456 1,456 1,495 1,495

Gross front axle weight 965 967 970 971

Gross rear axle weight 1,000 980 1,085 1,025

Permitted roof load 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 720 720 740 740 »211

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety


PerformanceALTEA(LPG)

ALTEA(Petrol)

ALTEA XL(LPG)

ALTEA XL(Petrol)

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500 1,500 1,500 1,500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200

212

Technical features

Petrol engine 1.2 77 kW (105 PS) Start-Stop


Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

77 (105)/5,000 175/1,550-4,100 4/1,197 Super 95 RONa)/Normal 91 RONb)

a) Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.b) With a slight power loss

Performance ALTEA ALTEA XL

Top speed (km/h) 184 184

Acceleration 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.3 7.5


Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1,880 1,939

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,360 1,395

Gross front axle weight 970 980

Gross rear axle weight 980 1,025

Permitted roof load 75 75


Trailer without brakes 680 690

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,500 1,500


213

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety





92 (125)/5,000 200/1,500-4,000 4/1,390 Super 95 RONa)/Normal 91 RONb)


Performance ALTEA ALTEA XL ALTEA FREETRACK

Top speed (km/h) 194 194 188

Acceleration 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.9 7.0 7.2

Acceleration 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.3 10.5 10.8

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1,959 2,022 2,032

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,439 1,478 1,488

Gross front axle weight 1,008 1,004 1,010

Gross rear axle weight 987 1,036 1,035

Permitted roof load 75 75 75


Trailer without brakes 710 730 740

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,500 1,500 1,500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,300 1,300 1,300

214

Technical features




118 (160)/4,500-6,200 250/1,500-4,500 4/1,798 Super 95 RONa)/Normal 91 RONb)






Weights (in kg)



Gross front axle weight 1,062 1,068







215

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety





155 (211)/5,300-6,200 280/1,700-5,200 4/1,984 Super 95 RONa)/Normal 91 RONb)


PerformanceALTEA FREETRACKFront-wheel drive

ALTEA FREETRACKFour-wheel drive




Weights (in kg)




Gross rear axle weight 1,055 1,085






216

Technical features

Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 66 kW (90 PS) with/without DPF



66 (90)/4,200 230/1,500-2,500 4/1,598Diesel according to standard DIN EN 590,

min. 51 CNa)

a) Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel





Weights (in kg)










217

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety


Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 77 kW (105 PS) with/without DPF




min. 51 CNa)

a) Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the diesel combustion power.

PerformanceALTEA

Automatic gearboxALTEA XL

Automatic gearbox


Acceleration 0-80 km/h (seconds) 8 8.1


Weights (in kg)










218

Technical features

Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 77 kW (105 PS) DPF Start-Stop




min. 51 CNa)

a) Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel



Acceleration 0-80 km/h (seconds) 8 8.2


Weights (in kg)










219

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety


Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 103 kW (140 PS)




min. 51 CNa)

a) Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the diesel combustion power.

Performance ALTEA ALTEA XLALTEA XL

Four-wheel driveALTEA FREETRACKFour-wheel drive

Top speed (km/h) 201 201 198 193



Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1,985 2,034 2,132 2,159

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,465 1,490 1,588 1,615

Gross front axle weight 1,065 1,070 1,090 1,110

Gross rear axle weight 955 1,020 1,080 1,070

Permitted roof load 75 75 75 75


Trailer without brakes 730 740 750 750



220

Technical features

Dimensions and capacities

Dimensions

ALTEA ALTEA XL ALTEA FREETRACK

Length / Width (mm) 4,282/1,768 4,467/1,768 4,493/1,778

Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,546 1,575 1,615

Front and rear projections (mm) 916/788 913/976 940/977

Wheelbase (mm) 2,578 2,578 2,578

Turning radius (m) 10.7 10.7 10.7

Front/reara) track width (mm) 1,525/1,5091,539/1,523

1,527/1,5061,541/1,520

1,534/1,5191,542/1,527

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.

Capacities

Fuel tank (I)Vehicles with front-wheel drive Vehicles with four-wheel drive

55 - Reserve 7 60 - Reserve 8

LPG Fuel tank (I) 39

Windscreen washer fluid container/with headlight washer (I) 3/5.5

Tyre pressure

Summer-grade tyres:

The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the tank flap.

Winter tyres:

The pressure of these tyres is 0.2 bar higher than that of summer tyres (2.9 psi/20 kPa).

221

Tech

nica

l spe

cific

atio

nsA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Saf

ety

Index

Index

AABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Acoustic warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Adjusting the seat belt height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16AFS (cornering lights) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Airbags

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 20

activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Air conditioner2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Air conditioner automatic mode2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Air recirculation mode

2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Manual air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Alarm systemSwitching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154All-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Alternator

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Interior monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Tow-away protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Anti-theft wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Aspects to note before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Audible warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Automatic anti-dazzle interior rear vision mirror

Activating the anti-dazzle function . . . . . . . . . . 86Deactivating the anti-dazzle function . . . . . . . . 86

Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Automatic gearbox

Kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gearbox . . . 127Automatic lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Automatic windscreen wiping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Automatic wipe with rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Auxiliary audio input: AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

BBall coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Biodiesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Boot hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Emergency opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Boot lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Emergency opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Brake pedal

Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Worn brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123, 138Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Bulb defectControl lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 120

CCar care

Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Car care products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142CD changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Central lock button

Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Automatic locking system for involuntary un-

locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Automatic speed-dependent locking and un-

locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

223

Index

Emergency unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Centre armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Cetane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Changing gear

see Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Changing gear in Tiptronic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Changing the bulbs

Main headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Changing the lights

general remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Changing the main headlight bulbs

Main beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Turn signal bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Changing the main headlight lampsdipped lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Changing the tail light bulbsPosition light, fog light and tail light on the

rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Changing the tail lights

Luggage compartment lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Reverse light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Turn signal light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Turn signal, side and brake lights on the body . . .203

Changing windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . 194Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Checking battery electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Child seat

Categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Cleaning alloy wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Cleaning chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Cleaning engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Cleaning exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Cleaning plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Cleaning steel wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Cleaning the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Cleaning windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Climatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Climatronic

General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Clothes hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Coming/Leaving Home function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Compartment for on-board documentation . . . . . 93control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Controls

electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Convenience closingsliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Convenience openingWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Coolant fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Coolant loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Coolant temperaturecontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Cornering lightsDynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Correct adjustment of front seat head restraints . . 9Correct adjustment of rear seat head restraints

In-use and non-use positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Correct sitting position

front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Cruise controlComplete system deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Cruise speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

DDangers in not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Daytime driving lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Daytime running lights

Nordic countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Deactivating front passenger airbags

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Deactivating the airbag

Front passenger front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Diesel engine

Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Diesel engine particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Differential lock fault (EDL)

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

224

Index

Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Display (without warning or information texts) . . 47Disposal

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Door lock cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Door lock handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Doors

Childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Driver

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 8Driveshaft differential

XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Drive wheel traction control system (ASR) . . . . . 137Driving

Economically/with Respect for the Environ-ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

journeys abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120With a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Driving abroadHeadlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Driving Economically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Driving programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Driving with automatic gearbox/DSG automatic

gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Driving with Respect for the Environment . . . . . 132Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Dust filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

EEDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Electric power steering

Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 121Electronic Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Emergency braking warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 136Emergency manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Emergency opening

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Emission control system

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Engine

Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . 163Engine coolant

G 12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169G 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Engine coolant fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Engine fault

Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Engine management

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Engine oil pressurecontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 49

Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Environmental friendliness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Environmental tipAvoiding pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 134

see also Electronic Stability Control . . . . . . . . 134Example of menu use

Open the Configuration menu with the steer-ing wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Program a speed limit warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50To activate and deactivate the speed limit

warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Example of the use of the menus

Open the Configuration menu with the MFIlever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Examples of menu useOpen the main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Open the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50To close the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Exhaust gas emission control system . . . . . . . . . 131

FFastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Flexible service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Fog lights with cornering function . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Folding the seat backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

225

Index

Front drinks holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Front interior light

Switch off light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Switch on light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Front passenger airbag deactivation . . . . . . . . . . 23Front reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Front seat adjustment

Lumbar support adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Fuel

Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132, 208Fuel level

Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Fuel tank

see Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Fuel Tank

Opening the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Fuel: saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Identifying blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Identifying by colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Preparation before replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

GGear shift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126General overview of the engine compartment . . 166Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

HHandbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . . . 13Head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Headlight flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Headlights

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Headlight washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Head restraintsAdjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Adjustment of the head restraint angle . . . . . . 90Correct adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Heated front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Heated rear window

2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113heating element wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107High pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Hill driving assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31How to jump start description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Hydraulic Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

IIdentification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Information messages in the display . . . . . . . . . . 49

Information on the multi-function displayOn-screen display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Instrument and switch lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Instrument panel menu

Lights and visibility menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Instrument panel menus

Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Example of menu use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Vehicle status menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Interior monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Interior rear vision mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Intermittent windscreen wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

JJack position points

Sill panel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Journeys abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

KKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

LLifting the seat backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

general remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Load compartment in the luggage compartment

see Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . 101226

Index

Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 101Locking gear in Tiptronic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129LPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 118, 160LPG system

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

LPG System filler neckFiller neck adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101see also Loading the luggage compartment . 101

Luggage compartment net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

MMain beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 77Main beam headlights

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Main headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Manual mode

2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114MEDIA-IN connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Mirrors

Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Interior rear vision mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Mobile phones and two-way radios . . . . . . . . . . 148Multi-purpose mobile storage compartment

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

NNumber of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

OOctane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167One-touch opening and closing

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Outside temperature indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

PParking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Parking aid acoustic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Parking System Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Passenger

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 8Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

journeys abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Pollution filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Puncture repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

RRack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Radio frequency remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Radio navigation controls on the steering wheel

Audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Raising the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Rear cup holder

Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Rear fog light

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 76Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Rear interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Rear reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Rear window automatic wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . 85Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Recommended gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Recommended gear display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Registration light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Remote control key

Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Removing and fitting the wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Replacement keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Replacement of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Reverse gear

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

227

Index

Roll-back functionSliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Roof aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Roof carrier

attachment points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Roof storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Run-flat tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Running in

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

SSafe - security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Safety instructions

Coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40deactivating front passenger airbags . . . . . . . . 24front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Safety notesSeat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 89, 92Seat belt control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Seat belt position

for pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Seat belt protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Seat belt release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Seat belts cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Seat belt tensioner

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Seat upholstery

Alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154cleaning Alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Cleaning and maintenance of natural leather 156cleaning the trim fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154synthetic leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Selecting a gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Selective opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Selector lever locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127servotronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Sitting position

driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Sitting position, occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181, 210Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particu-

late filtercontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Speed selector lever lock

Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Start-StopActivating and deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Starting petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121, 122Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121, 122

after the fuel tank has been run dry . . . . . . . . 122Steam jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Steering wheel audio controls

Audio version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Steering wheel height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Stopping distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Storage compartment

Centre armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Other storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Storage in the boot floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Sun visor

Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Switch

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Switcheselectric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Switch lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

TTank

Fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Reserve indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

228

Index

Tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Tire Mobility Set

Check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Do not use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Inflating a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Sealing a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Tow-away protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145, 192Towing bracket, fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Towing hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Towline anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Tow starting

General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Traction control system (ASR)

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Trailer

Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Trailer turn signals

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Transporting children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Transporting objects

Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 77Tyre mobility set

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Tyre mobility system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Tyre Mobility System

see tyre mobility system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Tyre pressure control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Tyre repair set

see tyre mobility system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Tyres and wheels

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Tyres tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Tyres useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Tyres with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . 175

UUnderbody protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Personalisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Upholstery

Treating your upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

VVehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Vehicle care

Treating your upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Vehicle maintenance

electrically adjustable seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154natural leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156non-electrically adjustable seats . . . . . . . . . . 155seats with airbag components . . . . . . . . . . . . 154seats without airbag components . . . . . . . . . . 155

synthetic leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156trim fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154unheated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Vehicle modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Vehicle paintwork

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 148

Vehicle toolsStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Vehicle washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

WWarning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Warning messages

Red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 49Yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 49

Warning messages in the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Warning symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Washing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Washing with high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . 150Water

Warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Water in the windscreen washer tank . . . . . . . . . 171Wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Wearing suitable shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 210

Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175, 210Wheel trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Why assume the correct sitting position? . . . . . . . 17Why should head restraints be correctly adjusted? 9

229

Index

Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 17Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Windscreen washer fluid

Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Windscreen wiper blades

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Changing blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Changing the rear wiper blade . . . . . . . 195, 196

Winter operationDiesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Wooden trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . . 163

230

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.14

About this manual

This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the vehicle at the time this manual was published. Some of the units described herein will not be available until a later date or are only available in cer-tain markets.

Because this is a general manual for the ALTEA range, some of the equipment and functions that are described in this manual are not included in all types or variants of the model; they may vary or be modified depend-ing on the technical requirements and on the market; this is in no way deceptive advertis-ing.

The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.

The steering indications (left, right, forward, reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the normal driving movements of the vehicle ex-cept when otherwise indicated.

* The equipment marked with an aster-isk* is fitted as standard only in certain versions, and is only supplied as op-tional extras for some versions, or are only offered in certain countries.

® All registered marks are indicated with ®. Although the copyright symbol does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.

>> The section is continued on the follow-ing page.

WARNING

Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor-mation on safety. They warn you about possi-ble dangers of accident or injury.

CAUTION

Texts with this symbol draw your attention to potential sources of damage to your vehicle.


Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele-vant information concerning environmental protection.

Note

Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio-nal information.

This manual is divided into five large parts, which are:

1. Safety

2. Operation

3. Tips

4. Technical data

5. Alphabetical index

At the end of this manual, there is a detailed alphabetical index that will help you quickly find the information you require.

OWNER’S MANUAL

Altea

5P0012720BC

Ingl

és 5

P001

2720

BC

(11

.14)

(G

T9)

Alt

ea

Ingl

és (

11.1

4)

Documents

OWNER’S MANUAL - SEAT · 2016. 9. 7. · MANUAL Altea 5P0012720BC Inglés 5P0012720BC (11.14) (GT9) Altea Inglés (11.14) SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development